Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers

GE

Industrial Solutions

Evolution Series E9000

™

Motor Control Centers

Application Guide

DET291F_Section_A:Layout 1 7/7/15 1:02 PM Page 1

Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers

General

Section A: General

Product Design & Features ............................................................................................1

Bus Features ........................................................................................................................2

Unit Features ....................................................................................................................3-5

IP20 and Incidental Contact Barrier Features ......................................................6

Wire, Cable, and Nameplates ......................................................................................6

NEMA Class of Diagrams and Wiring ........................................................................7

Codes and Standards........................................................................................................8

Short Circuit Considerations..........................................................................................9

Fuse Classification ..........................................................................................................10

Environmental Considerations ..................................................................................10

Section B: Structure

Enclosure Types ..................................................................................................................1

Indoor Enclosures........................................................................................................2-13

Outdoor Enclosures ........................................................................................................14

Enclosure Options ....................................................................................................15-16

Bus Selection ......................................................................................................................17

Section C: Mains, Feeders, Incoming Lines

Mains- General ....................................................................................................................1

Fused Switch Mains ..........................................................................................................1

Circuit Breaker Mains ........................................................................................................2

Arc Flash Mitigation (AFM) Main and Feeder Units..............................................3

Feeders-General..................................................................................................................4

Fused Switch Feeders ......................................................................................................4

AFM Fused Switch Feeders ............................................................................................4

Circuit Breaker Feeders....................................................................................................5

AFM Circuit Breaker Feeders ........................................................................................5

Accessories for Mains & Feeders ................................................................................5

Options for Mains & Feeders ........................................................................................6

Incoming Line Terminations ..........................................................................................7

Automatic Transfer Switches ........................................................................................8

Transitions..............................................................................................................................8

Section D: Starters

General ....................................................................................................................................1

Arc Flash Mitigation (AFM) Starter Units ..................................................................2

Circuit Breaker Type Selection Tables ..................................................................3-6

Fused Switch Type Selection Tables ..................................................................7-10

Starter Options ..........................................................................................................11-12

Product Information ................................................................................................13-15

Section E: Miscellaneous Units

Operator and Metering Panels ....................................................................................1

Mounting Plates ..............................................................................................................2-3

Lighting and Distribution Panels..................................................................................4

Distribution Transformers ..........................................................................................5-6

Power Factor Correction Capacitors ....................................................................7-8

Section F: Intelligent MCC

General ....................................................................................................................................1

Intelligent MCC Configurations ....................................................................................2

Programmable Logic Controllers............................................................................3-7

Programmable Automation Controllers ..........................................................8-11

Example PLC Connections ..........................................................................................12

Distributed I/O & Remote I/O ..............................................................................13-16

Human Machine Interface (HMI)........................................................................17-18 envisage- Energy Management System ..............................................................19

Section G: Solid-State Drives & Starters

Adjustable Frequency AC Drives ................................................................................1

Adjustable Speed Drives - General ............................................................................2

Adjustable Speed Drives - Specifications............................................................3-5

Adjustable Speed Drives - Space Height & Assembly ..................................6-7

Six Pulse VFD Generic Block Diagram ......................................................................7

Adjustable Speed Drives - Configurations ..............................................................8

Adjustable Speed Drives - Harmonic Filters ..........................................................9

Adjustable Speed Drives - Motor Application Data..........................................10

How to Select Drives................................................................................................10-11

Solid-State Starters - ASTAT XT ..........................................................................12-16

Solid-State Starters - ASTAT BP ..........................................................................17-19

Solid-State Starters - Selection Tables............................................................20-27

Solid-State Starters - Nonreversing with Primary Disconnect ..................28

Arc Flash Mitigation (AFM) Solid State Drives & Starters................................29

Section H: Components

Spectra RMS* Mag-Break* Motor Circuit Protectors ....................................1-2

Spectra RMS Molded Case Switches..........................................................................3

Heavy Duty Fusible Disconnects ................................................................................4

New Generation High Pressure Contact (HPC) Switches ................................5

Power Break II Insulated Case Circuit Breakers ..................................................6

Spectra RMS Circuit Breakers ..................................................................................7-8

Ground Fault Current Detection Systems - Model BGFL..................................9

Ground Fault Current Detection Systems - Model GFM ................................10

C2000 Line Motor Starters ..........................................................................................11

300-Line Motor Starters ........................................................................................12-13

Overload Relays................................................................................................................14

Industrial Relays ..............................................................................................................15

Accessories for C2000 Contactor and Control Relay......................................15

CR104P Pilot Devices ......................................................................................................16

C2000 Pilot Devices ........................................................................................................17

Solid-State Motor Winding Heater ..........................................................................18

EPM 6000 Power Meter ................................................................................................19

EPM 6010 Automation Power Meter ......................................................................20

EPM 7000 Power Meter ................................................................................................21

PQM II Power Quality Meter ........................................................................................22

Three-Phase Voltage Monitors - Model SPVRB ..................................................23

High-Resistance Ground ..............................................................................................24

MM200 Motor Management System ..............................................................25-27

MM300 Motor Management System ..............................................................28-30

Integrated Tranquell* HE & ME - Surge Protective Device (SPD) ............31-32

Section J: Application Data

Approximate Motor Full-Load Current Ratings ....................................................1

Mag-Break Magnetic Circuit Breaker Trip Set Positions ..................................2

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings for Motor Circuits..............................................3

Overload Heater Tables for Ther-Mag Controllers..............................................4

Overload Heater Tables for Mag-Break Controllers ......................................5-9

Overload Heater Tables for Overload Relays ....................................................10

Overload Heater Tables for Fused Controllers............................................11-12

Starter Fuse Selection ............................................................................................13-14

Control Transformer Fusing ........................................................................................15

Heat Loss Considerations ............................................................................................15

Motor Load ..........................................................................................................................16

Non-Motor Loads ......................................................................................................16-19

Publication References ..........................................................................................20-21

Electrical Data ............................................................................................................22-23

Section K: Drawings & Testing

E9000 MCC Unit Numbering System ....................................................................1-3

Special Paint..........................................................................................................................4

Packing & Storing................................................................................................................4

Standard Commercial Tests & Inspection ..........................................................5-6

Section L: Typical Circuits

FVNR Size 1-4 ..................................................................................................................1-2

FVNR Size 5-6 ..................................................................................................................3-4

FVNR with Voltage Indicator Module ........................................................................5

FVR Size 1-4 ..........................................................................................................................6

RVAT Size 2-6 ........................................................................................................................7

2S2W-C.T., V.T., C.H. Size 1-4 ......................................................................................8-9

2S2W with MM200 ..........................................................................................................10

2S-PW Size 1-5 ..................................................................................................................11

Wye-Delta Open Transition ................................................................................12-13

Distribution Transformers ............................................................................................14

Single-Phase Panelboard ............................................................................................15

Three-Phase Panelboard ..............................................................................................16

FVNR with PLC....................................................................................................................17

RVNR-AT with PLC ............................................................................................................18

2S2W with PLC ..................................................................................................................19

ASTAT XT ..............................................................................................................................20

ASTAT XT Bypass ..............................................................................................................21

ASTAT XT Isolation Bypass ..........................................................................................22

ASTAT XT Bypass Emergency Bypass ....................................................................23

ASTAT XT Isolation Bypass Emergency Bypass ................................................24

ASTAT BP ..............................................................................................................................25

ASTAT BP Isolation............................................................................................................26

Adjustable Speed Drives ..............................................................................................27

High-Resistance Ground ..............................................................................................28

MM200 ..................................................................................................................................29

MM300 ..................................................................................................................................30

Section M: Specifications

MCC 600 Volts & Below................................................................................................1-3


Evolution Series E9000: Safety and Flexibility are Standard

GE’s Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers (MCC) provide safe and flexible centralizing of motor starters and related control equipment. It combines motor control units, feeder units, distribution transformers, lighting panels, relays, remote and local control, sophisticated communications, metering and other miscellaneous devices to be contained in a single floor-mounted structural assembly fed from a common enclosed main bus.

Rugged and Reliable

GE motor control centers are constructed of standardized heavy gauge vertical sections housing vertical and horizontal buses, wiring channels and compartmented control units.

Shipping splits are bolted together to form a single line-up assembly. Units are mounted and wired in accordance with the wiring class specified. The motor control center may be powered by incoming line connection at a single point protected by an upstream disconnect or provided with a main protective device within the equipment. Where possible, motor control centers bear UL section and unit labels.

E9000 with AFM: Even More Protection

GE’s E9000 MCC with Arc Flash Mitigation (AFM) units is a new offering for customers and specific applications where additional protection of personnel is essential. The AFM units were designed around lowering the potential for electrical shock hazards in motor control centers.

The AFM unit design includes optional IP20 devices and incidental contact safety barriers in an effort to prevent accidental contact with energized parts during maintenance.

New Level of Arc Flash Mitigation

The E9000 AFM units are designed to reduce the likelihood of exposure to electrical shock and the potential of internal arcing faults from occuring during maintenance. The retractable stab mechanism allows for closed-door racking of the unit, providing added protection to the electrical personnel from the dangers of an arc flash occurrence.

The introduction of a compact NEMA contactor in these AFM units will allow a minimum of IP10 protection with optional

IP20 terminal protection for starters using this contactor.

Other IP20 protection options are available in starter units including IP20 control power transformer fuses and pilot devices.

E9000 MCC

E9000 MCC with Arc Flash Mitigation Units


General

Product Design and Features

Design flexibility, performance, personnel and equipment pro tection, ease of maintenance and installation are all contained in the Evolution Series E9000*. Evolution Series E9000 features, such as separate wiring troughs, split-type terminal boards, isolated bus, drawout starter units, operating mechanisms, and provisions for starter interchangeability, are designed for a high level of reliability, safety and convenience.

The new Arc Flash Mitigation (AFM) units were added in order to provide additional safety features and flexibility for customers.

Easily removable plastic knock-outs are provided in the vertical wireway ladder assembly to allow routing of field wiring into units.

A

Enclosure Features

These steel-enclosed control centers can be joined together to centralize, protect and control the most complex systems of industrial auxiliary drives, or the simplest of loads such as fan or pump controls. As the need arises, additional sections can be added to an existing lineup in the field, often times without the need for a transition section.

An incoming-line terminal compartment can be located at the top or bottom of a vertical section to allow cable termination with minimum bending. The standard 600-ampere incoming line terminal compartment shown is furnished with mechanical type lugs. Other incoming line terminal compartments are available for main bus ampacities up to 2500 amperes.

A paint finish is applied to all un-plated steel parts. The powder coating process passes 1000 Hr. ASTM117B salt spray tests and provides lasting protection.

An optional snap-in steel barrier in the wireway provides added isolation for low voltage signal wiring between units.

All case side wireways are roll-formed to provide a 1/2" lip for cross wiring to rest on, thus preventing skinned insulation.

A1

A


General

Insulated and Isolated Vertical Bus

Bus Features

Splicing

E9000 MCC can be spliced onto existing 7700 Line, 8000 Line and

Spectra MCC for 1200A (supplied with 2" bars) and below without a transition section. Horizontal bus location in E9000 matches the existing bus location. Main bus amperage 1200A and greater with

4" bus bars can be spliced together but requires a transition section.

A polyester-reinforced “sandwich” insulates and isolates the vertical bus and helps prevent the spread of faults from starter and feeder units to vertical or horizontal bus. Small stab openings provide access to vertical bus and maintains effective isolation. 65kA short circuit bracing is standard for Evolution Series E9000 MCC.

Vertical Bus Shutters

Main Bus Barrier

Clear Lexan barriers located in front of the main horizontal bus isolate the bus from the top horizontal wireway. Maintenance personnel can easily gain entrance to the top horizontal wireway of the control center without danger of contact with a live bus.

Infrared Scanning

(Optional) For standard E9000 MCC’s, a vertical bus shutter mechanism can be supplied which covers the vertical bus stab area when a plug-in starter or feeder is withdrawn. Cap plugs are standard to close unused stab openings.

(Standard for AFM) For E9000 AFM, a vertical bus shutter mechanism is supplied as standard. The shutter will be mechanically closed when the stabs are retracted, isolating the bus and preventing contact. When the stab is extended and engaged with the bus, the shutter will reverse the operation.

Windows on the main bus are available when required.

Please contact the factory for further information.

Vertical Ground Bus and Unit Ground Stab

The vertical bus shutter for AFM design is different than the standard E9000 vertical bus shutter option. The AFM shutter and shutter guide are shown above.

(Optional) Vertical copper ground bus allows direct grounding of unit saddles to the equipment ground bus. A unit ground bus stab engages the vertical ground bus before the unit power stabs engage the vertical bus. A load ground lug is available for customer cable grounding. Termination points are located at the rear of the bucket, next to starter.

A2


General

Stationary Stabs

Unit Features

Doors

New doors mounted on the case feature a removable hinge pin providing easy door removal and accurate alignment.

Combination starter and feeder units of plug-in construction utilize a positive guidance system. Plug-in stabs are rated 250A and 600A. The 250A stab connections shown are made with copper unit power stabs which are under double spring pressure and engage the vertical bus to provide positive contact.

Retractable Stabs

A

AFM doors have a visual stab and shutter indicator feature as well as a remote racking provision.

Extended Stabs

New oversized laser-engraved unit nameplates on 12" units and larger feature 1 to 9 lines of up to 20 characters 0.18" high or 4 lines of up to 10 characters 0.30" high. Nameplates use Microsoft ®

Windows

®

Arial font. Custom non-English characters are an option.

Retracted Stabs

AFM unit stabs are retractable while maintaining a closed-door unit. They move in a horizontal motion to engage and disengage from the bus when retracted (below) or extended (above).

Device bracket mounts 30mm for compact pilot devices and bracket swings open to allow easy access to unit components, wiring and terminal blocks. Fully insulated – does not require grounding.

The 600A stab shown uses a two-step engagement with vertical bus for low insertion/withdrawal force. Line side cables crimped directly into spring reinforced tin-plated copper stabs. No hidden line side cable in rear of units. Tapered glass polyester stab mounting base gives positive plug-in alignment with vertical bus.

A3

Disconnects

A

Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers

General

Unit Features

(continued)

Safety Interlocks

Lift up handle design to allow full access to fuses and

CB rating plug. Position indication ON-TRIP-OFF.

An interlock release system is provided so that – if it becomes necessary for maintenance purposes – the disconnect may be closed with the door open. A by-pass is provided to allow opening the door with the disconnect closed.

Note: Only qualified personnel familiar with the equipment should use the interlock release and by-pass features.

Horizontal handles are standard on 6" 150A and 12" 250A feeder breakers to optimize space. Optional vertical handles are available, but will increase the unit height. Horizontal handles are not available with AFM units.

AFM units utilize a mechanical stab interlock on the top of the unit to prevent inserting the unit into the enclosure while the unit stabs are extended.

Padlocks

Units can be withdrawn to a disconnected position and padlocked for maintenance

.

The vertically mounted integral handle can be locked in the OFF position. A drilling pattern is furnished, allowing the handle to be modified for locking in the ON position

with a single padlock.

This modification should only be made afterthe user determines it is desirable to lock the disconnect in the ON position. Padlock to have maximum 3/8" shackle.

A4


General

Unit Features

(continued)

Interchangeable Units

Unit Features

For flexibility, many units can be interchanged. This design allows quick, easy field changes when modifications are desired after installation. Front accessible quarter-turn latches provide for ease of securing and withdrawal of all plug-in units.

High density two-piece, pull-apart control terminal boards feature up to 18 points in 12” high units. External and internal unit connections are made on opposite sides, allowing the unit to be withdrawn without disconnecting control wiring. Accommodates up to (2) #12 AWG wires with ring, fork or bare terminations.

Rated 30 Amps, 600 Vac. Meets NEC Article 430.74.

A

AFM Retrofit Kit Unit Shelves

With the AFM unit, a different unit shelf is required to support the movement of the unit while it is being racked in or racked out.

When retrofitting an existing E9000 MCC, a Retrofit Kit will need to be ordered with the AFM Retrofit bucket. The Retrofit Kit will include this AFM shelf.

(Optional) Motor power terminal blocks can be supplied in Size

1 & 2 to allow disconnecting motor wires when removing a unit.

NEMA Type BT wiring.

The E9000 MCC unit is equipped with the CR305 contactor as standard configuration. The C2000 contactor is available for many configurations to obtain a compact footprint.

AFM units can be ordered to retrofit existing E9000 MCC by ordering the AFM Retrofit Kit along with the unit.

The E9000 AFM unit is equipped with the C2000 contactor as standard configuration. The CR305 contactor is available for most configurations. Please contact factory if the CR305 contactor is required in an AFM unit.

A5

A


General

IP20 and Incidental Contact Barrier Features

(Optional)

IP20 rated fuses are available.

Please contact factory.

Wire and Cable

Standard control and power wire includes flame-retardant,

(VW-1) moisture-heat-and oil-resistant thermoplastic insulation rated 600 volts, with stranded copper conductors, types MTW and THW.

Standard colors

① are:

Red – AC Control

Blue – DC Control

Black – AC/DC Power and CPT primary

Green – Ground

White – Neutral

Optional wiring available includes SIS heat-resistant synthetic rubber-covered switchboard wire and XHHW flame-retardant cross-linked synthetic polymer, both rated 600 volts with stranded copper conductors, and a VW-1 flame rating (no PVC).

① Note: Not all colors are available with optional wiring.

(Optional)

CR104P Lights and Push butons are available with optional IP20 accessory.


Nameplates

Unit service designation nameplates are furnished when specified. Nameplates can be supplied as blanks suitable for field engraving, or engraved at the factory.

The standard unit service designation nameplate is of

2-ply thermoplastic material, black face with white core,

2 5/32" x 3 1/2", or 1" x 3" depending on the unit configuration, fastened with non-corrosive nylon clips. Stainless steel screws are available as an option.

Nameplates are engraved with white letters on a black background.

(Optional)

C2000 Contactor is available with optional IP20 accessory.


(Optional) Clear Lexan incidental contact barriers are available for CR305 contactor.

A6


General

NEMA Class of Diagrams and Wiring

Motor control centers are classified by NEMA as follows:

NEMA Class I Definition

①

Class I motor control centers consist essentially of a mechanical grouping of combination motor control units, feeder tap units and/or other units arranged in a convenient assembly and connect to the horizontal and vertical common power bus to the units.

This class does not include interwiring or interlocking between units or to remotely mounted devices, nor does it include control system engineering. Diagrams of the individual units only are supplied.

NEMA Class II Definition

①

Class II motor control centers consist of a grouping of combination motor control units, feeder tap units and/or other units designed to form a complete control system.

They include the necessary electrical interlocking and interwiring between units and interlocking provisions to remotely mounted devices in addition to the connections from the horizontal and vertical common power bus to the units.

The control manufacturer shall provide a suitable diagram to illustrate operation of the control associated with the motor control center.

NEMA Class IS and IIS Definition

①

Class IS and IIS motor control centers shall be the same as

Class I and II motor control centers except custom drawings shall be provided in lieu of standard drawings.

① From NEMA Standard 18-2001.

Examples of custom drawings are:

• Special identifications for electrical devices

• Special terminal numbering designations

• Special sizes of drawings

The drawings supplied by the manufacturer shall convey the same information as drawings provided with Class I and II motor control centers, additionally modified as specified by the user.

When to Specify Class I

Specify NEMA Class I control centers for independently operated motors requiring no interlocking or other interconnection between units.

When to Specify Class II

When factory interconnections are desired to provide such functions as sequencing and other interlocking or interconnection, the control centers required are NEMA Class II.

When to Specify Class IS and IIS

When custom drawings are desired to show special device identification, special terminal numbering, or special diagram size, etc. the control centers required are Class IS or IIS.

Wiring Type

The NEMA classes are sub-divided into A, B and C depending on the type wiring furnished, with type B further having type

B-D for customer load wiring direct to the device and B-T for customer wiring to a load TB (size 1 and 2 starters).

Note: For feeders and large starters, customer must wire direct to unit device terminals.

Note: In addition to NEMA prescribed wiring types, GE offers a NEMA 1A Modified MCC.

This type of MCC will be supplied without wiring and without control diagrams. GE can mount low voltage control devices on the pilot device bracket and supply terminal boards. This would be considered on OEM product.

A

Wiring Features by NEMA Classification

Class I Class IS

Class II Class IIS

Type of Power or Control Termination Furnished A B C A B C B C B C

Pull-apart and numbered control terminal boards on unit starter–Sizes 1, 2, 3 and 4 No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Stationary and numbered control terminal boards on unit starter – Sizes 5, 6 and 7 No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Pull-apart and numbered power terminal boards on unit starter –Sizes 1 and 2.

(On Type A wiring: Same type of numbered terminals on starter itself for Sizes 1, 2, 3 and 4) No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Numbered terminals on starter itself for power connection with no power terminal boards – Sizes, 5, 6 and 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Stationary master terminal boards (Top, bottom or rear of section)

For control – Sizes 1 thru 5 / For power – Sizes 1 thru 3 (E9000 Sizes 1 and 2 only) No No Yes No No Yes No Yes No Yes

Unit terminal boards for feeder tap units and distribution panels No No No No No No No No No No

Starter-unit-mounted pilot devices internally wired to starter – Sizes 1 thru 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Terminal board points for remote devices (Excluding extra tie points) No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Master terminal-board wiring connections No No Yes No No Yes No Yes No Yes

Factory-wired interconnections between units in the same motor control center No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Type of Drawings Furnished

Outline and summary sheet (Schedule of units) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Unit elementary wiring diagrams showing numbered terminal points (Terminal boards not furnished on Type A) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Unit elementary wiring diagrams showing numbered terminal points and interconnections to other units and/or to the first level of remote devices No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Schedule of wires to master terminal blocks No No Yes No No Yes No Yes No Yes

Custom drawings as specified by user No No No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes

A computerized manufacturing process necessitates that the E9000 Line motor control center standard unit numbering system be followed to identify the section and location of each unit. This is explained in detail in application data (Section J). It greatly simplifies wire tracing of interconnection wires, and is beneficial to the application of programmable control. The Outline and Summary drawing furnished with the equipment cross references the unit numbers and customer unit designations when specified.

A7


General

A

Codes and Standards

Motor control centers are manufactured to NEMA standard ICS 18 and are eligible to receive the Underwriters Laboratories listing mark under standard UL 845. Vertical sections and units which have been listed with UL will bear the UL/cUL listing mark (see right for examples). Since vertical sections and units are listed independently, it is possible to have combinations of listed and non-listed sections and units within the same control center. Sections and units which will be shipped with the UL listing mark are identified in the appropriate sections of this publication.

Section Label

The National Electrical Code (NEC) covers installation of electric conductors and equipment for installations identified in the NEC

Article 90. The NEC is not intended as a design specification and acceptance of an installed motor control center by a local code authority relies on factors independent of the equipment as shipped from the factory. In general, equipment which bears the

UL listing mark can be installed to meet the NEC. Compliance to

NEC is the responsibility of the installer. Where 100 percent UL listed equipment is mandatory or there are other special code requirements refer to the factory for verification.

The NEC defines several types of control circuits and the over-current protection required for each type. The following paragraphs provide a general reference to the NEC Article applicable for the more common control circuits.

UL #E33752, Vol. 1, Sec. 5.

NEC Articles 430.72(a) and (b) cover motor control circuits tapped from the load side of a motor branch-circuit short-circuit protective device (unit disconnect). Control circuit conductors from such a tapped control circuit shall be protected in accordance with NEC

Table 430.72(b), which lists the maximum fuse or circuit breaker rating vs. conductor size.

Seismic Label

Motor control circuits other than such tapped control circuits (common control transformers or external power source) shall be protected against overcurrent in accordance with Section 725.12 or 725.35, as applicable. This section of NEC also indicates the type power source and field wiring conductor sizes.

Where a motor control circuit transformer is provided, the transformer should be protected in accordance with NEC Article 430.72(c).

Transformers other than motor control circuit transformers should be protected in accordance with NEC Article 450.3(b).

A8


General

Short Circuit Considerations

All ratings in this publication are RMS symmetrical amperes

Short-Circuit Current Ratings

The NEMA Motor Control Center Standard ICS 18-2001 defines the short-circuit rating of a motor control center as follows:

“The motor control center short-circuit rating shall be the maximum available rms symmetrical current in amperes permissible at its line terminals. It shall be computed as the sum of the short-circuit current contributions of the motors connected to the motor control center and the maximum available current, including all other short-circuit current contributions of the supply system at the point of connection to the motor control center.”

Motor Control Center Bus

control center and sized per NEC A or 240 for horizontal bus protection. Wherever located, it must have an interrupting rating equal to or greater than the available short-circuit current at the point of its connection to the system. If located at the control center, this value would be the system available short-circuit current, I s

(Fig. 1).

A motor control center should be protected for all types of faults from low-level arcing ground faults to bolted threephase faults which can develop the full available short-circuit current. Line-to-line and line-to-ground arcing faults (often produced by contaminated atmospheres, foreign materials, etc.) can be appreciably lower in magnitude than the available short-circuit current and must be assumed not to be selfextinguishing. Even low-level arching faults are capable of releasing tremendous energy at the point of fault and can be highly destructive.

A Spectra (molded case switch) or a non-automatic insulated case circuit breaker must be properly coordinated with up stream protective devices.

Fig. 1

Figure 1 illustrates simply the basis of determining the available short-circuit current. The individual short-circuit current ratings of the main bus extensions, combination-controller units and feeder-tap units must equal or exceed available short-circuit current.

For full protection against all levels of arcing faults on grounded systems, a ground-fault relay is recommended.

The ground-fault system is a protective means that responds to phase-to-ground current, but is not affected by phase-tophase current. It is used to protect motor control centers from extensive damage, which can be caused by phase-toground arcing faults.

I s is the short-circuit current available from the system at the point where the motor control center is connected. I m is the short-circuit current contribution of the motors connected to the motor control center. If exact information is lacking, the motor contribution can be estimated at four times (4X) the continuous-current rating of the main horizontal bus. I sc is the available short-circuit current to be used as the basis for selection. Thus: I sc

= I s

+ I m

.

High available short-circuit currents of modern distribution systems require special consideration so that equipment may be operated within its rating. The cost and operational acceptability of the following should be carefully considered:

1. Use load-center distribution systems with smaller transformers which limit the available short-circuit current.

2. Use a current-limiting busway, reactors or higher-impedance transformers to reduce the available short-circuit current.

3. Use current-limiting fuses, current-limiting breakers, or breakers with limiters, in all combination starters and feeders in the control centers.

Main Protective Devices

A motor control center requires adequate overcurrent and short-circuit protection. This is the function of the main protective device. It may be located in or remote from the

Fuses are single-pole interrupters. An arcing fault may not necessarily be cleared by a single-pole interruption, as the fault can be back-fed from the other energized phases. This reduces the fault current, increasing the blowing time of the energized fuses. Because of this delay, severe equipment damage may occur. Single-phasing is eliminated with fastacting three-pole fused interrupter switches which open when a single fuse blows.

An electrically operated HPC switch with single-phase detector will meet the three-phase disconnection (single-phase protection) recommendations for a main protective device.

When switches without a three-phase trip are used, an ITI

BGFL ground-fault protection scheme is particularly recommended since damaging arcing faults almost always involve ground. It should operate the trip device on the closest line-side three-phase disconnect.

Main Horizontal Bus and Vertical Bus Extensions

The standard bus short-circuit withstand rating is 65 kAIC symmetrical amperes. Also available as an option is 100kAIC.

The bus rating must equal or exceed the available shortcircuit current. Refer to Structure (Section B) for ratings.

A

A9


General

A

Combination Motor Control Units

The short-circuit rating of a combination controller is based on tests with rated short-circuit current available at the line terminal of the control center and at rated voltage. The short-circuit rating must equal or exceed the available short-circuit current. Refer to Starters (Section D) for ratings.

Feeder Tap Units

All feeder tap units must have a short-circuit rating which equals or exceeds the available short-circuit current. Refer to Feeders (Section C) for ratings.

Fuse Classification

UL classifications are the most definitive method of determining fuse characteristics, and are used in this publication. Use UL fuse “Class” when specifying type of fuse.

UL classifications used in motor control centers are:

A. Class R – current-limiting type fuses with reject mounting features. Class R fuses are sub-divided into Classes RK-1 and

RK-5, depending on maximum peak let-through currents.

RK fuses are rated 600 amperes maximum and 250 volts or 600 volts.

B. Class J-TD – are more current limiting than RKs and due to their unique dimensions have an inherent rejection feature.

Ratings are 600 amperes maximum, 600 volts. (Time delay

Class J-TD fuse may limit component damage under fault.)

C. Class L – are current limiting and due to their unique mounting dimensions have an inherent rejection feature.

Ratings are 601 amperes minimum, 600 volts.

Fuses marked with “Time-Delay,” “Dual-Element” or similar designations are time-delay type fuses and will generally carry 500 percent rated amperes for 10 seconds, thus allowing a smaller rated fuse to be used in most starter applications.

Fuses that are mechanically interchangeable may not be electrically equivalent. Refer to the fuse manufacturer for interrupting rating and current-limiting characteristics.

Fuse Classifications

Characteristic

➀

Ampere Range

Voltage Ratings

UL Standard

Class J-TD Class R

0-600

600

0-600

250

600

Class L

601-6000

600

Interrupting

Rating RMS

Symmetrical Amperes

Current-Limiting

Rejection Type

200K

Yes

Yes

200K

Yes

Yes

200K

Yes

Yes

① Check fuse manufacturers for specific fuse characteristics

Environmental Considerations

The standard E9000 motor control center is designed for operation in a clean, indoor environment having a 40°C maximum ambient temperature.

The nominal minimum temperature for storage is -40°C and for operation, -20°C. Motor control center space heaters are recommended whenever temperature conditions below 0°C will exist. Where extreme cold temperatures are to be encountered for long periods of time. It is recommended that the motor control center be installed in heated rooms or enclosures.

For ambient temperatures above 40°C, special consideration must be given to the need for ventilation, ambient-compensated breakers and overload relays, special wire insulation and oversized control transformers. Ambient compensated overloads provide essentially constant trip setting as the control ambient varies.

For indoor environments subject to falling liquids, NEMA 2 dripproof enclosures are recommended. If water spray and splashing are to be encountered, NEMA 2 construction should also be used. Space heaters may be desirable to prevent condensation on internal parts.

For outdoor installations, NEMA 3R non-walk-in weatherproof enclosures are required. Thermostatically controlled space heaters and ambient-compensated breakers and overload relays should be considered for these applications. Provisions for heating and cooling the entire outdoor enclosure are also available. Standard NEMA 3R construction is suitable for wind velocities up to 75 mph. Beyond this, up to 130 mph, specially reinforced enclosures are available through

Strategic Equipment Packaging Services. This special design is also necessary if the NEMA 3R enclosure has to withstand seismic conditions, including seismic Zone 4 applications.

E9000 motor control center is available for earthquake conditions.

It is IBC rated. Please see DET-463.

For dusty atmospheres, see Section B.

The altitude limit for the standard electro-mechanical motor control center design is 6000 feet. Applications above this should be referred to the Company for recommendations.

Some solid-state components are only rated to 3300 feet and may reduce the altitude limit of the motor control center.

Fungus-proofing of organic materials is inherent. Keeping equipment dry and above the dew-point is the best way of avoiding fungus-growth, and the use of space heaters is recommended for this purpose. Heaters should be energized if the motor control center is to be stored for any length of time. Where export crating is involved, provisions must be made on the outside of the crate for access to space heaters.

A10


Structure

Enclosure Types

GE motor control centers are made up of standardized vertical sections housing vertical and horizontal bus, wiring channels and compartmented control units. Sections may be bolted together to form a single panel assembly powered by line connection at a single point. Normal shipping split is three sections maximum.

NEMA Type 1 – Gasketed – Semi Dust-tight, Indoor

Intended to cushion doors and mitigate vibration. Standard finish is light-gray ANSI 61 over a phosphate rust inhibitor.

All unpainted parts are zinc-chromate electroplated or galvanized. Enclosures are furnished with bolt-on rear covers.

Hinged rear doors are available as an option. Pan-type doors utilize quarter-turn fasteners. Gasketed doors, cover plates, and operating handles are available as an option.

Two heavy-duty 3" by 1-1/2", 12-gauge floor sills and 1/4" structural lifting lugs are included. Open bottom is standard.

NEMA Type 2 – Drip-proof, Indoor

Intended for use indoors to protect the enclosed equipment against falling noncorrosive liquids and falling dirt. Dripshields on top of the motor control center and neoprene closed-cell gasketing afford protection from falling and splashing liquids.

They are not water-tight. Similar to NEMA 12 gasketed construction except with catch pan-type dripshield on top and with open bottom. Dripshield extends four inches beyond front of motor control center. Standard finish: light gray ANSI

61. Furnished with removable conduit cover plates unless otherwise specified.

NEMA Type 3R – Rain-proof, Outdoor

Intended for use outdoors to protect the enclosed equipment against rain. They are not dust-proof, snow-proof nor sleet proof (ice-proof).

Type 12 – Industrial Use – Dust-tight and Drip-tight, Indoor

Intended for use indoors to protect the enclosed equipment against fibers, flyings, lint, dust and dirt, light splashing, seepage, dripping and external condensation of noncorrosive liquids.

1HG

Similar to NEMA 1 gasketed construction except that bottom plates are furnished and all removable plates are gasketed.

B

B1

B


Structure

Indoor Enclosures

Front Elevation & Mounting Locations (13", 20", 22" & 25" Deep Sections)

B2


Structure


Side Elevations 13" Deep Section 600A to 1200A Main Bus

B


B3

B


Structure


Side Elevations 25" Deep Back-to-Back Section 1200A Main Bus


B4


Structure


Side Elevations 25" Deep Back-to-Back Section 1600A to 2500A Main Bus

B

Top Conduit Entry (13", 20", 22" & 25" Deep Sections)

B5

B


Structure


Bottom Conduit Entry 13" Deep Section


B6


Structure



B


B7

B


Structure


Elevation and Mounting 30" Deep Section 600A to 1200A Main Bus

Top Conduit Entry 30" Deep Section

B8


Structure



Details for Auto Transformer

B

B9

B


Structure


Drip Pan — Nema II 13" Deep Section

Drip Pan — Nema II 20", 22", 30" Deep Sections

Drip Pan — Nema II 25" Deep Section Back-to-Back

B10


Structure


Type C Master Terminal

B

Used for L and U Shaped Motor Control Center

Arrangements

Back-to-back Configuration with Wrap-Around

Corner Section

The wrap-around corner section is standard sections which accommodate plug-in units, therefore no space is lost in the transition.

B11

B


Structure


Incoming Line Terminations

B12


Structure


B

B13

B


Structure

Outdoor Enclosures

UL Listed Type 3R Non-Walk-In Enclosure (Standard)

The standard NEMA 3R enclosure consists of a specially constructed MCC section with a mating framework which supports the roof and extended front. The basic design is similar to switchboard construction. The smaller footprint will permit a broader usage than the optional NEMA 3R construction. Meets Seismic Zone 4.

• Three-point door latch

• 90° door with wind stop

• Reinforced roof

• Crane lifting

• 2° roof pitch

• Shipped via flatbed truck

• 3" floor sills

B14


Structure

Enclosure Options

Space Heaters

Space heaters are used to prevent moisture condensation on the inside of the motor control center. One heater (62.5 watts at 120 volts AC) is installed in the bottom of each vertical section. UL requires space heaters be controlled by a thermostat. One thermostat can control up to 23 heaters and is located in the top horizontal wireway.

Extra Width Vertical Wireway

24" wide sections can be furnished with 8" wide vertical wireway and door.

A terminal board for connecting an external 120-volt power source is standard. The terminal board is located in the top horizontal wireway adjacent to the thermostat(s). This is recommended since it permits the space heaters to be energized even when the motor control center itself is deenergized. If export crating is involved, the space heater circuit can be wired to an external plug for energizing the heaters during shipment and storage.

When specified, space heater power can be provided from within the motor control center. Include the required distribution transformer with primary and secondary protection in the motor control center.

An enclosed foreign voltage disconnect switch is available as an option.

Bottom Plates

Plates bolt on to the bottom of each motor control center section. They may be removed to facilitate installing conduit.

Extended Height Pull Box (Top Hat)

A pull box can be mounted on top of a vertical section when specified. The standard height is 12 inches; 6-, 18-, and 24" heights are also available. Top, front, and end covers are removable for access.

Special transitions to 8000 line and low-voltage switchboards are available upon request. Please consult factory.

Rodent Barriers

Metal plates bolted to the bottom of each end section to close the opening between the front and rear floor sills. Not required if the floor sills will be removed or imbedded in concrete.

Motor Control Center Construction

Major Structural Components Side Sheets,

L-H & R-H 0.075"

Vertical Bus Mounting Channels 0.090"

Case Sills, Front/Rear, Top/Bottom (13 Gauge)

Top Horizontal Channel

Lifting Channel (Top) 0.187"

Channel Sills, Front/Rear 0.105" (12 Gauge)

Enclosing Covers/Panels

Rear Covers, 13" & 30" Deep 0.075" (14 Gauge)

Rear Covers, 20" & 22" Deep 0.060" (16 Gauge)

Endplates 0.060" (16 Gauge)

Top Conduit Covers 0.060"

Bottomplates 0.060"

Vertical Wiretrough Door 0.060"

Other Steel

Unit Barrier Shelves 0.063"

Unit Cover Doors 0.075"

Unit Saddles 0.090"

B

B15

B


Structure

Enclosure Options

Center of Gravity

20"

Note that bolt down locations for sections with seismic bracing change from center of structure (left to right), to four corners with .635 clearance holes for 1/2" bolts.

91.5"

Mounting Requirements for Seismic NEMA 3R with

Optional Heavy Base

Y

Z

X

ARC

WELD

NEMA 3R

END VIEW

ARC WELD ALL FOUR

CORNERS (3/16" BEAD)

FRONT VIEW

NEMA 3R

FRONT VIEW

6" MIN.

WELD

40" OR LESS

10" MIN.

WELD

6" CHANNEL

ANCHORED

10" MIN.

WELD

MIN. 8" H BEAM

ANCHORED FRONT

AND REAR

CEMENT PAD

ARC WELD DOWN LENGTH OF NEMA 3R EVERY 40" OR LESS

FOR 130MPH WINDS AND 2.25G SHOCK (LENGTH & DEPTH PER OUTLINE)

Note:

Seismic Zone 4 testing was performed using 1/2"-13 Grade 5 bolts, torqued to

70 foot-pounds, located in each of the four corners in each section.

For a uniformly loaded 90" high x 20" deep lineup, center of gravity is:

X = center of lineup

Y = 46 1/2" above bottom of floor sill

Z = 8" in from front (front-mounted devices 20" deep)

OR: 10" in from front (back-to-back construction)

Z = 5" in from front (13" deep)

Z = 8 1/2" in from front (22" deep)

Z = 11" in from front (25" NEMA 3R)

Typical variations due to uneven loads:

X = ± 5"

Y = ± 1"

Z = ± .5"

Estimated shipping weights per section

Sections

90"H x 20"W Indoor Type 1 & 12

90"H x 20"W Indoor Back-to-Back Type 1 & 13

90"H x 20"W Outdoor Type 3R

Lbs

500

700

725

Kg

272

318

329

B16


Structure

Bus Selection

All continuous-current rating selections or recommendations are based on the motor control center being located in a maximum 40° C (104°F) ambient. Refer to General (Section A) for other environmental considerations.

Vertical Bus Extensions

Vertical bus is available in 30" wide enclosures maximum.

The maximum vertical bus loading is calculated as follows:

80 percent of the feeder trip or fuse clip rating, plus 100 percent of the starter full load amps, plus 25 percent of the largest motor full load amps. This total cannot exceed the vertical bus rating. Tin plated copper vertical bus is standard, with silver plating as an option.

Main Horizontal Bus

The size of motor control center main bus and cables feeding the main bus is based on the current-carrying capacity required for motors plus other connected loads.

Neutral Bus

Neutral lugs will be provided as applicable. Neutral bus is normally sized at 50 percent of the main bus ampacity.

The capacity required for motors can be taken as 125 percent of the full-load rating of the largest motor plus 100 percent of the full-load rating of all other motors to be operated at the same time. Modified requirements resulting from duty-cycle or demand factor can be taken into account.

The current-carrying capacity required for other connected loads should be computed on the basis of 100 percent of the sum of individual loads except where a demand factor can properly be applied to reduce this total. Consideration should be given to future requirements.

Ground Bus

NEC requires a ground bus in multisection motor control centers. 300 ampere Cu ground bus will meet minimum size requirements for main busses rated through 2000 amperes.

A clearance hole for 3/8" hardware is provided in each section.

The default for incoming ground termination is (3) #2-1/0 for

300A ground bus and (3) 1/0-500 kcmil for 600A ground bus.

Ground bar comes with 6 predrilled holes for ground connectors.

Options

The following UL listed options are available:

• Shutter mechanism for vertical bus stab openings.

• Fully-insulated main horizontal bus.

• Silver plated horizontal and vertical bus.

• Silver plated ground bus.

B

Bus Systems/Selection

➅

MCC Bus

Main Horizontal

Vertical

Neutral

Horizontal Ground

Vertical Grounds

Continuous Current

➄

Rating Amperes

600

800

1200

1600

➀

2000

➀

2500

➀➂

300

➁

600/850

➃

300

600

800

1200

1250

300

600

150

Material

Cu

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Short-Circuit Rating in RMS

Symmetrical Amperes–(kA)

65 100

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

UL

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Notes

1/4" x 2" Bus

3/8" x 2" Bus

1/2" x 2" Bus

(2) 1/2" x 2" Bus

(2) 1/2" x 2" Bus

(2) 1/2" x 2" Bus

3/8" x 3/4"

3/8" x 1 1/2"

All values shown based on 1200A/sq.in. density rating. Alternate density ratings are available; if required, consult factory.

➀ Requires a 22" deep section.

➁ Will not except 600A stabs.

➂ Provided with fans.

➃ 1200A horizontal or higher.

➄ Bus ratings based on UL Temperature Rise testing.

➅ When greater than 1000A, a main breaker with service entrance must have a ground fault.

1/4" x 1"

1/4" X 2"

1/8" x 1"

B17


Mains, Feeders, Incoming Lines

Mains

General

Main units consist of an externally operable circuit disconnect, either a fusible switch or a circuit breaker. Sizes by ampere rating, short-circuit rating, type construction and space units required are given in the accompanying lists.

Normally, thermal magnetic circuit breakers or fuses are necessary for main protection. The short-circuit interrupting rating depends on the type disconnect furnished. Select a main unit for which the interrupting rating equals or exceeds the maximum available fault current.

For reverse-fed circuit breakers, refer to factory for details.

Refer to specific breaker publications for time-current characteristics and programmable options for the various types of circuit breakers. A list of these publications is given in Application Data (Section J).

Service Entrance

UL listed main units containing only circuit breakers or fused switches may be UL classified as suitable for service entrance.

If a single disconnect is furnished as a disconnect for all load circuits the unit will be marked “Main”.

UL Listed Fused Switch Mains

Interrupting Rating

RMS Amps (In thousands)➀

Amperes

Volts

240 480 600

Fusible Switches

200

400 MCS

100

100

100

100

100

100

600 MCS 100 100 100

High Pressure Contact (HPC) Switch

800 100 100 100

1200

1600

100

100

100

100

100

100

Construction

Stab-In

X

Bolt-In

X

X

X

X

X

Space

Units

2

4

4

6

6

6

Notes

➃

➃

➁

➁

➂

➂

2500 100 100 100 X 6

➀ With Class J, R and L fuses.

➁ Requires a 24" wide by 20” deep section. Full depth of enclosure is required.

➂ Requires 30" wide by 30" deep section. Must be NEMA 1 Construction, 80% rated only.

➃ Class J fuse is 3X.

In order for the units to be classified as suitable for service entrance, the incoming phase conductors must connect directly to the disconnect device line terminals or to a UL listed main line terminal assembly.

A grounding electrode conductor terminal connector sized in accordance with the circuit ampacity is furnished in one section. Three-phase, four-wire systems include a neutral bonding jumper for grounding the neutral conductor during installation. Ground fault protection is required for disconnects

1000A and above for solidly grounded wye services, where phase-to-ground is more than 150 volts (NEC 230.95).

Main Metering/Lugs

Current transformers (CTs) can be provided in the main compartment for use with a metering unit. This option may increase space requirement.

If crimp type lugs are required, a bus assembly is fabricated to provide a landing pad for these terminals. This extends the space required for the main and must be factory installed.

Size will be the same as NEMA lug option.

C

C1



C

Mains

Circuit Breaker Mains – Standard Selection

1200

1600

2000

2500

800

1600

2000

Amperes CB Type

240V

IC (kA)

480V 600V

Spectra Thermal Magnetic

150

250

600

1200

SEL/SEP

SFL/SFP

SGL/SGP

SKL

65/100

65/100

65/100

65

65/100

65/100

65/100

65

25/25

25/25

65/65

42

Power Break II* Insulated-Case with EntelliGuard TU Trip Unit

800 SSF/SHF 65 65 42

Stab-In

X

X

X

SSF/SHF

SSF/SHF

SSF/SHF

SSF/SHF

SSD

SSD

SSD

65

65/100

65/100

65/100

65

65

65

65

65/100

65/100

65/100

65

65

65

42

42/65

42/65

42/65

42

42

42

X

X

X

Bolt-In

X

X

X

X

X

X

Space

Units

1

1 ⁄ 1

2

2

3.5

6 (24W)

6 (24W)

6 (30W)

6 (30W)

6 (36W)

6 (30W)

6 (30W)

6 (30W)

UL (X)

Listed

X

X

X

X

—

—

X

X

—

X

X

X

Notes

➀➃

➁

➁

➂

➂➄

➂➄

➄➅➆

➂➄➅➆

➂➄➅➆

Entry

Top/Bot

T/B

T/B

T/B

T/B

T/B

T/B

T/B

T/B

T/B

T/B

T/B

T/B

➀ When a size 6 or 7 starter is in the motor control center lineup, use a 1200 ampere microEntelliguard Trip Unit circuit breaker as a main.

➁ Requires special section 90" high, 24" wide, 20" deep.

➂ Requires special section 90" high, 30" wide, 30" deep.

➃ Main breaker must be mounted at top of the section and requires full 20" depth of enclosure.

➄ Requires special section 90" high, 30" wide, 30" deep. When section is on the left, allow for a 5" spacer to permit unit doors on the right to open.

➅ For UL or service entrance labels provide main breaker in switchboard construction.

➆ Consult factory for availability.

Data subject to change without notice

Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment per NEC

Each main or feeder disconnect rated 1000 amperes or more and installed on a solidly grounded wye electrical system of more than 150 volts to ground, but not exceeding 600 volts phase-to-phase, will be provided with ground-fault protection of equipment.

Exception No 1: The above is not required if the disconnect is for a continuous industrial process where a non-orderly shutdown will introduce additional or increased hazards.

Exception No 2: The above is not required for fire pumps.

Exception No 3: The above is not required if ground-fault protection is provided ahead of the equipment.

Note: The above is paraphrased from NEC section 215.10, 215.95 and 240.13.

C2



Arc Flash Mitigation (AFM) Main and

Feeder Units

The E9000 AFM units are designed to reduce the likelihood of exposure to electrical shock and the potential of internal arcing faults from occurring during maintenance. The retractable stab mechanism allows for closed-door racking of the unit, providing added protection to the electrical personnel from the dangers of an arc flash occurrence. The introduction of a compact NEMA contactor in these AFM units will allow a minimum of IP10 protection with optional IP20 terminal protection for starters using this contactor. The 300-Line Legacy NEMA contactor is remain available with this new design. Other IP20 protection options are available in all starter units including IP20 control power transformer fuses and pilot devices.

For more information see page D2 and GE Publication DEA-593.

AFM Circuit Breaker Mains — Standard Selection

Circuit

Amperes

Breaker

(Up To)

Type


RMS Amps (In thousands)

480


150 SEL/SEP 100

Volts

600

65

150

250

600

SELT-L/SEPT-L

SFL/SFP

SGL/SGP

—

100

100

65

65

65

Construction

Retractable

Stab-In Bolt-In

X

X

X

X

Space

Units

1

1

1.5

2

C

C3



C

Feeders

Feeder units consist of an externally operable circuit disconnect, either a fusible switch or a circuit breaker. Thermal magnetic circuit breakers are required unless the feeder supplies a critical circuit, such as a fire pump controller.

Select the fuse or circuit breaker trip rating based on the feeder circuit continuous current rating in accordance with the NEC. Feeder unit short-circuit interruption ratings must equal or exceed the available short-circuit currents.

Fused Switch Feeders


RMS Amps (In thousands)➀

Amperes

Volts

Construction

Stab- In Bolt- In

240 480 600


30

30/30

60

60/60

100

100/30

100/60

100/100

200

600 MCS

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

400 MCS 100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

High Pressure Contact (HPC) Switch

800

1200

100

100

100

100

100

100

1600➃

100 100 100

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Space

Units

➀

6

6

6

1.5

1.5

1.5

1.5

1

1

1

1

2

3

3

UL (X)

Listed

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

—

➀ Top/bottom entry.

➁ Dual or twin feeder units.

➂ Requires a 24" wide by 20" deep section. Full depth of enclosure is required.

➃ Requires a 30" wide by 20" deep section. Full depth of enclosure is required.

Notes

➁

➁

➂

➂

➂

AFM Fused Switch Feeders – Standard Selection

Interrupting

Amperes Rating

(In thousands)

Construction

Retractable

Stab-In

Space

Units


30 100

60

100

200

100

100

100

X

X

X

X

1

2

1

1

C4



Feeders

Circuit Breaker Feeders – Standard Selection

Amperes

Circuit

Breaker

Type


240V

IC (in thousands)

480V 600V

100

100/100

150

150/150

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

65/100

65/100

65/100

65/100

65/100

65/100

65/100

65/100

25/25

25/25

25/25

25/25

250

250/250

600

1200

SFL/SFP

SFL/SFP

SGL/SGP

SKL

65/100

65/100

65/100

65

65/100

65/100

65/100

65

25/25

25/25

65/65

42

Stab-In

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Bolt-In

Space

Units

1

2

2

3.5

1/2

1

1/2

1 1/2

UL (X)

Listed

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Notes

➁

➁

Entry

Top/Bot

T/B

T/B

T/B

T

T/B

T/B

T/B

T/B

X

➂➃

➀ When feeder unit accessories are required such as shunt trip, Aux switch, UV release, etc., unit height must be a minimum of 1 space.

➁ 1X units are available with horizontal handle.

➂ Requires full depth of enclosure; (20" deep minimum).

➃ Feeder units 1000A and over should have ground fault sensing on three-phase, four-wire systems where line to ground voltage is more than 150V.

AFM Circuit Breaker Feeders – Standard Selection

Amperes

Circuit

Breaker

(Up To)

Type


150 SEL/SEP

150

250

600

SELT-L/SEPT-L

SFL/SFP

SGL/SGP


RMS Amps (In thousands)

Volts

480 600

100

—

100

100

25/65

65

65

65

Construction

Retractable

Stab-In

X

X

X

X

Space

Units

1

1

1.5

2

Accessories

Accessories for Mains and Feeders

Circuit Breaker

Spectra

Power Break II

HPC

Bell Alarm

X

X➀

X

Auxiliary Switch

Up to 2➃

Up to 12➀

Up to 12➀

Accessories

Shunt Trip

X➂

X

X

Undervoltage Release

➀ 600VAC not UL Listed.

➁ G and K Frame only.

➂ Shunt trip requires aux switch (G&K) or bell alarm (E&F) for continuous operation.

➃ Aux switch available @ 240V max only.

X

X

X

RELT

X➁

X

X

C

C5

C



Options for Mains and Feeders

Terminals for Field Wiring Mains and Feeders

Terminal Size

Will Accept Wire➁

AWG/kcmil➀

Material

Switches

30A QMW

60A QMW

100A QMW

200A QMW

400A MCS (Molded Case Switch)

600A MCS (Molded Case Switch)

14-8

14-2

12-2

14-1/0

12-1/0

(1) 6-250

(1) 2-350➂

(1) 8-600

(1) 8-600

(1) 4-500➂

(2) 6-500

300-750

300-800

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu

Al

Cu-Al

Cu

Al

Cu

Al

Cu-Al

HPC Switch

— 800-1600A

Circuit Breakers

SE150 15-150A

SF250 70-225A

SG600

125-600A

SK1200

300-1200A

1 lug

1 lug

1 lug

2 lugs

3 lugs (800A)

3 lugs

4 lugs

12-3/0

8-350

6-600

2/0-500

3/0-500

300-750

250-400

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

➀ Conductor #1 and smaller may be noted 60/75°C. Conductors #0 and larger

must be rated 75°C.

➁ Conductor sizes based on 1/Ph unless otherwise indicated.

➂ Feeders.

Key Interlocking

Provisions for key interlocking can be provided on all circuit breakers over 250A and fusible switches over 100A. The standard key lock is by Superior Lock Corporation. However, coordination with Kirk key locking will be supplied if necessary.

The following information is required when lock coordination is to be provided with other up-stream or down-stream devices remote from the motor control center:

PURCHASED BY ________________________________

ULTIMATE USER ________________________________

DESTINATION __________________________________

LOCK MANUFACTURER __________________________

LOCK NUMBER _________________________________

PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER ______________________

Note: Minimum 24" high units are required for key interlocking. UL listed option.

Ground Fault Protection

Two types of UL listed ground fault protection can be provided as an option with feeder and main circuit breakers. A shunt trip device is required in the circuit breaker to trip the breaker if a ground fault should occur. ITI BGFL ground break protective relaying is recommended for main breaker application. Model #252 ground fault relaying is recommended for most feeder applications. See Components (Section H) for description of both ground fault relay types. A minimum of

12" additional space height is required in addition to the standard space height shown for each main feeder unit.

A separate 120-volt source for the shunt trip circuit will decrease the additional space required.

Refer to page J19 for application help.

Accessories for Fused Switches

Fused switches can be ordered with up to two auxiliary contacts which are available in the following UL listed configurations: 1 normally open, 1 normally closed,

1 normally open/1 normally closed, or 2 normally open.

Accessories for High Pressure Contact (HPC) Switches

• Motor Operator Mechanism

• Remote Close

• Undervoltage Release

• Shunt Trip with Lockout

• Bell Alarm–Alarm Only

• Bell Alarm with Lockout

• Auxiliary Switch Module

• Mechanical Counter

• Key Interlock Mounting Provision

• Push Button Cover

• Door Interlock

• Blown Fuse Protector

C6



Incoming Line Terminations

The following cable terminal compartments are commonly specified for use in motor control center construction where the main AC power disconnect is located upstream of the motor control center.

For other custom cable termination arrangements refer to a

GE sales representative. The number of cables indicated must not be exceeded to maintain the short-circuit rating.

Incoming Line Cable

Assemblies

600A Std. Lug➃➄

600A NEMA Lug➁

800A/1200A

GE Std. Lug➀➃

800A/1200A NEMA

Lug

1600A NEMA Lug

2000A NEMA Lug➁➃

2500A NEMA Lug➁➃

MLO Space in inches /

Vertical Space Available Cables/lug➂ Cables/phase

Top Bottom

24/60

30/54

-

36/58

72/0

72/0

72/0

18/66

18/66

-

-

-

18/66

-

24/60

-

-

24/54

24/54

30/48

-

30/48

24/54

24/54

24/54

30/48➅

36/42

72/0

72/0

72/0

2

3

2

3

1

1

1

4

3

4

1

1

1

1

1

8

8

10

4

4

3

4

2

4

2

2

2

3

2

3

Cable Range Per

NEMA Bending➆

#2-350 kcmil

#6-300 kcmil

#2-600 kcmil

#2-500 kcmil

#2-600 kcmil

#2-350 kcmil

#2-600 kcmil

#2-500 kcmil

#2-600 kcmil

#2-600 kcmil

500-750kcmil

500-1000kcmil

500-1000kcmil

500-1000kcmil

500-1000kcmil

Minimum

Width &

Depth

Top Feed

Conduit Space

(Fig.1)

20"x13"

20"x13"

20"x13"

20"x13"

20"x13"

20"x13"

20"x13"

20"x13"

20"x13"

20"x13"

24"x13"

24"x13"

30"x30"

30"x30"

36"x30"

5"x13.7" A-B

5"x13.7" A-B

5"x13.7" A-B

5"x13.7" A-B

5"x13.7" A-B

5"x13.7" A-B

5"x13.7" A-B

5"x13.7" A-B

5"x13.7" A-B

5"x13.7" A-B

5"x13.7" A-B

5"x13.7" A-B

13"x17.7" A-C

13"x27.6" A-C

13"x27.6" A-C

➀ Space shown above is for 20" deep design 800A to 1200A MLO.

➁ Burndy type YA crimp lugs is available as an option. Crimp Lugs require NEMA drilling and NEMA Lug spacing.

➂ Mechanical compression Cu/Al Lugs furnished for 75°C cable.

➃ Cu/Al standard. Copper only lugs are available as an option. These may affect number of cables per lug.

➄ NEMA wire bending rules reduce cable size if entry is from the side.

➅ 13" deep requires full section no vertical bus.

➆ Lug cable range may be larger than the NEMA bending allows above.

Fig. 1

A

B

C

Busway Entrances

GE motor control centers include provisions for connecting

GE busway. Busway must be braced for maximum available short circuit current. Minimum enclosure sizes for busway are shown in the adjacent table. Refer to the factory for other type busway. Include busway requisition number when ordering motor control center.

Spectra Series Busway

Entry

Top

Bottom

Top

Bottom

Top

Bottom

Pull Box

12"

–

12"

–

12"

–

Enclosure Size

30"W x 22"D

30"W x 22"D

30"W x 22"D

30"W x 22"D

36"W x 22"D

36"W x 22"D

Std

1600

1600

2000

2000

2500

2500

Max. Busway Ampacity

Cu

1000A/IN 2 Std

Al

750A/IN 2

1500

1500

2000

2000

2500

2500

1350

1350

2000

2000

2500

2500

1000

1000

2000

2000

2500

2500

Note: Bus bars must be phased front-to-rear in 24" width enclosure. Bottom entry requires full section. For busway, refer to factory.

C7

C



C

Automatic Transfer Switches

GE motor control centers may be furnished with GE Zenith transfer switches. The switch is mounted in a separate unit and cable-connected to the motor control center bus.

Manual control, pushbuttons, pilot lights and switches may be door-or bracket-mounted within the unit. Up-stream overcurrent protection must be provided for each power source. The unit can be UL listed if all components are listed for use in motor control center equipment.

The following features apply to ZTSD open-type switches which are UL listed through 480 volts and CSA listed through

600VAC. For specific ratings and additional optional features refer to GE Zenith.

GE Zenith ZTSD Utility to Generator time delay MX 250

Module Standard Features:

6P Microprocessor activated test switch (momentary)

A3 Aux Contact - closed in emergency (Source 2)

Additional available up to 10, must be specified

A4 Aux Contact - closed in normal (Source 1)

Additional available up to 10, must be specified

CDT Exerciser no load timer

DS Disconnect Switch for source voltage to transfer power panel, 600A to 1200A only

DT Time Delay from Neutral Switch position to

Source 1 on retransfer

DW Time Delay from Neutral Switch position to

Source 2 on retransfer

E Engine Start Relay

EL/P Event Log of last 16 events

K/P Frequency Indication on the controller

LNP Center-off position LCD-Indicator

L1,2,3,4 LED lights, Source 1&2 position, Source 1&2 available

P1 Engine Start Timer (adj. To 6 sec.)

R50 In Phase monitor between Normal (Source 1) and

Emergency (Source 2) to allow transfer

S13P Microprocessor activated commit/no commit on transferring to Emergency (Source 2) (with enable/ disable settings)

T Retransfer to Normal (Source1) adjustable time delay

U Engine stop / cool down timer

V1 Voltage imbalance between phases (3 phase only)

W Adjustable time delay on transfer to Emergency

(Source2)

YEN Bypass transfer timers function (soft key switch in microprocessor )

Withstand Current Ratings (WCR) for Automatic Transfer Switches

➀

Minimum MCC

Space Units➁

3

3

3

3

3

6

6

3

3

6

MCC Enclosure

Widths (In Inches)

24

24

24

24

24

24

24

30

30

30

Switch Rating

(Amps)➂

40

80

100

150

260

400

600

800

1000

1200

Available RMS Symmetrical Amperes at 480 Volts AC

When Used with Class J or L

Current-Limiting Fuses

WCR Max. Fuse Size (Amps)

When Used with Class RK-5 Fuses or

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

WCR Max. Breaker Size (Amps)

100,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

50

100

125

200

350

600

750

1200

1200

1200

22,000

22,000

22,000

42,000

42,000

50,000

65,000

65,000

65,000

65,000

150

150

150

400

400

400

800

1200

1200

1200

➀ 3-pole vs. 4-pole transfer switches: Typically, most MCCs do not have the neutral pulled, so a 3-pole switch will suffice. If the generator neutral is bonded to the frame of the generator and pulled to the MCC to provide a single-phase connection, a 4-pole transfer switch is required to facilitate transferring the neutral from the Utility to the Generator connection.

➁ Does not include space for protection; switches must be mounted at bottom of section in order to install vertical bus above switch.

➂ Larger sizes require special over-size enclosures. Refer to factory.

Transitions

Transitions for connecting control centers to GE transformers, low-voltage switchgear or switchboards are available and generally the same depth as the equipment to which they are to be connected. Appropriate overcurrent protection for the control center must be provided.

C8


Starters

General

Combination motor control starter units consist of an externally operable circuit disconnect, either a fusible switch or circuit breaker, and a magnetic starter with an overload relay in the motor lines.

Unit NEMA sizes listed are based on continuous horsepower ratings. The maximum horsepower rating of each NEMA size controller is reduced for long accelerating times and for jogging or plugging duty. Jogging duty is defined as 5 or more contactor openings or closings per minute or over 10 in a 10-minute period. Plugging is rapidly stopping or reversing the motor by reversing the phase sequence of the power supplied to the motor. Refer to the factory anytime accelerating times exceed 10 seconds or jogging or plugging duty is required.

Refer to the factory when `Design E’ motors are used, not to be confused with Energy Policy Act (EPAC) motors.

The short-circuit interrupting rating depends on the type disconnect furnished. Select a starter combination for which the interrupting rating equals or exceeds the maximum available fault current.

Basic combination motor starter units consist of:

1. Externally operable circuit disconnect.

2. Magnetic starter with a thermal-magnetic, or electronic overload relay.

3. External overload reset operator.

4. Tapped line voltage, 120-volt CPT control power or external control power.

5. Pull-apart control terminal boards through NEMA Size 5.

6. Pull-apart power terminal boards through NEMA Size 2

(when BT specified).

7. Extra CPT capacity for operating auxiliary relays and pilot devices (when specified).

8. Plug-in construction through NEMA Size 5 (FVNR) starters.

Bolt-in construction may require vertical bus modifications.

Basic starter units are provided in tables in this section.

Starters are listed by starter function, line voltage, HP, NEMA size, and combination short-circuit rating. Tables in this section also list control power options and other options including any additional space requirements for these options

Typical starter circuits are shown in (Section K). Starters can also be used for lighting or resistive heat loads (Section J).

D

D1


Starters

D

Arc Flash Mitigation (AFM) Main and

Starter Units

E9000 AFM units are a new offering for customers and specific applications where additional protection of personnel is essential. The AFM units were designed around lowering the electrical shock hazards for motor control centers. The

AFM unit design includes optional IP20 devices and incidental contact safety barriers in an effort to prevent accidental contact with energized parts during maintenance.

Selection Tables

Circuit Breaker Type

FVNR AFM

NEMA

Size

3

4

5

1

2

Circuit Breaker

Type

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SFL/SFP

SGL/SGP

C2000

Standard

Space Units

1

1

1.5

2

–

300-Line

Standard

Space Units

1.5

1.5

2

2.5

4

The E9000 AFM units are designed to reduce the likelihood of exposure to electrical shock and the potential of internal arcing faults from occurring during maintenance. The retractable stab mechanism allows for closed-door racking of the unit, providing added protection to the electrical personnel from the dangers of an arc flash occurrence. The introduction of a compact NEMA contactor in these AFM units will allow a minimum of IP10 protection with optional IP20 terminal protection for starters using this contactor. The 300-Line

Legacy NEMA contactor remains available with this new design. Other IP20 protection options are available in all starter units including IP20 control power transformer fuses and pilot devices.

FVR AFM

NEMA

Size

1

2

3

4

Circuit Breaker

Type

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SFL/SFP

C2000

Standard

Space Units

1.5

2

3

3

300-Line

Standard

Space Units

2

2.5

3.5

3.5

A safety interlock prevents customers from opening the unit door and racking out the stab when the unit is energized. The visual indicators on the front of the units provide personnel with a clear view of the status of the stab and vertical bus isolation shutter.

AFM Features:

• Two-position closed-door retractable unit stabs

• Automatic operation vertical bus isolation shutter

• Stab and Shutter position indicators on unit doors

• Padlock for racking screw and stab-breaker interlock

• Optional IP20 safety features and incidental contact barriers

• Stab and Door Interlock: prevents opening the unit door when stab is energized.

• Stab and Unit Interlock: prevents user from taking the unit out when stab is energized, or inserting the unit into the bus when stab is extended.

• Racking Screw and Disconnect Interlock: prevents the user from racking the stab in/out of the unit with the disconnect in the “ON” position.


Fused Switch Type

FVNR AFM

NEMA

Size

3

3

3

4

1

2

Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD

Switch Amps Clip Amps

30

60

100

100

200

200

30

60

60

100

200

200

FVR AFM

NEMA

Size

1

2

3



30

60

100

30

60

60

C2000

Standard

Space Units

300-Line

Standard

Space Units

1

1

2

3

3.5

3.5

1.5

1.5

2.5

3.5

4

4

C2000

Standard

Space Units

300-Line

Standard

Space Units

1.5

2

4

2

2.5

4.5

For information, please see GE publication DEA-593.

D2


Starters



208 Volts, 60 Hertz – Combination Motor Starters

FVNR

NEMA

Size

3

4

1

2

5

6

Max.

Hp

7.5

10

25

40

75

150

IC

(kA)

65/100

65/100

65/100

65/100

100

65

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SFL/SFP

SGL

SKL

Space

Units

1

1

1.5

2

3

4

Notes

➁

Part Winding

NEMA

Size

3

4

5

1

2

Max.

Hp

10

20

40

75

–

IC

(kA)

65/100

65/100

65/100

100

–

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SFL/SEP

SGL

–

Space

Units

2

2

4.5

5

–

Y-Delta

NEMA

Size

4

5

6

2

3

Max.

Hp

20

40

60

150

300

IC

(kA)

65/100

65/100

100

100

100

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

TGL

TGL

TGL

Space

Units

4

5

5.5

5.5

5.5

FVR

NEMA

Size

1

2

3

5

6

4

5

6

Max.

Hp

75

150

7.5

10

25

40

75

150

IC

(kA)

100

65

65/100

65/100

65/100

65/100

100

65

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SGL

SKL

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SFL/SFP

SGL

SKL

Space

Units

3

3.5

2

2

3.5

4

5.5

8.5

Notes

➀

Notes

➂

2S1W, 2S2W

NEMA

Size

Max. Hp

Constant

Variable Torque

Constant

HP

6

1

4

5

2

3

4

5

40

75

150

7.5

10

25

40

75

30

60

100

5

7.5

20

30

60

IC (kA)

Circuit

Breaker

Type

25

30

SFL

SGL

65 SGL/SKL

65/100 SEL/SEP

65/100 SEL/SEP

65/100 SEL/SEP

65/100 SFL/SFP

100 SGL

Space

Units

Notes

4.5

5

8.5

2

2

4

4.5

5.5

➀

Rev

Space

Units

7.5

10

–

2.5

3

4.5

5.5

10

RVAT

NEMA

Size

6

2

3

4

5

4

5

6

Max.

Hp

40

75

150

10

25

40

75

100

IC

(kA)

25

100

65

65/100

65/100

65/100

100

65

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SFL

SGL

SKL

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SEL/SFP

SGL

SKL

Space Units

13" Deep 20" Deep

5

–

N/A

4

5

5.5

–

N/A

4

5

12

4

4

4.5

5

12

Notes

➀

➁

➀

D

Note: The space requirements shown in these tables are minimum. Where layout dimensions are critical, refer to factory. One space unit or X unit equals 12 inches of vertical height.

➀ Size 6 FVR, RVAT, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24" wide sections, 20" deep (2S1W).

➁ A 1/2X compact starter is available.

➂ Refer to factory.

D3

D


Starters




FVNR

NEMA

Size

5

6

3

4

6

1

2

Max.

Hp

200

7.5

15

30

50

100

200

IC

(kA)

65

65/100

65/100

65/100

65/100

100

65

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SKL

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SFL/SFP

SGL

SKL

Space

Units

5.5

1

1

2

2.5

3

6

Notes

➃

➀

FVR

NEMA

Size

1

2

3

5

6

4

5

6

Max.

Hp

100

200

7.5

15

30

50

100

200

IC

(kA)

100

65

65/100

65/100

65/100

65/100

100

65

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SGL

SKL

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SFL/SFP

SGL

SKL

Space

Units

5.5

8.5

2

2

3

3

5.5

8.5

Notes

➀

➁

➀

➁

RVAT

NEMA

Size

2

3

5

6

4

5

Max.

Hp

100

200

15

30

50

100

IC

(kA)

100

65

65/100

65/100

65/100

100

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SGL

SKL

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SFL/SFP

SGL

Space Units

13" Deep 20" Deep

N/A

N/A

4

5

6

N/A

5

12

4

4

4.5

5

Notes

➁

Part Winding

NEMA

Size

2

3

4

4

5

1

5

Max.

Hp

25

50

75

–

–

10

–

IC

(kA)

–

–

65/100

65/100

65/100

100

–

Circuit

Breaker

Type

–

–

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SGL

–

Space

Units

2

4.5

5

–

–

2

–

Notes

➂

➂

Y-Delta

NEMA

Size

2

3

4

4

5

5

Max.

Hp

75

–

25

50

75

150

IC

(kA)

100

–

65/100

65/100

100

100

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SGL

–

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SGL

SGL

Space

Units

5.5

–

4

5

5.5

5.5

Notes

➀

➂

➀

➀

➂

2S1W, 2S2W

NEMA

Size

Max. Hp

Constant

Variable Torque

Constant

HP

IC (kA)

4

5

2

3

4

5

6

1

15

30

50

100

50

100

200

7.5

20

40

75

150

40

75

150

7.5

Circuit

Breaker

Type

25

30

SFL

SGL

65 SKL

65/100 SEL/SEP

65/100 SEL/SEP

65/100 SEL/SEP

65/100 SFL/SFP

100 SGL

Space

Units

Notes

4.5

5.5

8.5

2

2

4

4.5

5.5

➁

➁

➁

Rev

Space

Units

3

4.5

7.5

10

5.5

10

–

2.5


➀ Requires 24" wide section.

➁ Size 6 FVR, RVNR, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24" wide sections, 20" deep (2S2W).


➃ A 1/2X compact starter is available.

D4

FVR

NEMA

Size

1

2

3

4

5

6

4

5

6


Starters




FVNR

NEMA

Size

5

6

1

2

5

6

3

4

Max.

Hp

200

400

10

25

50

100

200

400

IC

(kA)

100

65

65/100

65/100

65/100

65/100

100

65

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SGL

SKL

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SFL/SFP

SGL

SKL

Space

Units

3

5.5

1

1

1.5

2

3.0

5.5

Notes

➄

Part Winding

NEMA

Size

2

3

4

4

5

1

5

Max.

Hp

150

–

15

40

75

150

–

Y-Delta, OT

NEMA

Size

2

3

4

5

Max.

Hp

40

75

150

300

Max.

Hp

100

200

400

10

25

50

100

200

400

IC

(kA)

25

100

65

65/100

65/100

65/100

65/100

100

65

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SFL

SGL

SKL

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SFL/SFP

SGL

SKL

Space

Units

2

2

3

3

6

12

4

5.5

8.5

Notes

➀

➁

➀

➁

IC

(kA)

25/65

25/65

65

65

IC

(kA)

10

–

65/100

65/100

65/100

100

–

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SGL

–

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SGL

–

Space

Units

4.5

–

2

2

4.5

5

–

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SE

SGL

SGL

SGL

Space

Units

3

3.5

4.5

5

Notes

➃

➃

Notes

➀

➀

2S1W, 2S2W

Max. Hp

NEMA

Size

Constant

Variable Torque

Constant

HP

IC (kA)

4

5

2

3

4

5

6

1

25

50

100

200

100

200

400

10

20

40

75

150

75

150

300

7.5

Circuit

Breaker

Type

25

30

SFL

TJC

65 SKL

65/100 SEL/SEP

65/100 SEL/SEP

65/100 SEL/SEP

65/100 SFL/SFP

100 SGL

Space

Units

Notes

4.5

6

12

1.5

2

4

4.5

6

➀➁

➁

➀➁

Rev

Space

Units

3

4.5

7.5

10

5.5

10

–

2.5

RVAT

NEMA

Size

2

3

5

6

4

5

Max.

Hp

200

400

25

50

100

200

IC

(kA)

100

65

65/100

65/100

65/100

100

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SGL

SKL

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SGL

Space Units

13" Deep 20" Deep

–

N/A

4

5

6

N/A

5

12

4

4

4.5

5

Notes

➂

➁

➂

D



➁ Size 6 FVR, RVAT, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24" wide sections, 20" deep (2S1W not available).

➂ Size 5 RVAT cannot be mounted in 13" deep enclosure.

➃ Refer to factory.

➄ A 1/2X compact starter is available.

D5

D


Starters




FVNR

NEMA

Size

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

Max.

Hp

10

25

50

100

200

400

100

200

400

IC

(kA)

25

65

42

25

25

25

42

65

42

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SEL

SEL

SEL

SFL

SGL

SKL

SGL

SGL

SKL

Space

Units

2

3

6

1

1

1.5

2

3.5

6

Notes

➀

Part Winding

NEMA

Size

4

5

4

1

2

3

5

Max.

Hp

15

40

75

150

–

150

–

Y-Delta, OT

NEMA

Size

4

5

4

2

3

4

Max.

Hp

40

75

100

150

–

150

FVR

NEMA

Size

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

Max.

Hp

10

25

50

100

200

400

100

200

400

IC

(kA)

25

65

42

25

25

25

42

100

42

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SEL

SEL

SEL

SFL

SGL

SKL

SGL

SGL

SKL

Space

Units

3

5.5

8.5

2

2

3

3

5.5

8.5

Notes

➀

➁

➀

➀

IC

(kA)

25

25

25

100

–

42

IC

(kA)

10

–

42

25

25

25

–

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SEL

SEL

SEL

SGL

–

SGL

–

Space

Units

5

–

5

2

2

4.5

–

Notes

➂

➂

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SEL

SEL

SEL

SGL

–

SGL

Space

Units

5

–

5

3

3.5

4.5

Notes

➀

➀

➀

➂

➀

2S1W, 2S2W

NEMA

Size

Max. Hp

Constant

Variable Torque

Constant

HP

IC (kA)

1

2

3

4

5

6

10

25

50

100

200

400

7.5

20

40

75

150

300

25

25

25

25

22

42

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SEL

SEL

SEL

SFL

SGL

SKL

Space

Units

2

2

4

5

5.5

8.5

Notes

➀➁

➁

Rev

Space

Units

2.5

3

4.5

7.5

10

–

RVAT

NEMA

Size

2

3

4

5

6

5

6

Max.

Hp

25

50

100

200

400

200

400

IC

(kA)

25

25

25

65

42

100

42

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SEL

SEL

SFL

SGL

SKL

SGL

SKL

Space Units

13" Deep 20" Deep

4

5

6

5

N/A

N/A

N/A

4

4

4.5

4.5

12

5

11

Notes

➁

➁



➁ Size 6 FVR, RVAT, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 20 and 24" wide sections, 20" deep

(2S1W).


D6


Starters


Fused Switch Type


➄➆

FVNR

NEMA

Size

5

6

3

4

3

3

1

2

Max.

Hp

25

40

75

150

7.5

10

15

25

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

–

100

100

65

65



200

200

400

600

30

60

100

100

200

200

400

600

30

60

60

100

Space

Units

2.5

3.5

5

–

1

1

2

2.5

Part Winding

NEMA

Size

3

3

1

2

4

Max.

Hp

7.5

15

20

30

60

IC

(kA)

100

100

65

100

100



30

100

100

200

400

30

60

100

200

400

Space

Units

4

5

2

2

5.5

Notes

➄

Y-Delta, OT

NEMA

Size

3

4

4

2

3

2

2

Max.

Hp

30

40

60

7.5

10

15

20

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

65

100

100

100



60

60

100

100

200

200

400

30

30

60

100

200

200

400

Space

Units

5

5

6

3

4

3

3

Notes

➁

➀

➀

➀

➃

FVR

NEMA

Size

3

3

1

2

4

5

6

Max.

Hp

7.5

10

15

25

40

75

–

IC

(kA)

100

100

65

65

100

100

–



30

60

30

60

100

100

200

400

60

100

200

400

– –

Space

Units

1.5

2

3

3.5

5

9.5

–

Notes

➄

➄

➂➅

RVAT

NEMA

Size

3

4

2

3

5

6

Max.

Hp

10

15

25

40

75

–

IC

(kA)

100

65

65

100

100

–

Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD Space Units

Switch Amps Clip Amps 13" Deep 20" Deep

60

100

100

200

400

–

60

60

100

200

400

–

4

5

5

6

–

–

4

5

4

4

6

–

Notes

➄

➄

➂

2S1W, 2S2W

3

3

2

2

4

5

1

4

5

6

1

2

2

3

3

NEMA

Size

–

10

15

25

40

75

7.5

40

75

100

Max. Hp

CT VT Constant HP

7.5

–

10

15

25

5

7.5

–

15

20

7.5

–

15

20

–

–

5

–

–

–

IC

100

100

100

100

100

65

65

100

100

–

100

100

100

65

65


200

400

30

60

60

100

100

200

400

600

30

60

60

100

100

30

30

60

60

100

200

400

30

30

60

60

100

200

400

600

Space

Units

2

2

3.5

3.5

5.5

8.5

2

5.5

8.5

8.5

2

2

2

3.5

3.5

Notes

➄

➄

➂

➄

➄

➂

➂

D



➁ Size 1 not available. Use Size 2.

➂ Size 5 FVR, 2S1W, 2S2W with fused switch requires (2) adjacent sections; left hand section is 24" wide 6X, right hand section is 20" wide with top 31/2X used for disconnect.

➃ Size 4 Wye-Delta with fused switch requires a 24" wide section when main horizontal bus is rated 1000 ampere UL or less. A 30" wide section is required with 1200 ampere

UL or higher rated main horizontal bus.

➄ Use size 4 spacing for 100k ratings.

➅ Requires 12" bottom wireway cover to UL Label.

➆ All 400/600A units are MCS (molded case switches).

D7

D


Starters


Fused Switch Type


➄➆

FVNR

NEMA

Size

3

3

1

2

4

5

6

Max.

Hp

7.5

15

30

30

50

100

200

IC

(kA)

100

100

65

100

100

100

100



30

60

30

60

100

200

200

400

100

200

200

400

600 600

Space

Units

1

1

2

2.5

3.5

5

5.5

Notes

➅

➀

Part Winding

NEMA

Size

2

3

1

2

4

Max.

Hp

7.5

15

20

30

60

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

65

100



30

60

100

100

400

30

60

100

100

400

Space

Units

2

4

2

2

5.5

Notes

➅

Y-Delta, OT

NEMA

Size

2

2

2

2

3

4

Max.

Hp

7.5

10

15

20

30

60

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

65

100



60

60

60

100

100

400

30

30

60

100

100

400

Space

Units

4

4

4

4

4.5

6

Notes

➀➅

➃

FVR

NEMA

Size

3

4

1

2

5

6

Max.

Hp

7.5

15

30

50

100

200

IC

(kA)

100

100

65

100

100

100



30

60

30

60

100

200

400

100

200

400

600 600

Space

Units

1.5

2

3

5

8.5

8.5

Notes

➅

➂➅

➁

RVAT

NEMA

Size

Max.

Hp

4

5

2

3

6

15

30

50

100

200

IC

(kA)

100

65

100

100

100



Notes

60

100

200

400

600

60

100

200

400

600

4

5

6

–

N/A

4

4

5

6

12

➅

➁

2S1W, 2S2W

7.5

–

15

30

–

50

100

7.5

–

15

30

–

50

100

200

NEMA

Size

Max. Hp


4

5

3

4

1

2

2

1

2

2

4

5

3

4

6

25

30

40

75

5

7.5

10

5

7.5

10

25

30

40

75

150

IC

100

100

100

65

100

100

100

100

100

100

65

100

100

100

100


Space

Units

Notes

30

60

60

100

200

200

400

30

60

60

100

200

200

400

600

30

30

60

100

100

200

400

30

30

60

100

100

200

400

600

4

5.5

5.5

8.5

2

2

2

2

2

2

4

5.5

5.5

8.5

8.5

➅

➂

➅

➂

➁



➁ Size 6 FVR, RVNR, 2S1W, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24" wide sections, 20" deep.

➂ Size 5 FVR, 2S1W, 2S2W with fused switch requires (2) adjacent sections; left hand section is 24" wide 6X, right hand section is 20” wide with top 31/2 X used for disconnect.

➃ Size 4 Wye-Delta with fused switch requires a 24” wide section when main horizontal bus is rated 1000 ampere UL or less. A 30” wide section is required with 1200 ampere


➄ Use time-delay fuse, maximum rating same as switch amps.

➅ Use size 4 spacing for 100k ratings.


D8


Starters


Fused Switch Type


➅

FVNR

NEMA

Size

5

5

3

4

6

6

2

3

1

2

Max.

Hp

50

100

125

200

10

15

25

30

250

400

IC

(kA)

65

100

100

100

100

100

100

65

100

100



100

200

400

400

30

60

60

100

600

600

100

200

200

400

30

30

60

60

400

600

Space

Units

2.5

3.5

5

5

6

6

1

2

1

1

Notes

➀

➀

Part Winding

NEMA

Size

2

2

1

1

3

4

Max.

Hp

10

15

25

30

60

150

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100



30

60

60

100

200

400

30

30

60

60

200

200

Space

Units

2

2

2

2

5

5.5

Y-Delta, OT

NEMA

Size

4

4

3

3

2

2

2

2

Max.

Hp

50

60

100

125

10

15

25

30

IC

(kA)

65

100

100

100

100

100

100

100



100

200

200

400

60

60

60

100

100

200

200

200

30

30

60

60

Space

Units

6

6

4

5

3

3

3

3

Notes

➂

➀

➀

➀

➄

FVR

NEMA

Size

5

5

3

4

6

2

3

1

2

Max.

Hp

50

100

125

200

250

10

15

25

30

IC

(kA)

65

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

65



100

200

400

400

600

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

30

30

60

60

Space

Units

3.5

5

8.5

8.5

8.5

1.5

2

2

3

Notes

➃

➃

➁

2S1W

NEMA

Size

Max. Hp


4

5

3

3

1

2

2

5

6

6

10

15

25

30

50

100

125

200

250

400

7.5

15

20

30

40

75

100

150

250

300

IC

100

100

100

65

65

100

100

100

100

100


30

60

60

100

100

200

400

400

600

600

30

30

60

60

100

200

200

400

400

600

Space

Units

4

4

5.5

8.5

2

2

2

8.5

8.5

8.5

Notes

➃

➃

➁

➁

RVAT

5

6

4

5

6

3

3

2

2

NEMA

Size

Max.

Hp

IC

(kA)



15 100

25 100

30

50

65

65

100 100

125 100

200 100

250 100

400 100

200

400

400

600

600

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

600

30

60

60

100

6

–

–

N/A

N/A

5

5

4

4

5

6

6

12

12

4

4

4

4

Notes

➁

➁



➁ Size 6 FVR, RVNR, 2S1W, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24" wide sections, 20" deep with

12" bottom wireway cover.

➂ Size 1 not available. Use Size 2.

➃ Size 5 FVR, 2S1W, 2S2W with fused switch requires (2) adjacent sections; left hand section is 24" wide 6X, right hand section is 20" wide with top 3 1/2 X used for disconnect.

➄ Size 4 Wye-Delta with fused switch requires a 24" wide section when main horizontal bus is rated 1000 ampere UL or less. A 30" wide section is required with 1200 ampere


➅ All 400/600A units are MCS (molded case switches).

2S2W

5

6

4

5

6

NEMA

Size

Max. Hp


1

2

10

15

7.5

15

2

3

3

25

30

50

20

30

40

100

125

200

250

400

75

100

150

250

300

IC

100

100

100

65

65

100

100

100

100

100


30

60

60

100

100

200

400

400

600

600

30

30

60

60

100

200

200

400

400

600

Space

Units

2

4

4

2

2

5.5

8.5

8.5

8.5

8.5

Notes

➃

➃

➁

➁

D9

D


Starters


Fused Switch Type


➄➅

FVNR

NEMA

Size

3

3

1

2

4

5

6

Max.

Hp

10

25

40

50

100

200

400

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100



30

60

30

60

100

100

200

400

60

100

200

400

600 600

Space

Units

1

1

2

2.5

3.5

5

6

D

FVR

NEMA

Size

3

3

1

2

4

5

6

Max.

Hp

10

25

40

50

100

200

400

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100



30

60

30

60

100

200

200

400

60

100

200

400

600 600

Space

Units

1.5

2

3

5

5

8.5

8.5

Notes

➃

➁

RVAT

NEMA

Size

3

4

2

3

5

6

Max.

Hp

25

40

50

100

200

400

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100



60

200

200

200

400

600

60

60

100

200

400

600

4

6

6

6

–

N/A

5

5

4

5

6

12

Notes

➁

Part Winding

NEMA

Size

3

4

4

2

3

1

1

Max.

Hp

10

15

25

50

75

100

150

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100



30

60

60

200

200

200

400

30

30

60

100

200

200

400

Space

Units

5

5

6

2

5

2

2

Y-Delta, OT

NEMA

Size

4

4

3

3

5

2

2

2

2

Max.

Hp

50

75

100

150

–

10

15

20

25

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

–

100

100

100

100



200

200

200

400

–

60

60

60

60

100

200

200

400

–

30

30

60

60

Space

Units

6

6

4

4

–

3

3

3

3

Notes

➂

➀

➀

➀

➄

➅

2S1W, 2S2W

6

1

2

4

5

1

2

3

3

4

5

3

3

6

NEMA

Size

100

200

400

10

25

40

50

100

200

400

Max. Hp


10

25

40

50

7.5

–

40

–

IC

100

100

100

100

–

–

–

7.5

–

40

–

–

–

–

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100


200

400

600

30

60

30

60

200

200

200

200

200

400

600

200

400

600

30

60

30

60

60

100

60

100

200

400

600

Space

Units

5.5

8.5

8.5

2

2

2

2

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

8.5

8.5

Notes

➃

➁

➃

➁



➁ Size 6 FVR, RVNR, 2S1W, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24" wide sections, 20" deep with

12" bottom wireway cover.

➂ Size 1 not available. Use Size 2.

➃ Size 5 FVR, 2S1W, 2S2W with fused switch requires (2) adjacent sections; left hand section is 24" wide 6X, right hand section is 20" wide with top 3 1/2 X used for disconnect.

➄ Size 4 Wye-Delta with fused switch requires a 24" wide section when main horizontal bus is rated 1000 ampere UL or less. A 30" wide section is required with 1200 ampere


➅ Refer to factory.


D10


Starters

Starter Options

Option

Control

Transformer

Function

Provides control power.

See “Control Transformer” for details

CPT Primary Fuses Class CC fuse wired in each ungrounded transformer primary conductor.

Additional

Space Required

–

CPT Secondary

Fuse

One midget fuse (typical Gould Ferraz type TRM) wired in ungrounded Control

Power Conductor

–

Control Power

Fuse

Starter Overload

Protection

Pilot Lights

Full Voltage

Transformer

LED

Push-to-test

Push buttons

Start-Stop

Stop

Stop

Fwd, Rev, Stop

Fast, Slow, Stop

One Class CC fuse wired in each ungrounded control power conductor.

Use when control power source is remote from unit.

For more information see Section J.

CR104P type.

Red–ON FAST, FWD, UP

Amber–DOWN, REV, SLOW

Green–STOPPED, READY

CR104P with 6V lamp

(See full voltage lights for lens colors)

CR104P Type transformer type with 6V LED Lamp

CR104P, Full-voltage transformer type, or LED (See full-voltage lights for lens colors)

CR104P momentary type-use with FVNR starters with 3-wire control.

CR104P momentary type-provides stop function at MCC with 3-wire control.

CR104P maintained type–provides stop function at MCC with 2/3 wire control.

Can be furnished with mushroom head and provision for locking open.

CR104P momentary type-use with FVR starters.

CR104P momentary type-use with 2-speed starters.

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Option

Selector Switches

On-Off

Hand-Off-Auto

Function

CR104P maintained type–use as permissive start with 2 or 3 wire control.

CR104P maintained type–use to select auto or manual start with

2-wire control.

Fast-Slow-Off-Auto CR104P maintained type–use with 2-speed starters.

Fixed Control TB

Power TB

Power TB

Control

Disconnect

Control Relay

Timing Relays

Pneumatic

Timing Relays

Electronic

Stationary control terminal boards in place of split type terminal boards.

Stationary motor lead terminal boards Size 3 and 4

Split Type terminal blocks on

Nema Size 1 and 2

High density pull-apart TB will provide foreign voltage isolation without disengaging the unit vertical bus stabs.

C2000 Type (standard) Rated 600V, with 10A contacts. Relays are available with normally open and normally closed non-convertible contacts. Up to four additional contact blocks can be added to basic 4 pole relay. Size 1 and

Size 2 FVNR starters require an additional half-space unit for three to four relays. Two relays can be added with no increase in space units.

C2000 (standard) .3 to 3 seconds or

10 to 180 seconds timing range. 10A contacts. 4 INST and 2 TD interlocks

(NO and NC).

Time-delay on energization/deenergization double pole, double throw contacts rated 600V, 10A. Timing ranges 1-10 or 10-300 seconds.

Additional

Space Required

–

–

–

–

Yes

–

–

Yes

Yes

D

D11


Starters

D

Starter Options

Additional

Option Function Space Required

Motor Driven Used for long timing periods. 1/2X

Specify timing range.

Accelerating C2000 (standard) timing relay for

Relay multi-speed motors to provide definite

accelerating time for each speed above

first speed. Time interval is adjustable

.3 to 30 seconds. Alternate Electronic

Timer.

Decelerating C2000 (standard) timing relay allows

Relay time for motor to coast stop before

permitting restart or coast to a lower

speed on multi-speed motors before

initiating slow speed operation (2-speed

motors). Time interval is adjustable .3 to

30 seconds. Alternate Electronic Timer.

Compelling On multi-speed starters, requires the

Relays controller to progress in sequence from

low to high speed. One relay is required

for each speed over one. Requires same

space as C-2000 timing relay. Alternate

Electronic Timer.

Latch CR120BL, 4 pole. Once relay closes,

Relay mechanical latch holds relay closed

until electrically reset. Requires same

space as CR120B (4 pole) control relay.

Fused Switch 2-10A auxiliary interlocks operated by –

Auxiliary Interlock disconnect operator Max. (2NO, or 1NO

and 1NC)

CB Options (Spectra SPDT auxiliary interlocks mounted –

only) Aux. Interlock in CB. Refer to factory if more than

2 required.

Bell Alarm Internal CB alarm switch. –

Shunt Trip Electric remote trip. –

Key Interlock Added to disconnect operating handle –

Above 250A to require a predetermined system

operating sequence. Specify operating

sequence.

Ground Fault Zero sequence sensing Ground Fault Yes

Relay for equipment protection for

NEMA size 2-6 starters.

Additional

Option Function Space Required

Current Donut type CT located in one motor Yes

Transformer phase conductor for purchasers use.

(Also used for door mounted Ammeter.)

Amp Integrated CT/Current transducer with Yes

Transducer 4-20 MA output. (Requires 120V Power).

Ammeter AC panel-type, single current-

transformer operated five-ampere

movement. Scale selected based on

125% motor full-load amperes.

Elapsed Time Mounts on pushbutton bracket.

Meter Meter Visible from front of MCC.

Phase Loss/ APVR used primarily to sense phase –

Unbalance loss, unbalance, or reversal, has time

Voltage Sensing delay under-voltage.

Motor Winding The motor winding heater is designed 1/2X

Heater for use with 3-phase ac motors to

guard against damage caused by

condensation buildup on motor

windings which can occur in high

humidity environments during motor

idle periods. Refer to application data

in Components (Section H) (1X-size 5).

Coil Suppressor, Surge suppressors reduce undesirable

120V transients in control circuits by

absorbing voltage transients

generated by operating coils.

Door Diagram Circuit diagram mounted on back of –

unit door.

Wire markers Permanent wire number identification –

on each control wire. Tube type

standard, heat shrink optional.

Provision for PFC Terminals located between contactor

Capacitor and OL relay.

D12


Starters

Product Information

Undervoltage Protection

Standard starters drop out when line voltage drops below approximately 65 percent rated volts and can be reclosed when voltage returns to 85 percent rated volts.

Where momentary contact devices are used in standard three-wire control circuits, the starter will not reclose on momentary loss of voltage until the START button is pushed, thus inherently providing undervoltage protection.

If a maintained contact device, such as a float switch, is used to start the motor, the starter will close automatically upon restoration of control voltage. In some cases, this may not be desirable for safety reasons, and a reset pushbutton and auxiliary relay should be specified to provide undervoltage protection.

Overload Relays

Standard relays are three-leg block bimetallic type with adjustment from 90 to 110 percent of the heater rating. A single calibration adjusts all three legs. A single reset button mounted on the starter door permits external reset.

Ambient-compensated relays are available for ambients from –30°C to +80°C and have adjustment from 90 to 110 percent of normal rating. Improved protection is provided when the motor is in a relatively constant ambient but control is subject to varying ambient. Relays are interchangeable with standard type.

Optional Electronic Overload Relay and

Motor Managment Relays

Electronic overload relays and electronic overload relays with basic communication functions are available (see page

H-12). Advanced motor management relays from GE Multilin are also available (see page H-5 for MM200 and MM300).

Control Circuit Protection

Motor control circuits tapped from the load side of the starter unit disconnect, such as line-to-line control and line-to-neutral control are protected by listed, branch circuit rated fuses in each ungrounded conductor. UL requires rejection type fuses for equipment rated above 10kA short-circuit rating. 6 ampere,

600 volt Class CC fuses are furnished as standard.

Motor control circuit transformers are protected with a fuse in each ungrounded secondary conductor. Secondary fuses are UL Recognized supplementary fuses size per Article 450 of the NEC (20 amperes maximum). UL required primary transformer protection in accordance with NEC Article

430.72(c) and Article 450 fuses are furnished in each ungrounded primary conductor.

Motor control circuit power, other than power tapped from the load side of the starter unit disconnect, should be protected against overcurrent. The protective device may be located at the source or by the optional fuse(s) located in each unit. Normally, one (Class CC) fuse in the ungrounded conductor will provide the needed protection.

Where wiring external to the motor control center is indicated,

No. 14 AWG copper will be assumed as the minimum conductor size unless otherwise specified.

Long Control Circuits

On exceedingly long control circuits two problems may occur – (1) starter will not close due to line voltage drop and

(2) starter may not open due to capacitive coupling. Table below gives the one-way distances (in feet) from the starter to the pushbutton along the route of the control cable. This table is for 120 volt coils and allows for a maximum voltage variation of 10 percent. The distances are given for #14 and

#12 AWG control wire.

NEMA Size Distance in Feet with #14 Wire Distance in Feet with #12 Wire

1

2

3

4

1-6

➀

1300

460

320

250

5000

2070

730

510

395

6000

➀ Distance based on using an interposing relay, type C2000

Separate Source Control Circuits

A separate control bus is available as an option. This bus can be fed from a separate external source, or from within the motor control center by a separate distribution transformer or distribution panel.

A normally open auxiliary contact should be specified on each unit disconnect to open the control bus circuit when the unit disconnect is opened. Unit control circuit fusing should also be added.

In lieu of the auxiliary disconnect contact, pull-apart terminal boards may be specified to provide control voltage isolation for individual starters.

Pilot Devices

Pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot lights, etc., are single-unit, heavy-duty oil-tight type mounted on the starter unit door.

Auxiliary Contact Ratings

NEMA Size 1-6

AC Volts

115

230

460

575

DC Volts

125

250

Continuous

10

10

10

10

10

10

Amperes

Make

60

30

15

12

–

–

Break

6.0

3.0

1.5

1.2

1.1

0.5

D

D13


Starters

D


Starter Auxiliary Contacts (Option)

Auxiliary contacts rated 10 amperes, 600 volts are available, either normally open or closed (non-convertible). Quantities of contacts shown are maximum available and include starter requirements for cross-electrical interlocking and holding circuits. If more contacts are required than shown, a relay must be added.

Starter Type

Full-voltage, Nonreversing (FVNR)

Full voltage, Reversing (FVR)

Forward Contactor

Reverse Contactor

Two-speed, One winding (251W) ➀

Low-speed Contactor

High-speed Contactor

Two-speed, Two winding (252W)

Low-speed Contactor

High-speed Contactor

Part Winding

Run Contactor

Autotransformer, Reduced-voltage

Run Contactor

Total Control Contacts Available

(includes contacts required in basic control circuit for seal-in,cross interlocking, etc.)

1

5

2

6 ➁

NEMA Size Starter

3 4

6 6

5

6

6

6

4

4

4

3

4

4

5

–

4

4

4

4

4

4

6

6

4

4

4

4

4

4

6

6

4

4

4

4

4

4

6

6

4

4

4

4

4

4

6

6

4

4

5

5

5

5

6

6

Control Terminals

The table below lists the maximum number of high density control terminals available on standard heights units. See standard diagrams in Typical Circuits (Section K) for number of control terminals required for standard starters. Note total number of control points are in addition to T1, T2 and

T3 power terminal points.

Starter

Function

FVNR

FVR

2S1W

2S2W

Size 1

CB/FS

18

30

24

24

Size 2

CB/FS

18

42

36

36

Size 3

CB/FS

18

48

48

48

CB = Circuit Breaker; FS = Fused Switch.

CB

Size 4

FS

18

48

48

48

48

48

48

48

Starter Size and Type

➂

All Size 1

All Size 2

All Size 3

All Size 4

All Size 5 and 6

CPT Std. VA

60 Hz 50 Hz

60

150

150

150

300

300

100

250

250

100

CPT Max. VA

➄

60 Hz

300

50 Hz

250

300

300

300

300

250

250

250

250

UL (X)

Listed

X

X

X

X

X

Notes

➅

➃

Coil Characteristics

Size and Type

Size 1, FVNR, FVR

Size 2, FVNR, FVR

Size 3, FVNR, FVR

Size 4, FVNR, FVR

Size 5, FVNR

Size 6, FVNR

Size 2, 2S1W

Size 3, 2S1W

Size 4, 2S1W

Relay for RVAT Size 3 and 4

Relay for FVNR Size 5 and 6

* Compact starter inrush 88VA, sealed 9VA

Inrush

Volt–Amp

151*

528

1152

1248

2580

3360

576

1248

1336

55

55

Sealed

Volt–Amp

23*

60

83

87

191

255

75

87

95

9

9

300 Line Standard Coil Data

Size

1

2

3

4

5

6

Coil

Amps

120V

Amps

480V

Inrush 1.26

Holding .2

Inrush

Holding

4.4

.5

Inrush 9.6

Holding .69

Inrush 10.4

Holding .73

Inrush 21.5

Holding 1.6

Inrush 28.1

Holding 2.1

VA Watts Vars PF

.33

151 69.5

134 .46

.55

24 6 23 .25

1.2

528 169 500 .32

.14

60 12.9

57.9

.26

2.6

1152 230 1129 .20

.18

83 18.4

81.5

.19

2.8

1248 262 1220 .21

.2

87 18.8

84.8

.22

5.7

2580 464 2538 .18

.42

191 38.8

185 .25

7.6

3360 608 3325 .18

.58

255 44 246 .25

% Volts Millisec

P/U D/O P/U D/O

85 63

15 to

30

7 to

15

85

85

68

65

20 to

40

7 to

15

20 to

45

7 to

15

85

85

85

65

65

65

20 to

45

7 to

15

30 to

50

15 to

25

30 to

50

15 to

25

Control Transformers

Power is tapped from the load side of the starter unit disconnect and the transformer provides 120 volt power.

Two 600 volt primary fuses, plus one 250 volt secondary fuse in the ungrounded conductor is standard.

Standard control power transformer ratings are adequate to handle the starter-coil current and three pilot lights. If additional burdens are expected, larger transformers should be specified.

➀ For constant- or variable-torque motors.

➁ Limit 4 with APVR relay.

➂ Refer to Company for part-winding and Y-delta starters.

➃ Starter coils operated at line voltage. Starters operated by control relay in 120 volt control circuit. Class CC fuses are provided for starter coil circuit.

➄ Without increasing standard unit space requirements for size 1 to 4, over size CPT in size 5 will add 6".

➅ 1/2X FVNR uses a 100VA CPT.

D14


Starters


Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breaker Substitution

Substituting a thermal-magnetic circuit breaker in place of a

Mag-Break ® circuit breaker may require increasing the circuit breaker trip rating to avoid tripping on starting. See Appendix

(Section J) for recommended thermal-magnetic circuit breaker trip ratings.

NEMA Size

Starter

Standard

Circuit Breaker

Substitute

1,2,3

4

5

SELI

SEL

SFLI

SGLI

SELT

SELL

SFLT

SFLT

—

SGLT

230V

Short-Circuit Rating

460V 575V

25

100

25

100

22

25

100

65

100

100

100

100

65

100

100

100

65

25

25

100

65

Terminals for Field Wiring

Description

Starter Load Terminals

Size 1 Starter

Size 2 Starter

Size 3 Starter

Size 4 Starter

Size 5 Starter

Size 6 Contactor

Control Terminal Boards

Hi Density Pull-Apart

Power Terminal Boards

50 Amp Size 1 & 2 Type C Wiring

Will Accept Wire

➀

AWG/MCM Material

14-8

14-4

8-1/0

4-3/0

(2) 2/0-400

(2) 2/0-500

(2) 12 Max.

14-6

➁

Cu

Cu

Cu

Cu

Cu

Cu-Al

Cu

Cu

➀ Conductors #1 and smaller may be rated 60/75°C.

Conductors #1/0 and larger must be rated 75°C.

Conductors wired directly to OL device terminals must be rated 75°C Cu.

➁ #6 only with ring terminal.

D

D15


Miscellaneous Units

Operator and Metering Panels

Unit spaces can be used to provide metering and/or operator’s panels in the motor control center itself. Arrangement and dimensions will vary depending on the quantity and type of the devices required. Normally, fuse blocks, terminal blocks

(T.B.s), current and potential transformers, etc., can be mounted on a base within the unit space. Meters, pilot lights, pushbuttons, switches, etc., can be mounted on the door.

Suitable locations and adequate space should be provided so that wiring is simplified and there is no interference between door and base mounted components. The following devices are often specified.

• Pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot lights

• Ammeters, voltmeters and other instruments (panel or switchboard type)

• Instrument and transfer switches

• Electronic power meter

• Control relays

• Timing relays (pneumatic, motor-operated or electronic)

• Protection relays

• Alternator relays

These panels will be UL labeled providing all the components are UL listed for use in motor control centers.

Relay Panels

Relay panels can be furnished from 1 space unit to 6 space units with full width doors. The amount of vertical space required is generally determined by the number of terminal board points required or relay type used; when in doubt allow for a double vertical row of terminal boards.

These panels will be UL labeled providing all the components are UL listed for use in motor control centers.

Alternator Relay Panels

Consists of two motor alternator circuit using two control relays and a latching relay. Requires minimum 1 space unit height.

E

Space

Units

Maximum No.

of T.B. Points

1

1 1/2

2

2 1/2

3

3 1/2

4

4 1/2

5

5 1/2

6

12

24

30

42

48

60

72

78

90

96

108

T.B.s or relays for size estimating only.

Single Vertical Row of T.B.s

Horizontal Width for

Component Mounting

Maximum No. of

Std. 4-Pole Relays

Section Width 20”W

11 1/2"

11 1/2"

6

12

11 1/2"

11 1/2"

18

24

11 1/2"

11 1/2"

11 1/2"

11 1/2"

36

42

48

54

11 1/2"

11 1/2"

11 1/2"

60

66

72

96

120

144

156

24

48

60

84

180

192

216

Maximum No.

of T.B. Points

Double Vertical Row of T.B.s

Horizontal Width for

Component Mounting

Maximum No. of

Std. 4-Pole Relays

Section Width 20”W

6"

6"

6"

6"

6"

6"

6"

6"

6"

6"

6"

18

21

24

27

9

12

3

6

30

33

36

E1

E


Miscellaneous Units

Mounting Plates

Blank plates are available for customer use when field mounting a

PLC and/or relays. All plates come with mounting screws and door.

Full height dished plates come with top horizontal bus barrier.

Description

Min. Enclosure

Depth (inches)

Over Vertical

Bus, 9.5"

From Door

Dished

Mounting

Plate,

No Bus, 13.5” from door

13

20

Mounting Plate

Dimensions (inches)

Width Height

15

20

24

30

20

18

24

30

36

60

66

72

12

36

42

48

54

12

18

24

30

42

48

54

60

66

72

18

24

30

36

36

42

48

12

12

18

24

30

48

54

60

66

72

24

30

36

42

66

72

12

18

42

48

54

60

Part Number

110C1040MDG19

110C1040MDG20

110C1040MDG21

110C1040MDG22

110C1040MDG23

110C1040MDG24

110C1040MDG25

110C1040MDG26

110C1040MDG27

110C1040MDG28

110C1040MDG29

110C1040MDG30

110C1040MDG31

110C1040MDG32

110C1040MDG33

110C1040MDG34

110C1040MDG1

110C1040MDG2

110C1040MDG3

110C1040MDG4

110C1040MDG5

110C1040MDG6

110C1040MDG7

110C1040MDG8

110C1040MDG9

110C1040MDG10

110C1040MDG11

110C1040MDG12

110C1040MDG13

110C1040MDG14

110C1040MDG15

110C1040MDG16

110C1040MDG17

110C1040MDG18

110C1040MDG35

110C1040MDG36

110C1040MDG37

110C1040MDG38

110C1040MDG39

110C1040MDG40

110C1040MDG41

110C1040MDG42

110C1040MDG43

110C1040MDG44

110C1040MDG45

110C1040MDG46

110C1040MDG47

110C1040MDG48

110C1040MDG49

110C1040MDG50

110C1040MDG51

Description

Min. Enclosure

Depth (inches)

Dished

Mounting

Plate,

No Bus, 13.5" from door

Dished

Mounting

Plate,


20

20

Mounting Plate


Width Height

24

30

20

24

60

66

72

12

36

42

48

54

12

18

24

30

54

60

66

72

42

48

54

60

18

24

30

36

66

72

18

24

30

36

42

48

60

66

72

12

36

42

48

54

12

18

24

30

E2

Part Number

110C1040MDG70

110C1040MDG71

110C1040MDG72

110C1040MDG73

110C1040MDG74

110C1040MDG75

110C1040MDG76

110C1040MDG77

110C1040MDG78

110C1040MDG79

110C1040MDG80

110C1040MDG81

110C1040MDG82

110C1040MDG83

110C1040MDG84

110C1040MDG85

110C1040MDG52

110C1040MDG53

110C1040MDG54

110C1040MDG55

110C1040MDG56

110C1040MDG57

110C1040MDG58

110C1040MDG59

110C1040MDG60

110C1040MDG61

110C1040MDG62

110C1040MDG63

110C1040MDG64

110C1040MDG65

110C1040MDG66

110C1040MDG67

110C1040MDG68

110C1040MDG69

110C1040MDG86

110C1040MDG87

110C1040MDG88

110C1040MDG89

110C1040MDG90

110C1040MDG91

110C1040MDG92

110C1040MDG93

110C1040MDG94

110C1040MDG95


Miscellaneous Units

Mounting Plates

Description

Min. Enclosure

Depth (inches)

Dished

Mounting

Plate,


Dished

Mounting

Plate,


Dished

Mounting

Plate,


20

20

20

Mounting Plate


Width Height

30

20

24

30

20

60

66

72

12

36

42

48

54

12

18

24

30

42

48

54

60

66

72

18

24

30

36

60

66

72

12

36

42

48

54

12

18

24

30

24

30

36

42

66

72

12

18

48

54

60

66

72

42

48

54

60

18

24

30

36

Part Number

110C1040MDG96

110C1040MDG97

110C1040MDG98

110C1040MDG99

110C1040MDG100

110C1040MDG101

110C1040MDG102

110C1040MDG103

110C1040MDG104

110C1040MDG105

110C1040MDG106

110C1040MDG107

110C1040MDG108

110C1040MDG109

110C1040MDG110

110C1040MDG111

110C1040MDG112

110C1040MDG113

110C1040MDG114

110C1040MDG115

110C1040MDG116

110C1040MDG117

110C1040MDG118

110C1040MDG119

110C1040MDG120

110C1040MDG121

110C1040MDG122

110C1040MDG123

110C1040MDG124

110C1040MDG125

110C1040MDG126

110C1040MDG127

110C1040MDG128

110C1040MDG129

110C1040MDG130

110C1040MDG131

110C1040MDG132

110C1040MDG133

110C1040MDG134

110C1040MDG135

110C1040MDG136

110C1040MDG137

110C1040MDG138

110C1040MDG139

110C1040MDG173

110C1040MDG174

110C1040MDG175

110C1040MDG176

110C1040MDG177

110C1040MDG178

110C1040MDG179

110C1040MDG180

110C1040MDG181

110C1040MDG182

110C1040MDG183

Description

Min. Enclosure

Depth (inches)

Dished

Mounting

Plate,


Dished

Mounting

Plate,

No Bus,

21" from door

20

22

Mounting Plate


Width Height

24

30

20

24

30

60

66

72

12

36

42

48

54

12

18

24

30

42

48

54

60

66

72

18

24

30

36

60

66

72

12

36

42

48

54

12

18

24

30

24

30

36

42

66

72

12

18

48

54

60

66

72

42

48

54

60

18

24

30

36

Part Number

110C1040MDG184

110C1040MDG185

110C1040MDG186

110C1040MDG187

110C1040MDG188

110C1040MDG189

110C1040MDG190

110C1040MDG191

110C1040MDG192

110C1040MDG193

110C1040MDG194

110C1040MDG195

110C1040MDG196

110C1040MDG197

110C1040MDG198

110C1040MDG199

110C1040MDG200

110C1040MDG201

110C1040MDG202

110C1040MDG203

110C1040MDG204

110C1040MDG205

110C1040MDG140

110C1040MDG141

110C1040MDG142

110C1040MDG143

110C1040MDG144

110C1040MDG145

110C1040MDG146

110C1040MDG147

110C1040MDG148

110C1040MDG149

110C1040MDG150

110C1040MDG151

110C1040MDG152

110C1040MDG153

110C1040MDG154

110C1040MDG155

110C1040MDG156

110C1040MDG157

110C1040MDG158

110C1040MDG159

110C1040MDG160

110C1040MDG161

110C1040MDG162

110C1040MDG163

110C1040MDG164

110C1040MDG165

110C1040MDG166

110C1040MDG167

110C1040MDG168

110C1040MDG169

110C1040MDG170

110C1040MDG171

110C1040MDG172

E3

E

E


Miscellaneous Units

Lighting and Distribution Panelboards

The following panelboards are available for mounting in motor control centers. Type AL and AQ Panelboards with main circuit breakers are normally provided. Type AE and AD panels require a feeder unit for the main circuit breaker, which then feeds the M.L.O. panel.

Panel

Type

System

Voltage

(Maximum)

Type

Branch

Poles

➀

Ampere

Rating

A Series

Type AL

A Series

Type AQ

A Series

Type AE

4 Wire

A Series

Type AD

3 Wire

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

120 Vac

240 Vac

277 Vac

480/277 Vac Max.

277 Vac

480 Vac

600 Vac

TXQB

THQB

THHQB

TXQB

TEY

TEY

TEY

TEY

TED

TED4

THED

TED4

TED4,6

THED4

THED4

THED6

TED6

THED6

THQL

THQL

THHQL

THHQL

TXQL

THQL

THHQL

THQL

THQB-GF

THQB

THQB

THHQB-GF

THHQB

THHQB

1

2

1

2

1,2

2,3

2,3

3

1,2

1

2

1

1

2

1,2

1,2

2,3

3

1

2,3

1

2,3

1

1

1

2

3

2

3

3

3

3

➀ Two-pole THED breakers require a 3-pole space.

➁ Equipment rating is equal to the lowest interrupting rating of any circuit breaker installed.

➂ One space unit (X) equals 12" vertical height. M.L.O. panel does not include feeder space requirements. (see pg. C4)

15-30

15-100

15-100

15-30

15-100

15-100

15-100

15-100

15-100

15-50

15-30

15-100

15-150

15-100

110-150

15-150

15-150

15-150

15-70

15-100

15-70

15-125

15-30

15-100

15-100

15-30

15-30

15-70

15-100

15-30

15-70

15-100

14

65

14

14

25

14

14

14

25

25

14

18

65

65

65

65

10

22

Interrupting

Rating

➁

RMS

Symmetrical Amps

(in thousands)

10

10

22

22

65

10

10

10

22

22

22

22

65

10

Notes:

• Branch devices are plug-in for Type AL and bolt-on for AQ, AE and AD panelboards.

Maximum of 42 circuits per panel.

• Ground fault CB not available in AL panels.

• Lighting panel main bus is rated 1000 amps per square inch, alternate 800 amps per square inch is available.

• 65 kAIC rating for panels is obtained through series rating.

• For all panels fed from MCC bus, add feeder unit to feed panel.

AD

Number of

Circuits

18

24

24

30

30

12

12

18

36

36

42

42

MCC Space Units

Number of

Circuits

12

12

18

18

24

24

30

30

36

36

42

42

Panel Main Bus

Rating (Amps)

100

225

100

225

225

400

225

400

225

400

225

400

Panel Main Bus

Rating (Amps)

100

225

100

225

100

225

100

225

100

225

100

400

Space Units

➂

AL, AQ

2

2 1/2

2 1/2

2 1/2

2 1/2

4 1/2

3

4 1/2

3 1/2

5

3 1/2

5

Space Units

➂

2 1/2

3

3

3 1/2

3

3 1/2

3 1/2

4

4

4 1/2

4

4 1/2

SpaceUnits

➂

AE

2

2

2 1/2

2 1/2

2 1/2

3 1/2

3

3 1/2

3

4

3 1/2

4

The unit rating is the same as the lighting panel rating when:

A. The lighting panel is mounted as a separate motor control center unit but not connected to any power source within the motor control center. This does not reduce or affect motor control center short-circuit rating. The lighting/ distribution panel must have a main breaker.

B. The lighting panel is mounted as a separate motor control center unit and factory connected directly (with no intermediate transformer) to motor control center bus through a feeder. The panel series rating must equal or exceed motor control center short-circuit rating.

C. The lighting panel is mounted as a separate motor control center unit and factory connected to a transformer unit in the motor control center. This does not reduce or affect motor control center short-circuit rating.

E4


Miscellaneous Units

Distribution Transformers

General

Open, dry-type transformers with primary thermal-magnetic circuit breaker or fusible switch with NEMA Class R (dual element) fuses are available in motor control center construction. The accompanying tables give both single- and three-phase transformers normally mounted in motor control centers for use in supplying separate-source control circuits, panelboards and power external to the motor control center.

NEC Article 450-3 covers transformer protection, other than motor control circuit transformers or special applications.

The general requirements are:

The degree of protection required depends on the specific application. Select a transformer protective device which provides the required protection. Secondary protection in each ungrounded conductor can be provided if specified.

Space units shown include space necessary for the primary disconnect. One space unit equals 12 inches of vertical height.

If transformers with taps are required, refer to the factory.

Primary disconnects stab into the vertical bus. Transformer secondary conductors are wired to a terminal board in the unit. One leg of 120 volt secondaries, the center point of

120/240 volt secondaries, and the Y-point of 3-phase secondaries are grounded unless otherwise specified.

Primary Protection Only

Primary Current

9 amps or more

2 amps to 9 amps

Less than 2 amps

Primary Protection Rating

125% or next higher standard rating per NEC Sect. 240-6

167% maximum

300% maximum

Primary and Secondary Protection

Secondary Current Primary Protection Rating Secondary Protection Rating

9 amps or more

Less than 9 amps

250% maximum

250% maximum

125% or next higher standard rating

167% maximum

E

Three-Phase Transformers (Delta-Y, no Taps

➅

)

KVA

Switch

Size

Fused Switch-100kAIC

Fuse

Amps

380-120/208 Volts, 50 Hertz

3 30 7

9

30

30

60

17.5

60

45 200 90

480-120/208 Volts, 60 Hertz

3

9

30

30

5.6

15

15

30

30

60

25

45

45 100 70

600-120/208 Volts, 60 Hertz

3

9

30

30

30

60

4.5

12

40

➃

Space

Unit

2.5

3

6

6

2.5

3

4

4

4

2.5

3

4

UL Listed

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

➀ Requires full depth of motor control center.

➁ Requires 24" wide enclosure.

➂ Requires 20" deep enclosure 24" wide.

➃ Sized for primary protection only. (Dual element fuses)

➄ Sized for primary and secondary protection.

➅ Add 6" for Taps.

➆ Requires 30" wide enclosure.

Notes

➀➁

➂

➀➆

➂

➀➆

Notes:

• 15-45KVA transformers are TP-1 rated per NEMA Standard TP-1-1996.

• Low temperature rise and/or copper windings are available. Refer to factory.

IC Rating (kA)

65 100

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

–

–

QMW

SEP

SEP

SEP

QMW

SEP

SEP

SEP

SEP

QMW

SELL

SELL

Circuit Breaker

CB Trip

Space

Unit

➄

30

70

150

20

30

70

125

20

70

2.5

3

3.5

3.5

3.5

2.5

3

4

4.5

2.5

3.5

3.5

UL Listed

(X)

Notes

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

➀➁

➂

➀➆

➀➆

➀➆

E5

E


Miscellaneous Units


Single-Phase Transformers kVA

Switch

Size

Fused Switch-100kAIC

Fuse

Amps ➃

Space

Unit

240-120/240 Volts, 60 Hertz

0.50

30 3.2

1

3

5

10

15

30

30

30

60

200

7

15

30

60

80

25

37.5

200

200

150

200

380-120/240 Volts, 50 Hertz

0.50

1

3

10

15

30

30

30

60

60

3.5

4

12

35

50

25

37.5

100

200

90

125

480-120/240 Volts, 60 Hertz

0.50

30 2.8

1 30 3.5

3

5

10

15

25

30

30

30

60

100

10

12

25

40

70

37.5

100 100

600-120/240 Volts, 60 Hertz

0.50

1

3

30

30

30

2.5

4

8

10

15

25

37.5

30

60

60

100

20

35

60

80

2

2

4

1

1

1.5

4

6

1

1

1.5

2

3

3

4

1

1

1.5

2

2

3

3

4

3

4

2

3

1

1

1.5

UL Listed

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Notes

➀

➀➅

➀➅

➀➆

➀

➀➅

➂

➅➆

➀

➀➅

➂

➅➆

➀

➀➅

➂

➅➆

➀ Requires full depth of motor control center.

➁ Requires 24" wide enclosure.

➂ Requires 20" deep enclosure 24" wide.

➃ Sized for primary protection only. (Dual element fuses)

➄ Sized for primary and secondary protection.

➅ Add 6" for Taps.

➆ Requires 30" wide enclosure.

Notes:

• 15-45KVA transformers are TP-1 rated per NEMA Standard TP-1-1996.

• Low temperature rise and/or copper windings are available. Refer to factory.

IC Rating (kA)

65 100

–

–

–

–

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

QMW

QMW

SEP

SEP

SEP

SEP

QMW

QMW

SEP

SEP

SEP

SEP

QMW

QMW

QMW

SELL

Circuit Breaker

CB Trip➄

Space

Unit

UL Listed

(X)

Notes

30

40

70

150

225

225

15

50

90

150

125

15

20

40

50

125

125

40

50

100

90

1

1

1.5

2

2

2.5

2.5

3.5

1

1

1.5

2

2.5

2.5

4

1

1

1.5

2

2.5

2.5

3.5

1

1

1.5

2

2

3.5

3

4

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

➀

➀➅

➀➅

➀➆

➀

➀➅

➂

➅➆

➀

➀➅

➂

➅➆

➀

➀➅

➂

➅➆

E6


Miscellaneous Units

Power Factor Correction Capacitors

Description

Motors and other inductive loads require two kinds of electrical current: Current which performs the actual work and reactive current which produces the magnetic fields necessary for the operation of inductive devices such as motors. Both types of currents produce system I 2 R losses. Capacitors installed near inductive loads can be used to reduce the reactive currents which flow through much of the system, thereby reducing

I 2 R losses.

Low-voltage capacitors are generally three-phase units, delta-connected, and are protected by current limiting fuses. The fuses disconnect the capacitor in the event of an electrical short, providing service continuity for the system and reducing the possibility of rupturing the capacitor case.

Power factor correction capacitors should be switched by a separate contactor (sketch B) under any of the following conditions:

• High inertia load.

• Open circuit transition reduced voltage starting.

• Wye-delta motor.

• Reversing or frequently jogged motor.

• Multispeed motor (2S1W, 2S2W, etc.).

Power factor correction capacitors should not be connected to the load side of solid state starters and drives*. It should be noted that two-speed motor starters and soft starters require separate contactors to switch in capacitors after a time-delay in order to avoid possible motor damage while the capacitors discharge. For the same reason, Wye-Delta starters have the capacitors applied after the delta connection has been made.

Capacitors Switched with the Motor

Capacitors used for power factor correction should be selected using the motor manufacturer’s application data.

When the capacitor is connected ahead of the overload relay (sketch A and B), the overload current elements should be selected using the full-load motor current and service factor values specified on the nameplate of the motor.

Capacitors must not exceed the maximum KVAR recommended by the motor manufacturer for switching with the specific motor selected.

Disconnect

means—

Short circuit protective means—

Contactor—

Overload relay—

Motor—

Capacitor—

A B

E

*Care should be taken when connecting power factor correction to the line side of power conversion equipment, such as drives, to avoid component damage.

E7

E


Miscellaneous Units

Power Factor Correction Capacitors

Selection of Power Factor Correction Capacitors

The following table is provided as a guide. Consult motor manufacturer for actual capacitor KVAR values.

Typical Capacitor Ratings

➀

HP

100

125

150

200

300

40

50

60

75

15

20

25

30

3

5

7

10

Nameplate Volts

230/460

230/460

230/460

230/460

230/460

230/460

230/460

230/460

230/460

230/460

230/460

230/460

230/460

460

460

460

460

Full Load RPM

1750

1740

1760

1750

1760

1750

1760

1760

1770

1765

1775

1775

1780

1780

1785

1785

1785

Maximum KVAR

14.9

19.1

24.9

27

29.1

32.3

38.7

50.5

77.2

4.5

5.1

7.2

9.1

1.4

1.9

3.1

3.6

➀ For use with 1800 rpm, 3-phase. 60Hz classification B motors

Type KE to raise full-load power factor to approximately 95 percent.

➁ See J1 for full load amps.

MCC Space

Units Required

1X

240V

22 1/2

Maximum KVAR

480V

50

600V

45

UL Listed

(X)

X

One space unit X equals 12 inches of vertical height. Space required is for capacitor only. Add space for switching device as needed.

In front-mounted configurations utilizing the 20" deep enclosure, capacitors may be mounted in the rear 10 inches of space behind the vertical bus. Rear access to the motor control center is required for servicing the capacitors.

Switching Capacitors Spearately

When a group of motors are so operated that some run while others are idle, a single capacitor bank (containing a number of individual units) can be connected to the motor control center bus to supply kilovars to the group. In these instances, a separate switching device is needed for the capacitors. The interrupting rating of the switching device should be at least as great as the short-circuit current available.

Cable must be capable of at least 135 percent rated capacitor current. Switching device selections in the following tabulation are based on the continuous current of the capacitors.

• Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers ............................135%

• Fuses and Fusible Switches ..............................................165%

• Molded-Case Circuit Breakers ..........................................150%

Recommended Switching Device

KVAR

240 Volts, 60 Hertz

2 1/2

5

7 1/2

10

15

20

27 1/2

30

37 1/2

480 Volts, 60 Hertz

5

7 1/2

10

15

20

25

27 1/2

30

37 1/2

Switch with Class J

(In Amperes)

10

20

30

40

60

80

125

125

175

10

15

20

30

40

50

60

60

80

Molded Case Circuit Breaker

(In Amperes)

60

80

100

110

15

20

30

40

150

40

50

50

60

70

15

15

20

30

For PFCC other than 240V or 480V, 60 Hz, refer to factory for sizing.

Optional 240 and 480 volt blown fuse indicating lights are available. The indicating lights are mounted on the unit door.

All capacitor units are Dry Type.

Bus connected power factor capacitors may be paralleled to increase kvar ratings. Refer to factory.

E8


Intelligent MCC

Intelligent E9000 MCC

GE’s Intelligent Low-voltage Motor Control Center (MCC) is an extension of GE’s Evolution E9000* MCC product which utilizes network devices to communicate the status of the system, to enable control of the system devices, or to facilitate advanced diagnostics.

A motor control center is responsible for controlling multiple motor loads throughout your facility. With GE’s intelligent

MCC offering, you can remotely monitor and control your system, helping to increase productivity and personnel safety.

Standard GE Network Devices

GE offers a wide variety of network devices to build a customized MCC to meet your needs. Overload and motor management relays, intelligent trip units, variable frequency drives (VFD’s), soft starters, and main metering are all available with communication capabilities. This section will highlight the intelligent solutions GE can offer by leveraging these network devices.

To learn more about these devices, please see Section H and Section G (for VFD’s and Soft Starters).

GE Multilin’s MM200 Motor

Management Relay

EntelliGuard Trip Unit (TU) AF-600 and AF-650 VFDs ASTAT XT Soft Starters

F

GE Multilin’s MM300 Motor

Management Relay microEntelliGuard TU ASTAT BP Soft Starters GE Multlin’s Main Metering:

PQMII & EPM Series

F1


Intelligent MCC

Intelligent Solutions

GE offers multi-level solutions to help meet the needs of your motor control center application. GE’s Intelligent E9000

MCC configurations can provide local monitoring at or near the equipment, remote control of the network devices, dual protocol solutions, and complete system integration with existing equipment.

The following examples demonstrate some of the different intelligent MCC configurations GE can provide using programmable logic controllers, programmable automation controllers, I/O systems, human machine interfaces, and envisage* Energy Management software to help transform

GE's network devices into an intelligent MCC solution.

Monitoring

F

Monitoring and Control

Dual Communication Bus

F2


Intelligent MCC

Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs)

GE Intelligent Platforms' family of traditional PLCs provide powerful solutions for small to mid-range stand-alone or distributed industrial control. Our PLCs have powered both discrete and process industries for nearly 25 years, and include the popular Series 90-30, one of the first advanced, full-featured small controllers on the market with thousands of installations worldwide. Also included in the portfolio is the VersaMax Modular PLC, one of the first solutions for control or distributed I/O. Both systems have wide variety of

I/O and a history of high reliability for your exact application requirements.

Series 90-30

Modular Ddesign Offers Unique Versatility

Configure just the system you need, saving critical space and reducing cost. With over 100 I/O modules, the Series 90-30

PLC can be adapted to a wide range of applications.

• Digital interfaces for push buttons, switches, proximity sensors, relays, contactors and many other devices

• Analog modules with varying degrees of resolution for flow, temperature or pressure applications

• Direct connect wiring or remote termination

• Local or remote I/O systems

Ethernet Communications Provide a Real-time Link

Between the Plant Floor and the Boardroom

You can begin with an Ethernet-enabled CPU, or at a later date, choose from our selection of rack-mounted Ethernet modules. The Series 90-30 Ethernet module supports both

SRTP and Modbus TCP/IP application protocols.

The Scalable Processing Power of the CPU Creates a Clear

Upgrade Path

Create the system that’s ideal today, while leaving open the option of creating a more powerful system tomorrow — without having to change your application software.

Integrated Motion Control Fosters High Performance,

Point-to-point Applications

A variety of Series 90-30 field bus interfaces enables distributed control and/or I/O. Choose from Ethernet EGD, Profibus-DP ™ ,

Genius*, DeviceNet ™ and Interbus-S ™ modules. Field Bus interface modules are easy to install and quick to configure.

Plug them into an existing system or design a new system around them.

Programming is Easy with Proficy* Machine Edition

With the most advanced PLC programming tools on the market today, Proficy Machine Edition is an integrated solution for PLC and remote I/O hardware configuration, PLC programming languages, application development, and online diagnostics. Supported programming languages include

Ladder Diagram (LD), Instruction List (IL), Structural Text (ST), and C Block.

The Series 90-30 Stands Out Among Small Controls for

Offering Redundancy Options

The Series 90-30 is the low-cost solution for high availability applications, with redundant CPUs and power supplies.

F

F3

F


Intelligent MCC

VersaMax*Nano and Micro Controllers

Pick the Palm-Sized PLC That’s Light on Your Budget

For tight spaces, the VersaMax Nano PLC is the perfect solution. Thanks to its all-in-one construction, installation is a breeze. All you have to do is snap it onto a DIN-rail or screw it into a panel. With the VersaMax Nano, you save on initial as well as life-cycle costs.

Select the Big-Featured PLC in a Compact Package

The small footprint VersaMax Micro PLC offers the flexibility of modular design and a variety of built-in features, including up to 64 I/O points (expandable to 176 I/O points), fast cycle times, a robust instruction set and extensive memory that multiplies your programming options.

Tap the Perfect Solution for Low-end Motion Applications

Both the VersaMax Nano and Micro can be used with either a PWM or a pulse train device. In addition, both controllers come with built-in high-speed counters that can be used in either Type A or Type B configurations. The new Micro 20,

Micro 40 and Micro 64 support four 100Khz high-speed counters and four 65Khz PWM or pulse train out-puts for high speed motion applications.

The new MicroMotion expansion module (2 axis of Servo or

Stepper @ 500Khz pulses/second with encoder inputs) is ideal for either Micro integrated motion control or standalone motion control (over serial or Ethernet networking). The

MicroMotion expansion module is loaded with features and supports 2 axis of stepper and servo control. The module supports a powerful function set, Home, Jog, Registration

Input, S-Curve acceleration, Feedrate Override and more.

Up to 256 move profiles are stored on the module and backed up with the Portable Memory device (removable

Flash device) for easy program storage of the motion moves.

The Micro 20, Micro 40, and Micro 64 support up to 2

Micro-Motion expansion modules for a total of 4 axis high performance motion control.

Take Advantage of a Host of Communications Options

Both the VersaMax Nano and Micro have an RS-232 port that can be used for SNP slave, Modbus RTU or serial I/O commands. The Micro 23 and Micro 28 also have an RS-485 port that adds SNP master and Modbus master commands.

With serial I/O commands, you can interface with such devices as pagers, intelligent scales, bar code readers and printers. The new Micro 20, Micro 40 and Micro 64 have a second option port that supports either RS-232, RS-485 or

USB communications module. The VersaMax Nano and

Micro can easily be networked to Ethernet utilizing the powerful VersaMax SE (Serial to Ethernet module).

Program Your Controllers in Record Time

With GE’s Proficy* Machine Edition software, programming your VersaMax Nano and Micro PLCs is a simple and intuitive process. Mix Relay Ladder Diagram and Instruction List programming within an application. Develop and save custom view tables. View PLC and I/O system fault tables on demand.

Machine Edition is an automation software breakthrough deploying HMI, motion, and multi-target control in an integrated development environment. This environment provides a common user interface, drag-and-drop editing, and a rich set of development tools. The Micro 20, Micro 40 and Micro 64 support a portable program FLASH Memory

Module that provides a simple cost effective way of upgrading field controllers.

F4


Intelligent MCC


Typical Micro 20, Micro 40 and Micro 64 Applications

Material Handling, Packaging and Assembly Machines

Micro 20, Micro 40, Micro 64 Advantages

Flexible motion control to improve machine throughput is built into controller

• Up to 4 axes of stepper or servo control (32bit, 65Khz

Pulse Train)

• Up to 4 high speed counters at 100Khz (32bit)

Powerful Networking to improve data gathering

• Plug in 10/100M bit Ethernet available

• Two built-in communication ports

Simple control for complex applications

• 48K bytes of user program memory and 32Kwords of data storage

• Advanced programming instruction set. Ramping, Jog, Find

Home, Go Home, Blended Move (up to 4 continuous moves)

• Portable program storage device

MicroMotion Expansion

• 2 axis of Servo or Stepper @ 500Khz pulses/second with encoder inputs

• Supports Home, Jog, Registration Input, S-Curve acceleration,

Feedrate Override and more

• Interfaces with Micro 20, Micro 40, Micro 64 or standalone mode using Serial or Ethernet

• Stores up to 256 motion profiles on module

SCADA

Micro Advantages

Flexible Communications from Serial to Ethernet

• Modbus Master, Modbus Slave and Report by exception

• Modem and Ethernet SRTP or Modbus TCP (Server) option

Abundance of data storage capability

• Up to 32Kwords of data storage

Powerful instruction set

• Floating point math and PID for process control

• Write and Read data to internal FLASH

F

F5


Intelligent MCC


The newest additions to the Micro family – the Micro 20,

Micro 40 and Micro 64 PLCs – feature expansion to 132, 152 and 176 I/O points respectively, to fast cycle times, robust instruction sets, and generous memory to allow more flexible programming.

These new Micros each feature an optional second port that provides you with an additional RS-232 port, RS-485, USB, or Ethernet. The serial expansion ports come with two analog input channels. A user-friendly memory module is available to easily download changes to the controller without the need of a PC.

And it’s all packaged in a sturdy modular design for easy access and long-term durability. These all-in-one PLCs give you everything you need to control a wide variety of applications.

F

VersaMax Nano and Micro Controllers Selection Guide

Features Nano 10 Micro 14

Built-in Discrete I/O

Built-in Analog I/O

6 in/4out 8 in/6 out

1 on some models none

I/O Expansion Units none

Logic Memory (Words) 2K

Up to 4 units

9K

Data Storage (Words) 256

Scan Time (msec/K) 1.3 msec

Battery Backed RAM Super Cap only

Real Time Clock none

256

1.1 msec

Super Cap only none

Ports Available

Ethernet Option

High Speed Counter

Pulse Train/PWM

Motion Commands

1 RS-232

Yes, VersaMax SE

Up to 4 at 10Khz

(16 bit)

Up to 4 at 5Khz

(16 bit)

N/A

1 RS-232

Yes, VersaMax SE

Up to 4 at 10Khz

(16 bit)

Up to 4 at 5Khz

(16 bit)

N/A

Micro 23 Micro 28 Micro 20 Micro 40 Micro 64

13 in/10 out

2 in/1 out

Up to 4 units

9K

16 in/12 out none

Up to 4 units

9K

12 in/8 out none

Up to 4 units

24K

24 in/16 out none

Up to 4 units

24K

40 in/24 out none

Up to 4 units

24K

2K

1.1 msec

2K

1.1 msec

32K

1.1 msec

32K

1.1 msec

32K

1.1 msec

Yes and Super Cap Yes and Super Cap Yes and Super Cap Yes and Super Cap Yes and Super Cap

Yes, Included Yes, Included Yes, Included Yes, Included Yes, Included

1 RS-232 and

1 RS-485

1 RS-232 and

1 RS-485

1 RS-232 and second port optional

RS-232, RS-485, USB or Ethernet





Yes, VersaMax SE

Up to 4 at 10Khz

(16 bit)

Up to 4 at 5Khz

(16 bit)

Yes, VersaMax SE

Up to 4 at 10Khz

(16 bit)

Up to 4 at 5Khz

(16 bit)

Yes on second port Yes on second port Yes on second port

Up to 4 at 100Khz

(32 bit)

Up to 4 at 100Khz

(32 bit)

Up to 4 at 100Khz

(32 bit)

Up to 4 at 65Khz

(32 bit)

Up to 4 at 65Khz

(32 bit)

Up to 4 at 65Khz

(32 bit)

N/A N/A

Find Home, Go Home, Find Home, Go Home,

Jog, Ramp, Blended

Move (4 Consecutive

Moves)

Jog, Ramp, Blended

Move (4 Consecutive

Moves)

Find Home, Go Home,

Jog, Ramp, Blended

Move (4 Consecutive

Moves)

Write Register Values to Internal Flush

No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

F6


Intelligent MCC

VersaMax*Nano and Micro Controllers –

General

I/O Circuits

Standard Input Circuit – 120 Volt AC Input Module

(VersaMax IC200MDL240)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

11

12

13

14

15

10

16

17

18

19

20

Terminals Field Wiring

NC

NC

H

~

NC

N

A7

A8

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

Rated Voltage 120 Volts AC

Indicators One Lcd per point

Inputs per Module 16 (1 group with a single common)

Isolation 1500 volts RMS between field side an logic side

Current Draw 50 mA (typical) at rated voltage from backplane

Input Characteristics:

Max. On-state 70 volts to 132 volts

Min. Off-state 0 to 20 volts

Min. On-state 6 mA maximum

Max. Off-state 1.5 mA maximum

On response time 1 cycle

Off response time 2 cycle

Standard Input Circuit – 120/240 Volt Isolated AC Output

Module (VersaMax IC200MDL331)

Terminals Field Wiring

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

NC

H

~

N

NC

A1

NC

H

~

N

NC

A2

NC

H

~

NC

N

A3

NC

H

~

N

NC

A4

NC

H

~

NC

A5

N

Rated Voltage 120/240 Vac

Output Voltage Range 85 to 264 Vac

Outputs per Module 8 (each output isolated)

Isolation 1500 volts RMS between fieldside and logic side

500 volts RMS between each output

Output Current (Max.) 2 amps per point,

5 amps per module

Output Characteristics:

Inrush Current 25 amps maximum for one cycle

Min. Load Current 100 mA

Output Voltage Drop 1.5 volts maximum

Output Leakage Current 3 mA maximum at

120 Vac

6 mA maximum at

240 Vac

On response time 1 ms maximum

Off response time 9 ms maximum

(1/2 cycle)

F

I/O Configurations

Standard I/O for motor control center consists of grouped input cards and isolated output cards (note that the isolated outputs can control NEMA Size 1 to 6 starters).

F7

F


Intelligent MCC

Programmable Automation Controllers

Expanding On Traditional PLCs

GE Intelligent Platforms created the concept of the

Programmable Automation Controller with the introduction of our PACSystems * family of automation controllers. Expanding on traditional PLCs, GE's PAC controllers provide a highly reliable, high-performance advanced control platform for discrete logic control, motion control, and process control.

While GE offers and supports a wide variety of communications protocols to support our customers needs, we have standardized our control systems on the market-leading industrial network, PROFINET, to provide an extremely high performance, highly reliable, yet simple to configure and install distributed IO network.

PACSystems* RXi Controller

High Performance Distributed IO Controller Platform

GE Intelligent Platforms has leveraged its rich experience in embedded computing and control technology in the design of the innovative PACSystems RXi controller platform. The

RXi Controller incorporates leading-edge CPU technology, the market leading industrial Ethernet network technology, and a unique user interface for maintaining the controller to deliver a control system unique in the industry.

The PACSystems RXi controller is PROFINET enabled, delivering a small footprint solution with highly flexible distributed I/O capabilities to equipment builders and end users. Its unique

Intelligent Display Module provides configuration and maintenance functions at the controller without software.

As a PACSystems controller, the RXi is fully compatible with applications written for any other PACsystems platform.

The result is a high performance solution designed for distributed IO applications.

Higher Performance

The RXi Controller is designed for high performance distributed

IO applications. With a high performance dual core CPU and

Gigabit PROFINET (with built in MRP redundancy) and

Ethernet ports, every aspect of the RXI has been designed for performance.

For even more power, the RXi controller can be combined with the RXi Modular IPC to deliver a unique control and computing platform for the factory floor. Integrated highspeed connectors allow instant data handling. Operator usability can be enhanced by pairing the RXi Modular IPC with new RXi panel displays with new multitouch technology.

The unique combination of high performance control, integrated

PROFINET, intelligent display module, and compact format truly distinguishes the RXi Controller from other offerings.

Greater Uptime

Systems with distributed architectures are easier to configure and maintain. In addition, RXi components are industrial temperature grade, which combined with patented thermal monitoring technology and sophisticated passive cooling techniques delivers reliable control in rugged environments.

Lower Total Cost of Ownership

RXi’s compact control and computing platform allows users to simplify panel design and reduce the overall size of the panel while benefiting from the performance, maintainability, and upgradeability of the PACSystems platform. The optional

Intelligent Display Module provides a maintenance touchscreen display right on the controller, providing faster interaction with the controller and simpler start-up.

F8


Intelligent MCC

PACSystems* RXi Controller

Feature

COMExpress CPU Technology

Benefit

Dual core processor for high performance in rugged applications

Rugged technology with wider temperature ranges, higher shock and vibration designs, suitable for industrial applications

Carrier and enclosure designs last across multiple CPU lifespans to provide faster performance enhancements

Integrated redundant PROFINET I/O Interface

High-speed Interconnect Bus

Built-in Data Storage

USB and SD interfaces

Provides a Gigabit Ethernet I/O network connection with built-in cable redundancy (MRP) delivering IO cabling redundancy with no external switches

Enables truly unique combinations of control and Proficy (or other Microsoft

®

Windows

® or Linux applications)

Internal industrial grade SSD drive provides local long-term data retention

Interfaces enable program loading, serial communications and data storage via standard devices

Specifications

Storage

• 10 MB user memory

Data Retention

• RXi specific Energy Pak provides power during power failure while data is written to NV RAM

Ethernet

• 2 Port (shared MAC) GB PROFINET – with MRP

• 1 Ethernet (10, 100, 1000 Mbit) port

• 1 Ethernet (1000 Mbit) – internal

USB Interface

• 2 USB 2.0 Standard Size

Others

• SD Card (on Intelligent Display Module or

Intelligence Faceplate)

Power

• Input: 24V DC (±25%) with protection

Environmental

• Operating: -25°C to +55° C (standard)

• Storage: -40°C to +125° C

• Operating humidity: 10% to 90%

Mounting

• Panel Mount

• Dinrail Mount with Optional DIN Mount Plate

Safety

• UL, CE

• Class 1, Div 2 (pending)

F

F9

F


Intelligent MCC

PACSystems* RX3i Controller

The PACSystems* RX3i controller is an incredibly powerful

Programmable Automation Controller (PAC) in the innovative

PACSystems family. The RX3i features a single control engine and a universal programming environment to provide application portability across multiple hardware platforms and deliver a true convergence of control.

With integrated critical control platforms, logic, motion, HMI, process control and high availability based on our Reflective

Memory technology, the RX3i provides the performance and flexibility to give you an advantage. No matter the challenges your applications bring, PACSystems RX3i lets you take control.

Benefits

The innovative technology of the PACSystems RX3i enables users to:

• Address major engineering and business issues, such as higher productivity and tighter cost control

• Boost the overall performance of their automation systems

• Reduce engineering and commissioning costs

• Easily integrate new technology into installed base systems

• Significantly decrease concerns regarding short- and longterm migration and platform longevity

High Performance Control on One Platform

The PACSystems RX3i provides logic, motion, HMI, and process control with open communications protocols.

• PACMotion modules can control up to 40 high speed axes in one rack

• PACSystems High Availability solution offers true dual redundancy data synchronization and bumpless transfer

• The Control Memory Xchange offers amazing data transfer at a rate of 2.12 Gbaud

Universal Development Environment

The common software platform across all GE controllers, award-winning Proficy* Machine Edition software provides the universal engineering development environment for programming, configuration and diagnostics for the entire

PACSystems family.

• Programming tools such as tag-based programming, a library of reusable code and a test edit mode for improved online troubleshooting

• User-friendly environment that can increase design flexibility and improve engineering efficiency and productivity

Features

• High-speed processor and patented technology for faster throughput without information bottlenecks

• Dual backplane bus support per module slot:

— High-speed, PCI-based for fast through put of new advanced I/O

— Serial backplane for easy migration of existing

Series 90-30 I/O

• Multiple CPU offerings meeting various performance criteria up to and including an Intel

®

1 GHz CPU for advanced programming and performance with 64 Mbytes memory

• Memory for ladder logic documentation and machine documentation (Word, Excel, PDF, CAD and other files) in the controller to reduce downtime and improve troubleshooting

• Open communications support including Ethernet, GENIUS*,

PROFIBUS™, HART, DeviceNet™ and serial

• Supports high density discrete I/O, universal analog (TC,

RTD, Strain Gauge, Voltage and Current configurable per channel), isolated analog, high-density analog, high-speed counter, and motion modules

• Expanded I/O offering with extended features for faster processing, advanced diagnostics and a variety of configurable interrupts

• Hot insertion for both new and migrated modules

F10


Intelligent MCC

PACSystems* RX3i Controller

Baseplates

Expansion Modules

Pneumatic Modules

CPUs

Networks and

Distributed I/O

Discrete I/O Modules

Motion Modules

Power Supplies

CPUs

The CMU310 is a High Availability redundant CPU that is configured using the MaxON software. The CMU310 has the same functionality as the CPU310. Synchronization of the

CMU310s is via an Ethernet link.

Baseplates

The RX3i Universal baseplates support hot swap capability to reduce downtime. Expansion bases are available in 5 and 10 slot versions to maximize flexibility.

Universal Bases Power Supplies

The RX3i power supply modules simply snap in just like I/O, and they work with any model CPU. Each version provides auto-ranging so there is no need to set jumpers for different incoming power levels, and they are current limiting so a direct short will shut the power supply down to avoid damage to the hardware.at a rate of 2.12 Gbaud

Discrete I/O Modules

Input modules provide the interface between the PLC and external input devices such as proximity sensors, push buttons, switches, and BCD thumbwheels. Output modules provide the interface between the PLC and external output devices such as contactors, interposing relays, BCD displays and indicator lamps.

Analog I/O Modules

GE offers easy-to-use analog modules and HART analog modules for control processes such as flow, temperature and pressure.

Specialty Modules

The RX3i features a wide range of Specialty Modules to address specific application requirements.

These modules include:

• Millivolt and Strain Gage I/O

• RTD I/O

• Temperature Control

• Thermocouple I/O

• Resistive I/O

• Power Transducer

Networks and Distributed I/O Systems

The RX3i features a variety of communications options for distributed control and/or I/O. Choose from Ethernet EGD,

PROFIBUS-DP, Genius and DeviceNet. These communication modules are easy to install and quick to configure.

RX3i Pneumatic Module

This output module provides 11 pneumatic outputs and five

24 VDC sourcing outputs. For each pneumatic output, the module contains an internal 3-way solenoid-actuated valve and an associated output fitting. Solenoid power is supplied from an external 24 VDC source to the“DC Outputs” connector on the front panel.

Expansion Modules for Local and Remote I/O

The RX3i supports various expansion options for local and remote I/O to optimize configurations. The RX3i can be expanded up to 8 expansion bases using local remote expansion module. The RX3i also supports Ethernet remote

I/O using the RX3i Ethernet Network Interface module

(IC695NKT001) Series 90-30 Ethernet Network Interface module (IC693NIU004) for more distributed I/O.

Motion Control

PACMotion

The PACMotion controller is a versatile 4-axis servo motion controller that provides the scalability and flexibility to cover a full range of motion applications from small material handling applications to complex multi-axis machines and electronic line shaft applications. PACMotion provides real-time synchronization of all axes in an RX3i rack. A separate RX3i fast logic scan enables fast deterministic event response and synchronization, and the demand driven data exchange model between the RX3i CPU and PACMotion module many significantly reduce scan time impact. The 4-axis servo motion controller is built on a high performance hardware platform, with a new enhanced motion engine, operating system, and open standard integrated programming paradigm.

F11

F

F


Intelligent MCC

Example PLC Connections

PLC Controlled Starters

A combination motor starter will require a minimum of one Input and one Output per starter. As shown in Figure 5, the Output is connected between the starter coil and the fused, ungrounded leg of the control voltage source (terminals 3, 1). The Input connection is made between the starter “Seal contact” and the grounded leg of the control voltage source (Terminals 2, X2). The Input monitors the status of the seal circuit to independently verify that the starter has closed.

Fig. 5. Input and Output Connection

When an H-O-A switch is used with PLC I/O, the configuration will appear as shown in Figure 6. Note: as mentioned previously, the

INPUT monitors the status of the starter’s seal circuit in the manual mode as well as the PLC (automatic) mode.

Optional Inputs/Diagnostic

Additional Input connections can be made to monitor the specific status of combination starters and feeders to provide further diagnostic information to the process operator and maintenance personnel.

1. The status of the overload relay can be monitored. An electricallyisolated, normally-open auxiliary contact can be ordered with the GE 300-Line overload relay and an additional PLC Input can be wired in series with it.

2. A PLC Input can be connected between terminals 1 and X

2 to monitor the availability of control power to the starter unit.

Starter Units with Separate-Source Control Voltage

Input and Output connections are shown below (see Figure 7) for units arranged for separate-source control.

Input

A common (non-isolated) Input can be used if all X

2 terminals are wired together.

Output

As required by NEC Article 430-74, if a disconnect auxiliary contact and/or control circuit fuse (FU) is included with each starter, then the Output must be the isolated type. However, if the auxiliary contact and fuse are omitted, a common Output module can be used. With common output modules, interposing relays are required with NEMA Size 3 and 4 starters. Note: NEC article 430-74 can be met with GE’s standard split-type control terminal boards on all draw-out units, or with GE’s pull-apart terminal boards.

Fig. 7. Input and Output Connections for Separate-Source Control

Fig. 6. H-O-A Connection

Starter Units with Individual Control Transformers

For starters having individual control power transformers all Outputs must be isolated type. This requirement is necessary due to the separate voltage sources provided by the individual control transformers. Inputs may be either isolated or non-isolated types. Where non-isolated Inputs are used all X

2 terminals must be wired together.

Surge Suppressors

In cases where excessive noise is present on the control line or hard interlocks which will operate often (in series with PLC Output), surge suppressors are recommended.

Isolated Versus Non-Isolated Outputs

Isolated Outputs

GE’s isolated Outputs can be used for direct control of NEMA Size 1 through 4 combination starters without the use of an interposing relay. The contactors of GE’s standard NEMA Size 5 and larger starters are operated at line voltage with interposing relays operated from the secondary of the control transformer.

Non-Isolated Outputs

NEMA Size 1-2 starters may be operated directly from common PLC

Output cards. The continuous current rating of GE’s non-isolated

Output module requires an interposing relay for NEMA Size 3 and larger starters. Check the module ratings for inrush and continuous values.

F12


Intelligent MCC

Distributed I/O and Remote I/O

GE Intelligent Platforms provides high performance distributed

I/O for demanding control applications. Our I/O and Controllers are connected by PROFINET – the market leading industrial network. Using this common interface allows users to mix and match their preferred Controller with the I/O that best meets the needs of each part of the applica-tion. Our I/O portfolio has a wide range of packaging options covering the full spectrum of needs from simple discrete to high speed analog control, and from factory automation to process industries with harsh environments. We deliver best in class flexibility, performance, reliability and connectivity.

VersaMax* I/O and Control

Maximum versatility is the guiding principle behind VersaMax from GE Intelligent Platforms. This compact, extremely affordable control solution can be used as a PLC, as I/O, and as distributed control. With its modular and scalable architecture, intuitive features and ease of use, this innovative control family can save machine builders and end users considerable time and money.

Offering Big PLC Power in a Small Package

VersaMax CPUs supply a number of features usually found only in PLCs with larger footprints, including up to 64k of memory for application programs, floating point math, realtime clock, subroutines, PID control, flash memory, and bumpless program store. The serial ports support serial read/write and Modbus master/slave communications.

An Abundance of Useful I/O Options

GE offers a broad range of discrete, analog, mixed, and specialty I/O modules. These modules can be freely combined to create stand-alone I/O stations with up to 256 I/O points and expanded I/O systems with up to 4,096 I/O points.

The Perfect Match for Today’s Open Systems

VersaMax gives you the freedom to connect to a wide variety of host controllers, including PLC, DCS and PC-based control systems by way of Genius*, DeviceNet

™

, PROFIBUS-DP

™ and

Ethernet networks. VersaMax also fully supports the power and open architecture of GE’s PC Control solutions.

The Ultimate in Cost-effective Control and I/O

With intuitive diagnostics, hot insertion of modules and quick connect wiring, VersaMax extends uptime, reduces engineering and training needs, and dramatically reduces project life-cycle costs.

A Design that Maximizes Ease of Use

Every aspect of VersaMax has been carefully refined to accommodate the user. Snap-together I/O carriers mean that no tools are required for module installation or extraction.

A convenient rotary switch can be used for setting bus and reducing programming time. With VersaMax, you can even address I/O automatically.

F

F13

F


Intelligent MCC

PACSystems* RSTi

Ethernet based I/O delivers high performance and system flexibility

To succeed in an outcome-driven world, businesses must operate faster and leaner and be increasingly connected. At

GE Intelligent Platforms, we understand today’s connected business environment, and are committed to simplifying it.

That’s why we’ve designed an automation architecture that helps you design better machines and plants, operate them smarter, and redefine the interaction with your equipment.

A pivotal point in this architecture is the I/O. GE Intelligent

Platforms leverages industry standards and our experience in embedded technology and high-performance automation to deliver I/O that simplifies system design while reducing costs.

With GE’s Ethernet-based RSTi I/O, communications are enhanced through PROFINET, a high-speed, open protocol that facilitates the massive amounts of data that devices generate. The RSTI I/O unlocks the potential of continuity, connectivity, and collaboration for your control systems.

Simplifying System Design without Sacrificing Performance

Equipment builders are continuously looking to improve the performance of their equipment while augmenting usability and reducing size and complexity. These requirements extend to the I/O control system. With PACSystems automation portfolio, GE provides high-performance control solutions with best-in-class integration of distributed (networked) I/O ideally suited for demanding applications.

The RSTi line of I/O extendds the capabilities of PROFINET enabled GE solutions with a comprehensive line of granular slice I/O that simplifies panel design and reduces the overall size of the control panel while offering the performance, maintainability and upgradability of the PACSystems platform.

Decentralized I/O Reduces Cost

The RSTi decentralized I/O addresses the challenges of high installation overhead cost and lack of granularity of a centralized I/O system. The RSTi provides a high performance distributed I/O network that reduces the cost of field wiring.

The distributed nature of the RSTI enables a machine builder to design in sections with distributed I/O drops closer to the field devices.

Decentralized I/O systems are easily disassembled and reassembled with a standard, off-the-shelf Ethernet cable versus hundreds of wires coming back to a centralized control cabinet.

The compact RSTi I/O line allows the user to “right size” the application, minimizing cost and panel space. I/O expansion is simple with the slide and lock design.

Feature

PROFINET Connectivity

System Diagnostics

Powerful Integration Tools

“Build as You Go”

Rugged Design

Network Independence

Benefit

High-speed I/O throughout that connects to hundreds of third-party devices

Increased uptime by isolating system failures quickly

Reduced development time with Proficy Machine Edition tools

Granular design enables “right sizing” the application, resulting in minimum installation cost and panel space

Rugged “slide and lock” design provides an easy, secure installation

Eight global standard network interfaces supported by the RSTi enables the user to standardize on one I/O system regardless of the bus requirements

F14


Intelligent MCC

PACSystems* RSTi

Distributed I/O delivers high performance and system flexibility

Powerful Solution

The RSTi innovative design enables module power, communications and field power to be passed from one module to the next. Power Distribution, Power Booster and Field Power Isolation modules are available to simplify installation wiring. The RSTI compact design (99 mm high x 70 mm deep x 12mm wide for I/O) reduces panel space.

Global Standards

• CE, UL, CUL approved

• UL Class 1 Div 2 and ATEX Zone 2

• Temperature range -20°C to 60°C

• UL temperature range -20°C to 60°C

Flexible Network Interfaces

• PROFINET RT

• Modbus TCP/IP

• DeviceNet

• CC-Link

• PROFIBUS DP/V1

• Modbus Serial

• CANOpen

User Friendly Design

• Rugged, removable terminal block

• Tool-less spring clamp wiring

• DIN Rail “slide and lock” design

• Color coded identification

• Easy to read LED status

• Diagnostic test points

Over 80 Module Types

Available

• AC and DC I/O

• Relay Outputs

• Analog I/O

• RTD

• Thermocouple

• 2, 4, 8 and 16 point density

Specialty Modules

• Serial communications

• High-speed counters

• SSI interface

• PWM and pulse output

SVDC Module Power and

Communications

• Passed from one module to the next

Field Power

• Passed from one module to the next

GE’s high-performance PACSystems RSTi PROFINET enabled family of I/O modules are part of GE’s Intelligent Platforms

High Performance Platform strategy. The platform leverages industry standards plus the combination of experience in embedded technology and automation to deliver long-life and higher performance solutions that are easy to configure, manage and upgrade. Contact your local representative for more information about GE’s solutions for your I/O requirements.

F15

F

F


Intelligent MCC

Genius I/O System

General

The Genius I/O, a system of inherently distributed inputs and outputs, is designed to interface to any number of industrial controllers, including GE Intelligent Platforms PLCs, and third party CPUs. It can be used as the only I/O on a System or it can be mixed with the present rack-type I/O. Genius represents a complete rethinking of the role of I/O in industrial control.

Genius Blocks are UL, CSA, FM and CSA hazardous environment approved. The Genius I/O system was made possible through two key GE technological innovations:

Smart Switch: A device with the built-in current and voltage sensors required for the extensive diagnostics available with

Genius I/O. The smart switch allows detection of faults not only within the programmable controller I/O system, but also faults in the coils and other actuator devices under the control of the programmable controller, as well as the signal path from pushbuttons and other input devices. No other technology provides this level of fault detection.

Communications Controller: A token bus local area network controller which allows Genius I/O devices to communicate over a single-shielded twisted wire pair, rather than via bundles of point-to-point wires required in conventional systems.

The electronics assembly contains the power supply, communications chip, microprocessor, smart switches and other electronic components required to perform Genius I/O functions.

Each I/O Block is keyed to prevent the insertion of a nonmatching electronics assembly into a terminal assembly wired for a different power. Once inserted, the electronics assembly automatically reads the content of the EEPROM and initializes itself to match the configuration originally established for the I/O Block in that position. Table 1 lists the types of I/O Blocks currently available, as well as other basic system components.

Typical Genius I/O Unit

Genius I/O System Architecture

A simplified block diagram of the Genius I/O System is shown in Figure 2. The PLC, CPU and I/O rack shown are standard

Series 90-70 units. The Genius serial bus connects I/O Blocks with a single shielded twisted pair up to 7500 feet from the

Bus Controller.

Fig. 2. Genius I/O System Block Diagram

Genius I/O Block

A microprocessor-based, configurable, ruggedized solid-state device to which field I/O devices are attached. Measuring approximately 9" x 4" x 3", I/O Blocks can be mounted virtually anywhere, such as in a draw-out unit of a motor control center or pushbutton station where it is common to have one input and one output per motor circuit. No separate rack or power supply is required. Field wiring is attached to a terminal assembly which separates from the removable electronics assembly. Thus, field wiring need not be disturbed to service the electronics. Due to the microprocessor and intelligent switching, inputs and outputs may be mixed arbitrarily on blocks. There are no dip switches nor replaceable fuses.

An EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only

Memory) is located within the terminal assembly. The EEPROM stores all user-selectable options and retains these selections even during Power Off conditions. It can be read by the electronics assembly at any time and altered by commands from either the CPU or the Hand Held Monitor. The EEPROM is the only electronic device in the terminal assembly and has a long Mean-Time-Between-Failure (MTBF).

Fig. 3. Genius I/O Block Assembly

F16


Intelligent MCC

Human Machine Interfaces (HMIs)

The QuickPanel* View Family

The QuickPanel View bundled visualization solution provides the tools required for today’s application needs with a combination of bright touch screen displays, multiple communications options, and Proficy* View – Machine

Edition software.

Information Delivery

Acting as the bridge between the enterprise system and the plant floor, QuickPanel View provides information, not just data, that the operators need to run the machines, and that managment needs to run their business. The QuickPanel View is a critical link to a well-integrated manufacturing operation.

• Built on Microsoft Windows CE operating system

• Built-in web server access data and panel using any standard browser

Scalable

As your information requirements grow, so will your hardware needs. QuickPanel View products are exceedingly scalable to grow with your needs.

• Broad range of display sizes from 6" to 15"

• Choice of Monochrome, Color-STN, or Color-TFT display

• Expandable memory and communications options

• Easy configuration allows you to run the same program on different size models

Seamless Connectivity

As your need to monitor and collect data grows, you may need to connect to a wide variety of devices. Unless your operator interface has seamless connectivity, you may face delays and headaches. That is why QuickPanel View comes standard with a large number of built-in drivers to connect with the the world of automation devices, making it easy to connect to anything.

• Communication drivers over serial and Ethernet

• Communication over fieldbus and vendor specific networks through the addition of a communication expansion card

Other Advantages

We invite you to explore the advantages of QuickPanel View.

• Cost-effective replacement for push buttons and pilot lights

• Data collection, trending, system security and other functions

• Multi-language support

• Migration of applications developed with QuickDesigner*

• Adherence to global standards UL, ATEX, and CE

F

F17

F


Intelligent MCC

PACSystems RXi Display/Panel PC

Multi-Touch Control and Widescreen Viewing of Industrial Processes

To succeed in an outcome-driven world, businesses must operate faster and leaner, and be increasingly connected.

At GE Intelligent Platforms, we’ve reimagined automation architecture to help you succeed in today’s business environment.

A pivotal point within this architecture is the displays for operators. GE Intelligent Platforms reconsidered every aspect of an industrial display when developing the

PACSystems* RXi Display. From the moment it is unpacked and mounted to when the operator touches its screen, the

RXi Display delivers a sleek and powerful user experience.

The RXi Display connects people and machines by combining the latest in touchscreen technology with a widescreen display to give operators an enhanced view into their processes. The result is quicker, smarter decisions based on real-time visualization.

When paired with the RXi Box PC, the RXi Display creates a high-performance system that lowers TCO with seamless replacement of either component and provides for powerful upgrades to the underlying computing technology.

High-Performance Display Technology

The RXi Display takes industrial displays into today’s connected world, combining design, durability, and power in an ultraslim package designed for the factory floor.

The RXi Display’s modular design means it is built for today — and tomorrow. It helps you design better machines and plants, operate them smarter, and redefine the interaction with your equipment.

GE knows that today’s rapidly changing industrial environment requires display and computing equipment that can evolve along with your operations. The RXi Display and RXi PC system doesn’t become obsolete — upgrade the

PC as chip technology accelerates. The result is increased performance and productivity, and decreased TCO.

User-Friendly Design Increases Productivity

The RXi Display was designed for ease of operation. For example, its front-mounted SD memory card slot can be accessed without opening the cabinet.

For fast and easy installation, the RXi family of displays offers a unique mounting system, designed to be completed by a single person without the need for special tools or fasteners.

Your system is up and running in minutes.

Enhanced Durability and Touchscreen Control

The RXi Display’s solid aluminum bezel design is built to last.

Its 9H-rated hardened projected capacitive multi-touch screen provides an intuitive, smartphone-like experience. The responsive, clear-glass display allows operators to efficiently navigate software in a variety of industrial environments.

Capacitive touchscreen technology is more resistant to physical damage and UV discoloration, and permits a higher degree of brightness and contrast as compared to standard resistive technology. This means you get clear, easy-to-see visualization of your process.

Feature

Widescreen Technology

Multi-Touch Screen Interface

External Memory Slot

Captive Mounting Hardware

Benefit

Allows operator to view more processes or information on one screen

Easier on-screen navigation enabling familiar smartphone-like experience

SD Card Slot can be accessed from front of panel without opening cabinet

One person can quickly install the display without special tools.

F18


Intelligent MCC

envisage*

Energy Management System

envisage Monitoring

The envisage Monitoring module displays real-time power and demand data from remote intelligent energy devices as well as facility-wide infrastructure systems.

A birds-eye graphical site diagram provides a model representation of the complete facility and leads quickly to more detail in dynamic one-line schematics for the site location and even individual installed devices and monitored values. It keeps you completely and accurately informed of the system’s status in real-time – both locally and remotely – through customized views that aggregate and scale the information you need. Energy monitoring includes trend data from meters, relays, and breaker trip units in order to analyze the power system. It allows you to highlight and acknowledge unusual activity and alarm conditions with the real-time and historical alarm viewers to ensure that problems do not go unnoticed.

Typical Monitored Values

• RMS current

• Current demand

• Peak current

• RMS voltage

• KW and KWh

• Peak KW demand

• Apparent power (KVA) and apparent energry (KVAh)

• Reactive power (KVA) and reactive energry (KVARh)

• Power factor

• Frequency

• Event records

• Additional system parameters — water, air, gas, electric, steam, HVAC, backup power, security

• Switch position and breaker status

Typical Connected Devices

• Meters

• Trip units

• UPS

• Solar chargers

• CRAC units

• ATS

• PSG

• PDU

• Generators

• VFD

• PLC

• Proactive relays

• “Smart” power strips

F

Overview of entire network

F19


Solid-State Drives & Starters

Adjustable Frequency AC Drives

General Application Notes

As a vehicle for controlling multiple motor functions, the

Motor Control Center has become the logical place to mount variable speed drives. However, the application of these drives is not a simple selection process, and the following is an explanation of some of the variables involved.

A drive must have ventilation. The basic power switching components are transistors, which are mounted on finned heat sinks. Although the drive may be operating at 95% or greater efficiency, the 5% (±) normal heat loss cannot be enclosed in the MCC without exceeding the safe operating temperature (50°C). Standard mounting is ventilated (NEMA

1 or 1A only).

A drive is electronically controlled. The new generation of

PWM drives are all microprocessor based. Although well shielded from stray noise, they require careful wire routing, and in some cases shielded wire runs to avoid “nuisance” problems. Control wires should be run separate from power leads. If they must cross, try to keep them at right angles to minimize the induced electric fields (noise).

motor using dampers or valving to reduce its output. (The amount of savings depends, of course, on the amount of time the motor can be used at the reduced speed.) It will also lower demand charges due to reduced motor starting current.

A drive creates noise on the power system. Although we use line reactors to minimize system disturbances, a drive will create harmonics on the power/system (both at the motor and at the transformer). If sensitive computer systems are to be utilized, they should be isolated from the drive’s source, or EMI/RFI filters added. Likewise, the harmonics created at the motor may cause the motor to run hotter than expected.

Standard motors should be derated 10% when used with a drive. We recommend high efficiency motors for drive applications as a minimum. See motor application data, SH, page G3.

A drive must have short circuit protection. Since a drive is subjected to higher available short circuit currents in an

MCC, (vs. a wall mounted unit) additional components such as current limiting fuses and reactors are utilized. See typical one line sketch.

Line Reactors

The available power source connected to the Drive is not to exceed 500kVA. If the AC power source is greater than

500kVA and the Drives rating (HP) is less than 10% of the power source's kVA; AC line reactors will have to be installed in L1, L2, and L3 power leads of the Drive. We provide 3% Line reactors as standard but they can be deleted as an option.

The drive internally has a DC reactor, which will protect the drive components.

A drive can provide significant energy savings. When a fan or pump is utilized on a system with variable flow rates, whether measured in gallons per minute or cubic feet of cooling air per minute, a variable speed drive is the most efficient means of control. Since a variable torque load requires significantly less energy when operated at lower speed, the energy savings can be in the 25 to 50% range when compared to a full voltage

Load Filters

IGBT drives create voltage spikes at the motor. Motor insulation rating must be higher than these peaks. Motor should meet

NEMA MGI part 31. If not, load filters may be required. Refer to page G4.

G

G1



Adjustable Speed Drives

AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Series

Adjustable Frequency Drive

The AF-600 FP is an AC packaged drive that provides the functionality required for variable torque loads such as fans, pumps and compressors. Forward/Reverse and Simple commands from the local or remote keypad or from the facility management system, along with pre-loaded motor parameters and factory defaults, allow for quick and readyto-go installation. The E9000 offers expanded horsepower ratings in 230Vac (1/4 to 50Hp), 460Vac (1/2 to 500Hp) and

575Vac (1-500Hp) for even greater range of application.

The AF-650 GP Adjustable Frequency Drive with flux vector and dynamic torque-vector control using optimized control of voltage and current vectors provides the enhanced performance that you are looking for in your application. The

AF-650 GP process control systems will make any task simple and profitable. In addition, by adding an optional (encoder) speed feedback device, this drive can be configured to operate in a flux vector control mode. The AF-650 GP provides flexibility across a wide range of constant torque applications.

G

The AF-600 FP and AF-650 GP series have an array of functions that provides significant benefits. Standard features include: auto-tuning without having to rotate the motor, built in PID control, rotating motor pick up control (catch spinning motor), Standard RS485 (Modbus RTU), Metasys or Apogee

FLN P1 Communications, automatic energy-saving operation

(which minimizes drive and motor loss at light load) and other functions to combine performance and energy savings. The new generation IGBT means reduced electrical noise and less voltage spiking. On-line-tuning provides a continuous check for variation of motor characteristics during running of high-precision speed control. All drives conform with the following safety standards: UL, cUL, CE and C-Tick.

AF-600 FP

AF-650 GP

G2




Standard Specifications AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP

Environmental Conditions

Enclosures IP20 Chassis, IP00 Chassis, NEMA 1 kit available

Installation Location Do not install in locations where product could be exposed to dust, corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, vapor, water drops or direct sunlight. There must be no salt in the atmosphere. Condensation must not be caused by sudden changes in temperature. For use ataltitudes of 3280 ft. (1000M) or less without derating.

Storage Temperature -25° to 65°C

Ambient Temperature -10° to +50°C (24 hour average max of 45°C)

Ambient Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)

Vibration 1 g.

Cooling Method Fan Cooled all ratings. Fan Control Auto, 50% level, 75% level, 100% level adjustable

Standards / Approvals CE, UL, cUL, and C-Tick Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes for 230V and 460V

Input Power Supply

Rated Input AC Voltage 200-240 Vac, 3-phase, 50-60 Hz, +/- 10% V, 380-480 Vac, 3-phase, 50-60 Hz, +/- 10% V, 525-600 Vac, 3-phase,

50-60Hz, +/- 10% V, 525-690 Vac, 3-phase, 50-60 Hz, +/- 10% V

Maximum Voltage Imbalance 3% of rated supply voltage

True Power Factor > 0.9 nominal at rated load

Displacement Power Factor > 0.98

Switching On Input Power Supply Maximum twice/minute up to 10HP, Maximum once/minute above 10HP

Environment According to EN60664-1 Overvoltage category III/pollution degree 2

DC Link Reactors Built-In DC Link Reactors on all ratings

RFI Filters Built-In RFI Filters to reduce noise generated by the drive. Meets industrial standards.

Output

Rated Output Voltage 0-100% of supply voltage

Output Frequency 0-590 Hz; 0-590Hz for 460V above 100HP and 525/600/690 V above 50HP

Switching on output Unlimited

Accel/Decel Times 0.01-3600 seconds

Control Method Sinusoidal PWM Control (V/Hz, Avd. Vector Control, Sensorless Vector, and Flux Vector with motor feedback)

Control

Starting Torque 160% starting torque for 1 minute (constant torque), 110% starting torque for 1 minute (variable torque)

Carrier Frequency (Motor Noise Selectable - 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 kHz

Torque Boost AF650 GP-Selectable by up to 5 individual V/Hz settings in V/Hz Mode or by 0 - 300% setting of Torque Boost parameter in Adv. Vector Mode. AF600 FP- 0 - 300% setting to compensate voltage in relation to the load at low speed.

Acceleration / Deceleration Time 0.01-3600 seconds (4 acceleration and deceleration times are selectable via digital inputs. Acceleration and deceleration patterns can be selected from linear or S-curve).

Data Protection Password Protection for Quick Menu or Main Menu, 0-9999.

Pattern Operation Settings via Built-In Logic Controller Sequencer

Jump Frequency Control 4 jump (or skip) frequencies via parameter set to avoid mechanical vibration

Slip Compensation Maintains motor at constant speed with load fluctuations

Torque Limit Control Output torque can be controlled within a range of 0.0 to 160% (0.1 and steps)

Preset Speeds 8 programmable preset speeds selectable by 3 digital inputs

Built-In Communications Drive RS-485, Modbus RTU, Metasys N2, or Apogee FLN P1

Trim Reference Setting Available for speed reference offset via potentiometer, voltage input, or current input

DC Injection Braking Starting frequency: 0.0-590 Hz, 0-590Hz for 460V above 100HP and 525-690 V above 50HP Braking time:

0.0-60.0 seconds Braking level: 0-100% of rated current

Jogging Operation Operation via On key or digital input (Fwd or Rev).

Auto-Restart After Power Failure Restarts the drive without stopping after instantaneous power failure

Energy Savings Controls output voltage to minimize motor loss during constant speed operation

Start Mode Function This functionality smoothly catches a spinning motor

Real Time Clock Built-In with programmable timed actions

Logic Controller (LC) Sequencer

Logic Controller Events Up to 37 types of Programmable Events

Comparators Array of 6 Comparators

Timers Array of 8 Timers, adjustable from 0.0 to 3600 sec

Logic Rules Array of 6 Boolean Logic Rules

Logic Controller States Array of 20 Logic Controller Action States

Process Controller (PID)

Process CL Feedback Select Up to 2 references. Selectable - No function, Motor Feedback, Separate Encoder, Encoder Option Module, or

Resolver Option Module

Process PID Control Normal or Inverse

Process PID Anti Windup Disabled or enabled

Process PID Start Speed 0.0-200 Hz

Process PID Proportional Gain 0.00-10.00

Process PID Integral Time 0.1 - 10000.0 ms

G3

G



G

Standard Specifications AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP

(continued)

Process PID Differential Time 0.0 - 10 s

Process PID Differential Gain 1.0-50.00

On Reference Bandwidth 0-200%

Operation

Operation Method Keypad operation: Hand, Off, Auto Digital Input: Programmable for Start/Stop, Forward/Reverse, Jog Timer operation: Stop after predetermined time frame. USB Port for programming drive with optional PC Software

Frequency Reference Signal Left or Right Arrow buttons on keypad in Manual Mode Speed Potentiometer: 0 to +10 Vdc, 10 to 0 Vdc,

0- 10Vdc analog input 0/4-20ma analog input

References Up to 3 Input References can be selected from Analog Input #1 or #2, Frequency Input #1 or #2, Network, or

Potentiometer

Input Signals Signals 6 - Digital Inputs, 24 Vdc PNP or NPN, 1 - Safe Stop Digital Input suitable for category 3 installations to meet EN-954-1, 2 - Pulse Inputs rated to 110kHz or 1 - Pulse Input and 1 - Encoder Input 24 Vdc rated to 4096

PPR 2 - Analog Inputs -10 to +10V scalable or 0/4 to 20 mA scalable. Digital Input Settings: No Operation, Reset after drive trip or alarm, Drive at stop with no holding current, Quick Stop according to Quick Stop Decel Time 1,

Stop on input going low, Start, Maintained Start after signal applied for Minimum of 2ms, Reversing, Start Reverse,

Enable Start Forward only, Enable Start Reverse only, Jog, Multi-Step Frequency selection (1 to 8 Steps), Hold Drive

Frequency, Hold Reference, Speed Up; activated by Hold Drive Frequency, or Hold Reference, Slow Down; activated by Hold Drive Frequency or Hold Reference, Drive Parameter Setup Select 1-4 Precise Start or Stop; Activated when drive parameter, precise start or stop function is selected, Catch Up or Slow Down; Activated by signal to add to or subtract from input reference to control speed,Pulse Input selectable from 100 - 110000Hz, Accel / Decel Time select.

Set Input to Accel / Decel Times 1 to 4, Digital Potentiometer Input Increase or Decrease, Mechanical Brake Feedback.

Output Signals 2 - Digital Outputs 24 Vdc (Digital Outputs are used in place of 2 of the Digital Inputs), 2 - Form C Relays rated to

2A at 240 Vac, 1 - Analog Output 0/4 to 20mA, Relay Output Settings : No Operation, Control Ready, Drive Ready,

Drive Ready in Remote, Standby No Drive Warnings, Drive Running, Drive Running No Drive Warnings, Drive

Running on Remote, Alarm, Alarm or Warning, At Torque Limit, Out of Current Range, Below Current, Above

Current, Out of Speed Range, Below Speed, Above Speed, Out of Feedback Range, Below Feedback, Above

Feedback, Thermal Overload Warning, Reverse, Bus OK, Torque Limit and Stopped, Brake and no Warning, Brake

Ready and No Faults, Brake Chopper Fault, External Interlock, Out of External Reference Range, Below External

Reference, Above External Reference, Fieldbus Controlling Drive, No Alarm, Running in Reverse, Local Mode Active,

Remote Mode Active, Start Command Active, Hand Mode Active, Auto Mode Active

Protective Functions Line Phase Loss, DC Overvoltage, DC Undervoltage, Drive Overload, Motor Overtemperature, Motor Thermistor

Overtemperature, Torque Limit, Overcurrent, Ground Fault, Short Circuit, Control Word Timeout, Brake Resistor

Short-Circuited, Brake Chopper Short-Circuited, Brake Check, DC Link Voltage High, DC Link Voltage Low, Internal

Fan Fault, External Fan Fault, Power Board Overtemperature, Missing U Phase, Missing V Phase, Missing W Phase,

Internal Fault, Control Voltage Fault, Auto Tune Check - Wrong Motor Parameters, Auto Tune Low Inom - Motor current is too low, Current Limit, Mechanical Brake Low, Drive Initialized to Default Value, Keypad Error, No Motor,

Keypad

Soft Charge Fault, Auto Tuning Fault, Serial Comms Bus Fault, Hardware Mismatch, Speed Limit.

Keypad Features LCD Display with 6 Alpha-numeric lines. Multi-Language Support, Hot Pluggable, Remote Mount Option, and

CopyCat Feature, IP65 rating when remote mounted on enclosure, LED’s - Green - drive is on, Yellow - indicates a warning, Red - indicates an alarm, Amber - Indicates active Menu keys and H-O-A keys

Keypad Keys Status - shows status of drive, Quick Menu - Enters Quick Start, Parameter Data Check or Trending Modes, Main

Menu - Used for programming all drive parameters, Alarm Log - Used to display Alarm list, Back - Reverts to previous step or layer in parameter,structure, Cancel - Used to cancel last change or command, Info - Displays information about a command arameter, or function in any display. Hand/Off/Auto - Used to control drive locally or put drive in remote mode, Reset - Used to reset Warnings or Alarms.

Password 2 Level Password Protection

Alternate Motor Parameters Up to 4 Separate complete parameter set-ups are available

Graphical Trending Trend Speed, Power, Frequency or any value programmed in status display

RS485 Modbus RTU Serial

Communications

Physical Level EIA/RS485

Transmission Distance 1640 ft (500m)

Node Address 32

Transmission Speed 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,or 115200 (bits/s)

Transmission Mode Half Duplex

Transmission Protocol Modbus RTU

Character Code Binary

Character Length 8 Bits

Error Check CRC

Special AF650 FP Modes

Fire Override Mode Overrides drive’s protective features and keeps motor running

Pump Cascade Controller Distributes running hours evenly over up to 4 pumps.

Sleep Mode Drive detects low or no flow conditions and adjusts output

Dry Pump Detection Detects pump operation and can set off alarm, shuts off, or other programmed actions

Belt Monitoring Drive can detect relationship between current and speed to recognize a broken belt

G4



AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Standard Options

Line Reactor 3% Reactor is standard with the drive

DC Link Reactors Standard with drive

Class AFII RFI Standard with drive

Speed Control The unit comes with a Keypad that can be used for Speed adjustment.

Outputs Relays Drive come standard with two relays form C rated to 2A at 240 VAC.

Outputs Analog Drive comes standard with 1 Analog output 0/4-20mA

Outputs Digital Drive comes standard with 2 Digital outputs at 24 VDC (Digital Outputs are used in place of the 2 Digital inputs.

Communications Drive RS-485, Modbus RTU, Metasys N2, or Apogee FLN P1

AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Additional Options

Line Reactor 5% Reactor must be requested and priced

Speed control Door mounted potentiometer must be requested and priced.

Communication Module

Profibus Profibus DP internal mounted module for use on AF-650 GP & AF-600FP. Supports Profibus DP V1 communications networks.

DeviceNet DeviceNet internal mounted module for use on AF-650 GP & AF-600FP. ODVA certified device.

Ethernet IP Ethernet IP internal mounted module for use on AF-650 GP & AF-600FP. ODVA certified device. Features 2-Port built-in switch. Also includes webserver and email notification. 1Requires I/O and network slots and cannot be used with any other network or I/O modules

Modbus TCP Modbus TCP internal mounted module for use on AF-650 GP & AF-600FP.

ProfiNet RT ProfiNet RT internal mounted module for use on AF-650 GP & AF-600FP.

LonWorks LonWorks internal mounted module for use on AF-600 FP drives only. Supports LonWorks building automation communications networks

BacNet BacNet internal mounted module for use on AF-60 FP drives only. Supports BacNet MSTP building automation communications networks.

Relay Output Relay Output internal mounted module for use on the AF-650 GP and AF-600 FP. Module adds (3) Form C relay outputs to the drive. Relays are rated at 2A at 240V resistive load.

Analog I/O Analog I/O internal mounted module for use on the AF-600 FP drive only. Module Includes: 3 - Analog Inputs

0-10V, 0/4-20mA & 3 - Analog Outputs 0-10V, Battery Back-Up power for AF-600 FP’s internal Real Time Clock

24V DC External Supply 24V DC External Supply internal mounted module for use on the AF-650 GP & AF-600 FP drives. This module accepts an external 24V DC supply which is used to keep the control board of the drive and other option modules powered in the event of a Line side power outage. Can be used with Communications and I/O Modules.

General Purpose I/O General Purpose I/O internal mounted module for use on AF-650 GP and AF-600 FP drives. Module includes:

3 - 24V Digital Inputs, 2 - PNP/NPN Digital Outputs, 2 - 0-10V Analog Inputs & 1 - 0/4-20mA Analog Output

Encoder Encoder internal mounted module for use on the AF-650 GP. Module supports all 5V incremental encoders.

Also supports Hyperface SinCos encoders.

Resolver Resolver internal mounted module for use on the AF-650 GP drive. Module supports 4-8Vrms, 2.5kHz - 15kHz,

50mA resolvers. Resolution is 10bit at 4Vrms.

Safe PLC I/O Safe PLC I/O internal drive mounted module for use on the AF-650 GP drive. This module provides a safety input based on a single pole 24V DC input.

G

G5




Space Height & Assembly

AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Space Height, 42 kAIC

Function Plug-In

Max HP GP/FP CT/VT @

230/240V 380/415V 440/480V 575/600V

5/5

10/15

25/40

3/3

5/7.5

15/15

40/60

5/5

10/10

20/25

60/60

/75

40/

50/60

75/

/75

100/125

200/250

75/

100/125

150/200

300/

Disconnect

Basic ,LR,

Bypass

& Isolation

X

X

X

208V

5/5

10/15

25/40

40/

50/60

SELI, SELT

SELI, SELT

SELI, SELT

SELI, SELT

SELI, SELT

SELI, SELT

SFLI, SFLT

SELI, SELT

SFLI, SFLT

SGLI. SGLT

SGLI. SGLT

(1) Section 2 will always be on the left and bottom mounted. All Space height is based on all main bus sizes.

(2) When line reactors are not required consult factory for dimensions.

(3) Pilot devices may impact the X height on certain plug-in HPs

Section 1

Width X Height

24

24

30

15

15

15

30

24

24

30

30

2.5

3

4

4

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

Minimum UL short-circuit rating 42KAIC@ 480V

Section 2

Width X Height

15

15

24

30

1.5

1.5

1.5

4.5

G


Function Plug-In

X

X

X

X

X

X


230/240V 380/415V 440/480V 575/600V

3/3 3/3 5/5

10/10

10/15 15/15 20/25

20/25

15/20 30/30 40/50

40/50

25/40 40/60 60/75

60/75

40/ 75/

/75 100/125

75/100

100/

200/250

350/350

150/

300/350

500/500

500/500

Disconnect

Basic &

LR

208V

3/3

10/15

15/20

25/40

40/

SELI, SELT

SELI, SELT, TECL

SELI, SELT

SELI, SELT, TECL

SELI, SELT

SELI, SELT, TECL

SELI, SELT

SELI, SELT, TECL

SELI, SELT

SFLI, SFLT

SELI, SELT, TECL

SFLI, SFLT

SGLI, SGLT

SKLI, SKLT

SGLI, SGLT





Minimum UL short-circuit rating 65KAIC @ 600V for all buckets rated 575/600 V

30

30

30

24

24

24

30

Section 1

Width X Height (3)

15 2

15

15

15

15

15

24

24

3

4

4

2

3

4

4

4.5

4.5

4.5

5.5

5.5

6

6

Section 2


20

24

24

3

6

3.5

G6




Space Height & Assembly


Function

Basic ,LR,

Bypass with

J-Fuse (2)

Plug-In

X

X

X

208V

5/5

15/20

40/

50/60


230/240V 380/415V 440/480V

5/5

15/20

40/

50/60

3/3

5/7.5

30/30

75/

100/125

200/250

5/5

10/10

40/50

Disconnect

SEPI, SEPT

SEPI, SEPT

SEPI, SEPT

SEPI, SEPT

SFPI, SFPT

75/ SEPI, SEPT

100/125 SFPI, SFPT

150/200 SGPI, SGPT

300/350 SGPI, SGPT

Width

15

15

15

30

30

24

24

36

36

Section 1

X Height (3)




2.5

3

4

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

4.5

5.5


Section 2


15

15

15

30

1.5

1.5

3

4.5

Six Pulse VFD Generic Block Diagram

Rectifier

(SCR/DIODES)

Intermediate

Circuit

L1

L2

L3

Inverter

Section (GBTs)

T1

T2

T3

Power Section

Soft Charge Circuitry

Logic to Power Interface

Control Logic

G

G7




Drive Configuration in Motor Control Center Construction

Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Required for Disconnect

STAB

(1)

CB

STANDARD VFD

(2)

REACTOR

VFD (3)

*

MOTOR

VFD WITH

LINE ISOLATION

STAB

(1)

CB

(2)

REACTOR

VFD (3)

*

MOTOR

G

VFD WITH

BYPASS FEATURE

STAB

(1)

CB

(2)

REACTOR

VFD (3)

*

OL

MOTOR

VFD WITH

LINE ISOLATION

PLUS BYPASS FEATURE

STAB

(1)

CB

(2)

(1) Drawout breaker through 600A

(2) J Fuse as required

(3) DC link reactor (choke) included in drive

* Load Filter option

REACTOR

VFD (3)

*

OL

MOTOR

G8




Harmonic Filters

GE offers two basic filter types in MCC construction: Matrix and Dynamic Current Injection. Consult factory for sizing.

GE Matrix Harmonic Filters provide broadband reduction of harmonics. They not only offer better performance over other broadband filtering and 12- and 18-pulse harmonic reduction techniques, they also are suitable for a wider range of applications. Matrix Harmonic Filters can be installed in either variable or constant torque drive applications and can be applied on either a six pulse or half-controlled rectifier. For applications other than variable torque, contact the factory for filter selection.

GE Matrix Harmonic Filters enable most AC drive systems to comply with the voltage and current distortion limits outlined in IEEE 519. A complete harmonic analysis and product selection tool is available at www.gedigitalenergy.com.

Select Digital Energy > HV/MV Equipment > Capacitors > LV

Power Factor Correction > Matrix Harmonic Filter or simply use this “link”.

GE Matrix Harmonic Filters are multi-stage low pass filters specially configured to avoid the attraction of harmonics from other sources on a shared power system. They will not cause power system resonance. However, the configuration of the filter requires that only drives or equivalent loads be loaded on the output. One filter can be used with multiple drives, but if there is a drive bypass circuit, there must be one filter per drive and the filter and drive combination must be bypassed.

GE GEMActive Dynamic Current Injection Filters for harmonic cancellation and power factor correction:

• Reduce harmonics for IEEE 519 (1992) standard compliance

• Decrease harmonic related overheating of cables, switchgear and transformers

• Reduce downtime caused by nuisance thermal tripping of protective devices

• Increase electrical network reliability and reduce operating costs

• Compensate each phase independently

• Are UL approved

• Offer parallel connection for easy retrofit and installation of multiple units for large networks

• Filter to the 50th order harmonic

• Filter entire network or specific loads depending on installation point

• Respond to load fluctuations in 40 microseconds with 8 milliseconds for full response to step load changes

• Feature IGBT based power electronic technology

• Come in 50, and 100A models for 208-480V, 50/60 Hz, three phase networks that can be paralleled to match load requirements

GE GEMActive reduces problematic harmonic levels and provides instantaneous power factor correction. Cost savings result from reduced downtime and maintenance. In addition, over-sizing of distribution equipment to provide for harmonics and poor power factor can be avoided. GE

GEMActive dynamically corrects power quality by providing:

Active Harmonic Filtration, Resonance Prevention, Power

Factor Correction and Dynamic VAR Compensation

G

G9



G


Motor Application Data

Select the proper motor using the data from motor application brochures, identify the motor full load current and select the inverter which meets or exceeds the motor full load current requirements.

Harmonic Derating

AC motors have traditionally been applied as constant speed motors, so there is little published information on reduced speed efficiencies, especially when operated with a non-sinusoidal supply such as an inverter. The harmonics present in the PWM inverter output increase motor losses and thus motor heating. GE Energy Saver* motors, designed for high efficiency and improved thermal characteristics, may be applied at nameplate rating for variable torque duty, such as centrifugal fans and pumps, for 4 and 6 pole ratings.

Standard AC motors designed for 60 Hertz operation should be derated 10% for variable torque duty. For constant torque applications, Energy Saver and standard design motors should be applied per Fig. 1. For other applications refer to the Company.

100

ENERGY $AVER TYPE KE

STANDARD K

2. Motor Speed Range

Motor synchronous speed is determined by the following equation:

Frequency

Sync. Motor Speed = 120 X Applied

Number of Motor Poles

Induction motors operate at a somewhat slower speed than synchronous speed due to slip, which is generally 2-3 percent of synchronous speed.

If the application requirements call for higher or lower speeds than can be obtained by using standard motors following these application guidelines, gear increasers or reducers should be considered.

3. Multi Motor Drives

Multiple motors can be driven simultaneously by one drive unit. In order to select the proper inverter, total the individual motor full load currents and multiply the sum by a factor of 1.1. Select the inverter than can deliver the total current calculated. Each motor will require individual overload relays, when switched independently RTF.

Fig. 1

0

VARIABLE

TORQUE

% SPEED

100

CONSTANT

TORQUE

CONSTANT

HORSEPOWER

150

How to Select Drives

1. Types of Load

In selecting inverters, load patterns of machines should be known in advance. Generally, loads can be categorized into the three types shown below. Estimate or obtain the point marked 0 as indicated.

This defines maximum torque and the maximum or minimum speed requirement of the driven equipment. Calculate the required motor HP by substituting the maximum torque and rated motor base speed in equation (1).

4. Acceleration Time

Acceleration time is programmable. If the programmed setting calls for a faster acceleration than the drive system is capable of, the unit may trip due to an overcurrent condition. Therefore, the actual time to accelerate the driven load should be calculated using the following equation and the acceleration time setting should be adjusted accordingly.

(Wk

2

X ΔN)

TA =

308 (T X 1.2)

Where:

TA = Time to accelerate the driven load (in seconds).

ΔN = Change in speed (in RPM)

WK

2

= The total system inertia reflected to the motor shaft.

Includes motor, machine gears (in ft./lbs.

2

)

T = Motor full load torque (lb./ft.)

When using a drive in a conventional constant speed machine application where a full voltage starter has been used, the acceleration time should be set longer than the original machine. This is because the maximum allowable current that the AF-650GP drive can deliver is 150 percent of rated current, while full voltage starters deliver 600-800 percent. This means that the drive delivers a “soft start” and thus reduces starting torque over that of a full voltage starter, which naturally yields a longer acceleration time.

SPEED HZ 100% SPEED HZ 100% SPEED HZ 100% 150%

MOTOR SPEED (MAX.)

(1)HP = TXN

5250

HP = Required HP

T = Torque in lb./ft.

N = Speed in RPM

MOTOR SPEED

(ZERO)

ACCELERATION TIME

ADJUSTABLE

TIME

G10




How to Select Drives

(cont.)

Application consideration for AF-650GP and AF-600FP drives:

5. Deceleration Time

Deceleration time is programmable. If the programmed setting calls for faster deceleration than the drive system is capable of, the unit may trip due to an overvoltage or overcurrent condition. Therefore, the actual time required to decelerate the driven load should be calculated using the following equation and the deceleration time setting should be adjusted accordingly.

(Wk 2 X ΔN)

308 (T X .2)

Where:

TD = Time to decelerate the driven load (in seconds).

ΔN = Change in speed (in RPM)

Wk 2 = The total system inertia reflected to the motor Shaft.

Includes motor, machine gears (in ft./lbs.

2 )

T =Motor full load torque (lb./ft.)

If faster deceleration is required, refer to the Company.

Cable & Motor Considerations for AF-6 Drives

A primary concern in recent years has been for wiring between adjustable speed drives and motors. This is because voltage spiking, seen at the motor terminals at the switching frequency can cause damage to the motor insulation. This spiking depends on several factors such as drive input voltage level, drive output wave-form dv/dt, length of the cabling from the drive to the motor and characteristics of the cabling used, etc.

In addition, there are secondary effects related to drive/motor wiring that impact performance such as parasitic capacitance.

Max. cable lengths between drive and motor without filters

Motor Insulation Level 1000V 1300V 1600V

AF-650GP & AF 600FP 460V Input 49 ft. (15M) 984 ft. (300M) 984 ft. (300M)

AF-650GP & AF 600FP 230V Input 984 ft. (300M) 984 ft. (300M) 984 ft. (300M)

• PWM IGBT drives are not typically recommended with

1000Vac insulation Motors.

• Load filters are recommended from 984 ft. when motor insulation level is 1300V or above.

• Custom motors are available for applications not listed.

• Contact motor manufacturer or your GE Energy representative.

Peak Voltage Insulation Rating (Horizontal, 60 Hz Only)

Frame

140

180

210

250

280

320

360

400

440

500

ODP-KE TEFC-KE XSD-KS

1000V P-P 1000V P-P 1300V P-P

1000V P-P 1000V P-P 1300V P-P

1000V P-P 1000V P-P 1300V P-P

1000V P-P 1000V P-P 1300V P-P

1000V P-P 1000V P-P 1300V P-P

1300V P-P 1000V P-P 1300V P-P

1300V P-P 1000V P-P 1300V P-P

1300V P-P 1300V P-P 1300V P-P

1300V P-P 1300V P-P 1300V P-P

1300V P-P 1300V P-P N/A

ODP = Open-Dripproof, TEFC = Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled,

XSD = Extra Saver Duty, ASD = Adjustable Speed Drive

XSD-IEEE841-KS ASD-KAF

1600V P-P

1600V P-P

1600V P-P

1600V P-P

1600V P-P

1600V P-P

1600V P-P

1600V P-P

1600V P-P

1600V P-P

1600V P-P

1600V P-P

1600V P-P

1600V P-P

1600V P-P

1600V P-P

1600V P-P

1600V P-P

1600V P-P

1600V P-P

Caution: If existing motors are used, condition of insulation must be checked and manufacturers insulation rating as well. Load filters may be required.

Drive input voltage, motor insulation and cable length are beyond the scope of the drive design. The following guidelines were compiled for your convenience.

System Filtering

The use of a properly sized filter can reduce the voltage peaks and rise times seen at the motor. The filter must be properly sized and located. If the filtering is done with reactors it must be placed close to the motor terminals. If the filtering is with

LRC (Inductance, Resistance and Capacitance) it must be placed at the output terminals of the drive.

G

G11



ASTAT XT

Digital Soft Starters for 3ph

Standard Induction Motors

GE´s new ASTAT XT solid state soft starter features microprocessor control digital technology. Setup and adjustment is performed through a six-button keypad and parameters or messages are displayed out trough a friendly LCD multilanguage interface with two rows, sixteen alphanumeric characters each. The design includes isolated

I/O and high level of protection in their circuits to minimize the disturbance effects while working in the hardest industrial environment.

ASTAT XT soft starter offers reliable performance and smooth acceleration for a variety of standard AC motors up to 1400A and up to 690V, reducing mechanical shock to the driving system, resulting in extended component and motor life.

ASTAT XT offers many traditional features such a motor overload function, adjustable ramps, current limit, kick start, but also other high end features like Inside-Delta operation,

Torque control, Pump control and a reliable motor and unit set of protections.

G

Key features

• Ratings up to 1400Amps and up to 690VAC

• Friendly multilanguage interface with two rows, sixteen characters each

• Built-in with three extra power terminals for external bypass

• In-Line or Inside-Delta operation modes

• Torque control and pump control advanced features

• Motor protection according IEC 10, 20 and NEMA 10, 20,

30, even if ASTAT XT is in bypass

• Built-in communications RS485 port, and ModBus protocol as standard

• ProfibusDP and DeviceNet optional interfaces for communications

ASTAT XT

For units up to 820A. “U” type.

ASTAT XT Control Panel

G12



ASTAT XT

Technical Data

Ratings

Main Voltage

3ph AC supply 230 to 500Vac +10%, -15% for QT1xxx units

460 to 600Vac +10%, -15% for QT2xxx units

690Vac +10%, -15% for QT3xxx units

Starter Current Rating

3ph AC motors

Motor Current Rating

3ph Induction motors

Control Voltage

1ph AC supply

Frequency Range

50/60Hz systems

Digital Inputs Voltage

From 8A up to 1400A

Motor rated current from 50% to 100% of starter current

230VAC, +10, -15%, 50/60Hz or 110VAC, +10, -15%, 50/60Hz (optional)

Wide from 45Hz to 65Hz. Auto-tracking frequency range

90-230Vac, +10 -15%, 50/60Hz or 24Vdc, +10%, -15% (optional)

Control Specifications

Control System

Operation Mode

Run Operation

Digital control with microcontroller. Starting ramp, with progressive increase in voltage and current limitation.

In-Line (three wires) or Inside-Delta (six wires) of the motor

Soft Start and Soft stop by multiple choices, including torque control both at start or Stop phases

Operator Interface

By LCD display, keypad and Indication

— LEDs Display: LCD with two rows, 16 characters each

— Type: Multilanguage, dip-switch selectable for English, Italian, Spanish and German

— Keys: Six keys, Mode, reset, Set, Select and Up / Down

— LEDs: ON, Start, Run, Soft Stop, Stop, Save / Slow Speed, Dual Set / Reverse and Fault

Initial Voltage

Starting Current

10-50% Un. Up to 80% with expanded settings function

100-400% In. Can be extended up to 500%, by using extended settings

Acceleration Ramp Time

1-30 sec. Can be extended up to 90 sec, by using extended settings

Deceleration Ramp Time

1-30 sec. Can be extended up to 90 sec, by using extended settings

Current Limitation

100-400% of motor rated current. Can be extended up to 500% by using extended settings

Bypass

Monitoring

By external contactor while motor is full protected by ASTAT XT

Motor current, line voltage, motor thermistor resistance, test and maintenance and statistics


Operating Temperature

-10°C up to 60ºC, with current derating by 2.5% per °C, from 50ºC

Storage Temperature

Maximum Altitude

-20ºC up to 70ºC

Up to 1000 mts. Ask your dealed for installation at higher altitude

Humidity

Protection Degree

Pollution Degree

95% at 50ºC or 98% at 45ºC

IP20 for units up to 72A, IP00 for units from 85A up to 1400A

Class 3

Standards

Global Standards

EMC Emissions

Immunity

Safety

CE for the full trange. UL, cUL for specifi ed units up to 820A

EN 61000-6-4 CISPR 11 Class A

EN 61000-6-2 ESD 8KV air, IEC 801-2; Electric RF fi eld 10 V/m, 20-1000Mhz, IEC 801-3; Fast transients 2KV, IEC 801-4

EN 600947-1 Related to safety requirements; UL508C

G

G13



G

ASTAT XT

Functions

Available Standard Functions

Soft Start and Soft Stop

ASTAT XT is provided with a soft start and soft stop features, including fi ve independent acceleration and decelertaion curve models.

The factory default curve is used for general purpose, other three are used for pump control and the last one for torque control.

Pump Control

Torque Control

Specific function for pump control, that avoids overpressure in the system at the end of acceleration phase and suppresses the hammering at stopping phase.

Provides a smoth time controlled torque ramp acceleration and deceleration, with linear deceleration of the torque resulting in a close to linear speed deceleration, thus eliminating stall conditions.

In Line / Inside Delta

ASTAT XT allows either traditional Line operation or Inside Delta operation. When the ASTAT XT is installed to operate Inside Delta, the individual phases of the starter are connected in series with the individual motor windings (six wiring connections like the Start-Delta starters), thus reducing the current x1.73, and allowing the use of a much smaller starter (x1.5 less than motor rated current).

Bypass

Kick Start

ASTAT XT allows bypass operation using an external contactor, controlled ON/OFF by starter function EOR (End Of Ramp).The

starter is provided with three dedicated power terminals to facilitate wirings to the bypass contactor. ASTAT XT protections to motor are enabled, even in bypass.

This function allows to start high friction loads that require high starting torque for a short period of time. When this function is enabled, a pulse of 80% Un during an adjustable time from 0 to 1 sec. is given to the motor. After this pulse the output voltage is ramping down to starting voltage setting, before ramping up again to full voltage.

End of Ramp

Detects end of acceleration and outputs a signal by a dry relay contact. This signal can be delayed by an adjustable timer from 0-120 sec.

Lock-out

Dual Settings

Allows to control the number of startings into a period of time, then protecting both motor and ASTAT.

By this function, ASTAT XT is able to control a secondary motor dual setting of starting voltage, starting current, durrent limit, ramp up, ramp down and motor current parameters can be selected by using one of the programmable ASTAT XT inputs.

Energy Saving

Activated when the motor has a light load for extended periods of time, then reducing the output voltage level and decreasing the reactive current and motor copper/iron losses. This function can be enabled or disabled by dedicated parameters in ASTAT XT.

Slow Speed

Auto Reset

Cooling Fan Control

Generator Supply

Function that allows the motor to run at 1/6 constant rated speed, for a short period of time of maximum 30 sec.

This function supports forward and reverse operation.

This function allows the ASTAT XT automatic recover after a fault caused by undervoltage, undercurrent or phase lost.

Auto-reset can be programed up to maximum 10 attempts.

Allows three methods of control for the ASTAT´s built-in cooling fans:

— Continuous operation

— Controlled by an external input

— Automatically OFF controlled, after five minutes ASTAT XT is stopped

This is a specific function useful when the starter is powered from a diesel generator rather than from commercial power supply.

The function is enabled by an internal dip switch, and helps to minimize the negative effects caused by the generator´s voltage fluctuations during starting.

Keypad Lock

This function is enabled by means of starter´s internal dip switch, then locking the keypad. This is usefull to prevent undesired parameter modifications.

Built-in Communications ASTAT XT includes a ModBus RTU communications protocol. Communications are carried out through a half duplex RS485 port, with maximum baud rate of 9600, supporting up to 247 stations.

Statistic Data

ASTAT XT records useful data for maintenance and start up:

— Last 10 trip events.

— Statistical data like number of starts, number of trip events and elapsed RUN time.

— Last trip data information of motor current, starting current and acceleration time.

Motor and Starter Protection

Overload

Motor Thermistor

Too Many Starts

Long Start Time

O/C JAM Fault

Undercurrent

Undervoltage

Overvoltage

Phase loss

Frequency loss

Phase sequence

Slow speed time

Wrong connection

Shorted SCR

Over temperature

External fault

Wrong parameters

OC or wrong CON

Digital control with microcontroller. Starting ramp with progressive increase in voltage and current limitation.

In-Line (three wires) or Inside-Delta (six wires) of the motor.

Soft start and soft stop by multiple choices, including torque control both at start or stop phases.

Trips if output voltage does not reach rated voltage at the preset maximum start time.

Trips under the following conditions:

— Instantaneously when current exceeds 8.5 x ASTAT XT current

— During starting when current exceeds 8.5 x motor current

— During running when current exceeds 200-850% of motor current, O/C JAM has a programmable triping delay of 0-5 sec.

Trips when line current drops below the preset level for the preset time.

Trips when line voltage drops below the preset level for the preset time.

Trips when line voltage increases above a preset level for a preset time.

Trips if 1 or 2 phases are lost.

Trips if frequency is not in the range of 40-66.6 Hz.

Trips if line phase sequence is wrong.

Trips when operating at slow speed for extended periods.

Trips the ASTAT XT when one or more motor phases is not properly connected to ASTAT XT’s load terminals or if there is an internal disconnection in the motor winding.

Trips and prevents starting if any SCR is short-circuited or when motor windings are shorted.

Heat-sink over-temperature. Trips the ASTAT XT when the heat-sink temperature rises above 85°C.

Trips the ASTAT XT when a NO contact between terminals 19-21 closes for over two seconds.

Parameters not transferred from RAM to EEPROM or vice versa.

Trips when the ASTAT XT is connected Inside Delta and wrong connection or overcurrent is detected.

G14



ASTAT XT

I/O Wiring, Basic Scheme

Note: Profibus or DeviceNet options cannot be ordered separately. For those communication networks, please order the ASTAT XT with the required option built-in.

G15

G



Overload Protections

Thermal Characteristics

The ASTAT XT allows motor protection according IEC Class 10 or Class 20 and NEMA 10, 20 or 30.

User free selectable by ASTAT internal dedicated parameter.

IEC Class 10

Sec.

10000

IEC Class 20

Sec.

10000

1000

100

COLD

10

HOT

1

1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0

Multiples of motor FLA Rating In

1000

100

COLD

10

HOT

1

1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0


G

NEMA 10

Light Duty

Sec.

10000

1000

100

COLD

10

HOT

1

1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0


NEMA 20

Sec.

10000

1000

100

COLD

10

HOT

1

1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0


NEMA 30

Sec.

10000

1000

100

COLD

10

HOT

1

1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0


Maximum Number Starting/Hour

Starting Current

I/In

➀

2

3

4

10s

24

16

12

Ramp Time

20s

12

8

6

30s

8

5

4

➀ In= rated current of ASTAT XT in the specified class IEC/NEMA

G16



ASTAT BP

Digital Soft Starters for 3ph

AC Induction Motors

The ASTAT BP soft starter delivers reliable performance and smooth acceleration and deceleration on 3 phase AC induction motors from 8A-1100A at 208V-400V or 460V-600V. It reduces mechanical wear and tear on motors and also can reduce peak energy demands by limiting the current to motors at startup.

Features

• Offers current and torque control

• Has multiple soft start and stop curves to meet a variety of applications

• Comes with built in NEMA Class 10, 20, 30 or IEC Class 10 or

20 overload

• Features full text programming

Ratings

• Current ratings

— 8A, 17A, 31A, 44A, 58A, 72A, 85A, 105A, 145A, 170A,

210A, 240A, 310A, 360A, 414A, 477A, 515A, 590A, 720A,

840A, 960A, 1100A

• Line voltage

— 3ph, 208V to 440V, 50/60Hz (QB1x)

3ph, 460V to 600V, 50/60Hz (QB2x)

• Frequency range

— 45Hz-65Hz, auto-tracking frequency range

• Control voltage

— 120V or 240V, +10% / -15%

(specified at through catalog number)


• Networks

— Modbus RTU as standard

• Standards

— UL and cUL

• Ambient Temperature

— -10ºC to 50ºC

• Altitude

— 3300ft or 1000m (consult factory)

• Protection degree

— Open Chassis / IP20 to 44A,

Open Chassis / IP00 58A and above

ASTAT BP

G

G17



G

ASTAT BP

Technical Data

General Information

Supply Voltage

Frequency

Control Supply

Control Inputs

Load

Connection Type

Rated Insulation Voltage

Line to line 208-600V (to be specified) + 10%-15%

45 – 65 Hz (fixed or variable frequency source)

Either 110VAC or 230VAC (to be specified) +10% - 15%

Either 90-230VAC - Must be the same as Control Supply

Three phases, three/six wires, squirrel cage induction motor

Standard 3 wire U, V, W connection, or 6 wire Inside Delta (programmable)

1,000V

Rated Impulse Voltage

Form Designation

4kV

Form 1 (Bypassed Controller)

Start-Stop Parameters

Starter Current

Motor Current

ASTAT-BP’s rated current according to its nameplate

Motor Full Load Ampere of Starter Current

Start/Stop Curve 0 (Standard)

2 standard starting and stopping curves

Pump Control Curves (1!, 2!, 3!) 6 field selectable curves preventing over-pressure during start and water hammer during stop

Torque Control Curve (4)

Kick Start Duration

2 selectable curves preventing over-pressure during start and water hammer during stop. In addition, these curves may be used for torque control starting of constant torque applications

A pulse of 80% Un, for an adj. time 0.1-1 Sec, for starting high friction loads

Starting Voltage

Initial Current

10-50% Un (5-80%)

100-400% In. A single current control starting curve. It appears when Starting Voltage is displayed, the up arrow is pressed and Starting Voltage has reached its max.

Current Limit

Ramp UP Time

Ramp DOWN Time

DUAL Settings Parameters

Slow Speed Torque

100-700% of Motor Current

1-30 Sec (1-90 sec)

1-30 Sec (1-90 sec)

Secondary start stop characteristic for: Starting Voltage, Starting Current, Current Limit, Ramp UP, Ramp DOWN and

Motor Current

Torque while motor is at 1/6 nominal speed

Motor Protection

Too Many Starts

Starts Inhibit

Maximum number of starts, range: Off or 1-10, during a time period 1-60 min.

Time period 1-60 min, when starting is prevented, after too many starts fault

Long Start Time (stall protection) Maximum allowable starting time 1-30 sec. (1-250 sec)

Over Current (JAM Fault)

Three trip functions:

— At all time

If I > 850% of Starter Current (Ir) it trips the ASTAT-BP within 1 cycle (overrides the value of the O/C – JAM Delay setting).

— At starting process

If I > 850% of Motor Current it trips the ASTAT-BP after O/C JAM Delay (see here after)

— At run time

If I > O/C – JAM Fault setting of Im it trips the ASTAT-BP after O/C JAM Delay

Electronic Overload

Under Current

Under Voltage

Can be set as IEC Class 10, 20 or NEMA Class 10, 20 or 30.

Can be set to operate at all times, disabled or operate during Run only.

Trips when current drops below 20-90% of Motor Current, time delay 1-40 sec. Optional auto reset after time delay

Trips when main voltage drops below 50-90% of Line Voltage, time delay 1-10 sec. Optional Auto Reset.

Over Voltage

Phase Loss,

Under/Over Frequency

Phase Sequence

Long Slow Speed Time

Wrong Connection

4Trips when main voltage increase above 110-125% of Line Voltage, time delay 1-10 sec.

Trips when one or two phases are missing, or frequency is < 40Hz or > 65Hz. Optional auto reset.

Trips when phase sequence is wrong

Trips if operating at slow speed TRQ for more than 1-30 sec (1-250 sec)

Prevents starting, trips if motor is not connected / incorrectly connected to the ASTAT-BP

(not active in D.Set: Generator Parameters)

Shorted SCR

Trips if one or more SCRs have been shorted (not active in D.Set: Generator Parameters)

Heat Sink Over Temperature

Trips when heat-sink temperature rises above 85°C

External Fault

Motor Thermistor

Trips when an external contact closes for 2 sec.

Trip level setting 1-10K, trips when resistance decreases below the level set

G18



ASTAT BP

Technical Data

(continued)

Control

Displays

Keypad

Aux Contact – Programmable

Fault Contact

Communication

Communication (Optional)

Temperatures Operating

LCD in 4 – Field selectable languages and 8 LEDs

6 keys for easy setting

1 NO, 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA

1 NO, 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA

RS 485 with Modbus protocol for full control and supervision

Profibus DPV1 for full control and supervision

DeviceNett* for full control and supervision

-10° to 60°C; For ambient temperature between 50°C and 60°C, derate the current by 2.5% for each °C that is above 50°C

-20° to 70°C

Storage

Standards

Dielectric Test

Degree of Protection

Pollution Degree

EMC Emissions

Immunity

2500VAC

IP 20 for QBx0008 - QBx0044 ; IP 00 for QBx0058 – QTx1100

3

EN 61000-6-4 CISPR 11 Class A

EN 61000-6-2 ESD 8KV air, IEC 801-2;

Electric RF field 10 V/m, 20-1000Mhz, IEC 801-3

Fast transients 2KV, IEC 801-4

Safety

Rated Operational Current

Normal Service Conditions

UL508C

AC:53a:3.5-30: 50-4

Altitude

Humidity

Up to 1000m

95% at 50°C or 98% at 45°C

Fan and Control Consumption Ratings

QBx0008 to QBx0170

— No fan

QBx0210 to QBx0477

— Fans 50 VA

QBx0515 to QBx0840

— Fan 50 VA

QBx0960 to QBx1100

— Fans 110 VA

Total approximate consumption: 35VA




G

G19



G

ASTAT XT

Starter Type and

Feature

ASTAT XT with no

Features


Features

& J Fuses

Stab

_

Stab

_

Power Unit Size /

Current Rating

0105

0145

0210

0310

0390

0460

0580

0650

0820

0820

0008

0017

0031

0044

0058

0072

0085

0105

0145

0210

0310

0390

0460

0580

0650

0008

0017

0031

0044

0058

0072

0085

Circuit Breaker

Frame

SKLT

SELT

SELT

SELT

SELT

SELT

SELT

SELT

SELT

SFLT

SFLT

SFLT

SGLT

SGLT

SGLT

SGLT

SKLT and L Fuses

SELT

SFLT

SFLT

SFLT

SGLT

SGLT

SGLT

SGLT

SELT

SELT

SELT

SELT

SELT

SELT

SELT

50

60

100

125

20

25

30

40

3

7.5

10

15

150

200

200

2

150

200

200

50

60

100

125

20

25

30

40

200V

2

3

7.5

10

15

Horsepower➀

230V 460V 575V

2 5 5

60

75

100

150

25

30

40

50

5

10

15

20

150

200

250

2

5

10

15

20

25

30

40

50

60

75

100

150

150

200

250

10

20

30

40

50

60

75

100

125

150

250

300

350

400

500

5

10

20

30

40

50

60

75

100

125

150

250

300

350

400

500

15

25

40

50

60

75

100

150

150

200

300

400

400

400

500

5

15

25

40

50

60

75

100

150

150

200

300

400

400

400

500

IC (kA) @

460V

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

65

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

Section

Width

20" + 30"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

30"

30"

20" + 30"

20"

20"

30"

30"

20"

20"

20"

20"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

➀ All ratings are based on a selection of Normal Duty or Class 20 overloads. See operators guide for more rating options.

X-Height

3.5

4

4

4

4

4

5.5

5.5

4.5 + 4.5

4.5 + 3

2

2

2

2.5

2.5

2.5

3.5

3

3

4.5

4.5

3

3

3

3

2.5

2.5

2.5

3

2

2

2

G20



ASTAT XT – Type 1


Feature


Features

ASTAT XT with

Bypass

Feature

ASTAT XT with

Bypass

& J or L

Fuse

Feature

ASTAT XT with

ISO &

Bypass

Feature

Stab

—

Stab

—

Stab

—

Stab

—

Circuit Breaker

Frame

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SGL*/SGP*

SGL*/SGP*

SKL*/SKP*

SKL*/SKP*

SGL*/SGP*

SKL*/SKP*

SKL*/SKP*

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SGMCS

SGMCS

SKMCS

SKMCS

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SGL*/SGP*

SGL*/SGP*

SKL*/SKP*

SKL*/SKP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SGL*/SGP*


Current Rating

0017

0031

0044

0058

0072

0085

0105

0145

0170

0210

0310

0390

0460

0580

0820

0105

0145

0170

0210

0310

0390

0460

0580

0820

0008

0460

0580

0820

0008

0017

0031

0044

0058

0072

0085

0210

0310

0390

0460

0580

0820

0008

0017

0031

0044

0008

0017

0031

0044

0058

0072

0085

0105

0145

0170

0058

0072

0085

0105

0145

0170

0210

0310

0390

200V

25

30

40

50

60

75

5

10

15

20

100

150

150

200

250

100

150

150

200

250

2

40

50

60

75

5

10

15

20

25

30

150

200

250

2

20

25

30

40

200

250

2

5

10

15

50

60

75

100

150

75

100

150

150

30

40

50

60

Horsepower➀

230V 460V

2

5

5

10

10

15

20

25

20

30

40

50

60

75

100

125

150

250

300

350

40

50

60

75

400

500

5

10

20

30

100

125

150

250

300

50

60

75

100

125

150

10

20

30

40

250

300

350

400

500

75

100

125

150

250

300

350

400

500

5

10

20

30

40

50

60

350

400

500

5


Section

Width

15"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

15"

30"+20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

20"

20"

20"

30"

30"+20"

30"+20"

15"

15"

15"

20"

15"

15"

20"

20"

20"

20"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

IC (kA) @

460V

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

65

65

65

65

65

65

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

60

75

100

150

150

200

15

25

40

50

300

400

400

400

500

100

150

150

200

300

400

400

400

500

5

15

25

40

50

60

75

400

400

500

5

200

300

400

400

400

500

5

15

25

40

575V

5

15

25

40

50

60

75

100

150

150

50

60

75

100

150

150

200

300

400

X-Height

2.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

5.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

5.5

5.5

6+2

6+4

6+4

6

6

6+3

6+5.5

6+5.5

2.5

4

6

4

4

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

4

6+2

6+4

6+4

2.5

4

4

4

4.5

4.5+3

4.5+3

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

3

3

3

3

3

3

2

3

2

2

3.5

3.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

2.5

2.5

3.5

3.5

G

G21



G


(continued)


Feature

ASTAT XT with ISO,

Bypass

& J or L

Fuse

Feature

ASTAT XT with ISO

Feature


& J or L

Fuse

Feature

ASTAT XT with

J or L

Fuse

Feature

Stab

—

Stab

—

Stab

—

Stab

—

Circuit Breaker

Frame

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SGL*/SGP*

SGL*/SGP*

SKL*/SKP*

SKL*/SKP*

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SGMCS

SGMCS

SKMCS

SKMCS

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SFMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SGMCS

SGMCS

SKMCS

SKMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SGMCS

SGMCS

SKMCS

SKMCS


Current Rating

0017

0031

0044

0058

0072

0085

0105

0058

0072

0085

0105

0145

0170

0210

0310

0390

0460

0580

0820

0008

0460

0580

0820

0008

0017

0031

0044

0008

0017

0031

0044

0058

0072

0085

0105

0145

0170

0210

0310

0390

0072

0085

0105

0145

0170

0210

0310

0145

0170

0210

0310

0390

0460

0580

0820

0008

0017

0031

0044

0058

0390

0460

0580

0820

200V

IC (kA) @

460V

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

100

100

65

65

65

65

65

65

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

65

65

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

65

65

25

30

40

50

60

75

100

150

150

200

250

50

60

75

100

150

150

200

250

2

5

10

15

20

5

10

15

20

25

30

40

75

100

150

150

20

25

30

40

50

60

200

250

2

150

200

250

2

5

10

15

30

40

50

60

75

100

150

Horsepower➀

230V 460V 575V

2

5

5

10

5

15

10

15

20

25

20

30

40

50

25

40

50

60

60

75

100

125

150

250

300

75

100

150

150

200

300

400

40

50

60

75

100

125

150

250

300

350

400

500

5

350

400

500

5

10

20

30

50

60

75

100

150

150

200

300

400

400

400

500

5

400

400

500

5

15

25

40

50

60

75

100

125

150

250

300

350

400

500

100

125

150

250

300

350

400

500

5

10

20

30

40

10

20

30

40

50

60

75

60

75

100

150

150

200

300

400

400

400

500

150

150

200

300

400

400

400

500

5

15

25

40

50

15

25

40

50

60

75

100

Section

Width

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

30"

15"

15"

20"

20"

20"

20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

15"

30"+20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

20"

20"

20"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

20"

20"

15"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

30"

30"+20"

30"+20"


X-Height

2

2

2.5

2.5

2.5

3.5

3.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

2.5

2.5

3

3

3

3

6+3

6+3

2

6+3

6+5.5

6+5.5

2

2

2

2.5

4

4

4

4

6

6

6

2.5

2.5

2.5

3

3

3

2.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

4

4

3.5

3.5

6

6

6

5+2.5

5+4.5

5+4.5

2

2

2

2.5

2.5

4

5.5

4.5+4.5

4.5+4.5

G22





Feature


Features

ASTAT XT with

Bypass

Feature

ASTAT XT with

Bypass

& J or L

Fuse

Feature

ASTAT XT with

ISO &

Bypass

Feature

Stab

—

Stab

—

Stab

—

Stab

—

Circuit Breaker

Frame

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SGL*/SGP*

SGL*/SGP*

SKL*/SKP*

SKL*/SKP*

SGL*/SGP*

SKL*/SKP*

SKL*/SKP*

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SGMCS

SGMCS

SKMCS

SKMCS

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SGL*/SGP*

SGL*/SGP*

SKL*/SKP*

SKL*/SKP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SGL*/SGP*


Current Rating

0017

0031

0044

0058

0072

0085

0105

0145

170

0210

0310

0390

0460

0580

0820

0105

0145

170

0210

0310

0390

0460

0580

0820

0008

0460

0580

0820

0008

0017

0031

0044

0058

0072

0085

0210

0310

0390

0460

0580

0820

0008

0017

0031

0044

0008

0017

0031

0044

0058

0072

0085

0105

0145

0170

0058

0072

0085

0105

0145

0170

0210

0310

0390

200V

25

30

40

50

60

75

5

10

15

20

100

150

150

200

250

100

150

150

200

250

2

40

50

60

75

5

10

15

20

25

30

150

200

250

2

20

25

30

40

200

250

2

5

10

15

50

60

75

100

150

75

100

150

150

30

40

50

60

Horsepower➀

230V 460V

2

5

5

10

10

15

20

25

20

30

40

50

60

75

100

125

150

250

300

350

40

50

60

75

400

500

5

10

20

30

100

125

150

250

300

50

60

75

100

125

150

10

20

30

40

250

300

350

400

500

75

100

125

150

250

300

350

400

500

5

10

20

30

40

50

60

350

400

500

5


Section

Width

15"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

15"

30"+20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

30"

30"

15"

15"

15"

20"

20"

20"

20"

30"

15"

15"

20"

20"

20"

20"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

IC (kA) @

460V

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

65

65

65

65

65

65

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

60

75

100

150

150

200

15

25

40

50

300

400

400

400

500

100

150

150

200

300

400

400

400

500

5

15

25

40

50

60

75

400

400

500

5

200

300

400

400

400

500

5

15

25

40

575V

5

15

25

40

50

60

75

100

150

150

50

60

75

100

150

150

200

300

400

X-Height

2.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

5.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

5.5

5.5

6+2

6+4

6+4

6

6

6+3

6+5.5

6+5.5

2.5

4

6

4

4

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

4

6+2

6+4

6+4

2.5

7.5

7.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

3

5.5

5.5

5.5

7.5

4

4

4

4

3

3

2

3

2

2

3.5

3.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

3

3

3.5

3.5

G

G23



G


(continued)


Feature

ASTAT XT with ISO,

Bypass

& J or L

Fuse

Feature


Feature


& J or L

Fuse

Feature

ASTAT XT with

J or L

Fuse

Feature

Stab

—

Stab

—

Stab

—

Stab

—

Circuit Breaker

Frame

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SGL*/SGP*

SGL*/SGP*

SKL*/SKP*

SKL*/SKP*

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SGMCS

SGMCS

SKMCS

SKMCS

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SFMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SGMCS

SGMCS

SKMCS

SKMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SGMCS

SGMCS

SKMCS

SKMCS


Current Rating

0017

0031

0044

0058

0072

0085

0105

0058

0072

0085

0105

0145

0170

0210

0310

0390

0460

0580

0820

0008

0460

0580

0820

0008

0017

0031

0044

0008

0017

0031

0044

0058

0072

0085

0105

0145

0170

0210

0310

0390

0072

0085

0105

0145

0170

0210

0310

0145

0170

0210

0310

0390

0460

0580

0820

0008

0017

0031

0044

0058

0390

0460

0580

0820

200V

IC (kA) @

460V

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

100

100

65

65

65

65

65

65

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

65

65

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

65

65

25

30

40

50

60

75

100

150

150

200

250

50

60

75

100

150

150

200

250

2

5

10

15

20

5

10

15

20

25

30

40

75

100

150

150

20

25

30

40

50

60

200

250

2

150

200

250

2

5

10

15

30

40

50

60

75

100

150

Horsepower➀

230V 460V 575V

2

5

5

10

5

15

10

15

20

25

20

30

40

50

25

40

50

60

60

75

100

125

150

250

300

75

100

150

150

200

300

400

40

50

60

75

100

125

150

250

300

350

400

500

5

350

400

500

5

10

20

30

50

60

75

100

150

150

200

300

400

400

400

500

5

400

400

500

5

15

25

40

50

60

75

100

125

150

250

300

350

400

500

100

125

150

250

300

350

400

500

5

10

20

30

40

10

20

30

40

50

60

75

60

75

100

150

150

200

300

400

400

400

500

150

150

200

300

400

400

400

500

5

15

25

40

50

15

25

40

50

60

75

100

Section

Width

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

20"

15"

15"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

15"

30"+20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

20"

20"

20"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

20"

20"

15"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

30"+20"

30"+20"

30"+20"


X-Height

3

3

2

2

3

4

4

4

4

4

4

3

3

5.5

5.5

5.5

7.5+2.5

7.5+3

7.5+3

2

6+3

6+5.5

6+5.5

2

2

2

3

4

4

4

4

6

6

6

2.5

2.5

2.5

3

3

3

4

4

3

4

4

5.5

5.5

4

4

5.5

5.5

5.5

7.5+2.5

7.5+4.5

7.5+4.5

2

2

2

3

3

5.5

7.5+2.5

7.5+4.5

7.5+4.5

G24



ASTAT BP


Feature

ASTAT BP with no

Features

ASTAT BP with ISO

Features

ASTAT BP with ISO

& J or L

Fuse

Features

ASTAT BP with J or L

Fuse Features

Stab

—

Stab

—

Stab

—

Stab

—

SKMCS

SKMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SFMCS

SFMCS

SGMCS

SGMCS

SGMCS

SGMCS

SGMCS

SGMCS

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SGL*/SGP*

SGL*/SGP*

SGL*/SGP*

SGL*/SGP*

SGL*/SGP*

SGL*/SGP*

SKL*/SKP*

SKL*/SKP*

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

SEMCS

Circuit Breaker

Frame

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SFL*/SFP*

SFL*/SFP*

SGL*/SGP*

SGL*/SGP*

SGL*/SGP*

SGL*/SGP*

SGL*/SGP*

SGL*/SGP*

SKL*/SKP*

SKL*/SKP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SEL*/SEP*

SFMCS

SFMCS

SGMCS

SGMCS

SGMCS

SGMCS

SGMCS

SGMCS

SKMCS

SKMCS

0515

0590

0008

0017

0031

0044

0058

0072

0085

0105

0085

0105

0145

0170

0210

0240

0310

0360

0414

0477

0414

0477

0515

0590

0008

0017

0031

0044

0058

0072

0058

0072

0085

0105

0145

0170

0210

0240

0310

0360


Current Rating

0008

0017

0310

0360

0414

0477

0515

0590

0008

0017

0031

0044

0031

0044

0058

0072

0085

0105

0145

0170

0210

0240

0145

0170

0210

0240

0310

0360

0414

0477

0515

0590

200V

65

65

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

65

65

65

65

100

100

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

65

65

IC (kA) @

460V

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

25

40

50

60

500

600

5

15

75

100

75

100

125

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

5

15

25

40

400

450

500

600

50

60

50

60

75

100

125

150

200

250

300

350

125

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

600

575V

5

15

300

350

400

450

500

600

5

15

25

40

75

100

125

150

25

40

50

60

200

250

10

15

20

25

200

-

2

5

30

40

75

100

-

125

30

40

50

60

150

-

2

5

10

15

150

-

200

-

20

25

50

60

75

100

20

25

30

40

-

125

50

60

75

100

-

125

150

-

200

-

Horsepower

230V 460V

2

5

5

10

-

125

150

-

200

-

2

5

10

15

30

40

50

60

10

15

20

25

75

100

250

300

350

400

450

500

5

10

20

30

60

75

100

125

20

30

40

50

150

200

100

125

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

20

30

40

50

450

500

5

10

60

75

60

75

100

125

150

200

250

300

350

400

5

10

20

30

350

400

450

500

40

50

100

125

150

200

40

50

60

75

250

300

24"+20"

24"+20"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

20"

24"

24"

15"

15"

15"

15"

24"

24"

24"

24"

24"+20"

24"+20"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

20"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

24"

15"

15"

20"

20"

20"

24"

24"

24"

24"+20"

24"+20"

Section

Width

15"

15"

24"

24"

15"

15"

20"

24"

24"

24"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

15"

20"

20"

X-Height

5

5

3

3

5

5

5

5

5.5+4.5

5.5+4.5

5.5+4.5

2

2

2

2

2

2

2.5

2.5

5.5+4.5

6

6

6

6

2.5

2.5

3.5

3.5

5.5

5.5

5

5

5.5+2

5.5+2

2

2

2

2

2

2

5

5

3

3

2

2

2.5

2.5

5

5

2

2

6

6

3.5

4

4

4

2

2

1.5

1.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

1.5

1.5

2

2

3.5

3.5

G25

G



G

Solid-State Starters

Standard Reduced-Voltage, Nonreversing with Primary Disconnect

ASTAT-BP Integrated By-Pass Space Requirement


Feature

ASTAT-IBP

ASTAT-IBP with

J Fuses

ASTAT-IBP with

Isolation

& J Fuse

Stab

—

Stab

—

Circuit Breaker

Frame

SELT

SELT

SELT

SELT

SFLT

SGLT

SELT

SELT

SFLT

SGLT

SGLT

SGLT

SGLT

SGLT

SGLT

SGLT

SGLT

SGLT

SGLT

SGLT

SGLT

SGLT

SELT

SELT

SELT

SELT

SELT

SELT

SFLT

SGLT

Power Unit

Size

M

Z

N

K

L

Y

P

Q

R

S

N

P

Q

R

S

Y

M

Z

S

K

L

P

Q

R

M

Z

N

K

L

Y

30

40

50

15

20

25

25

30

40

50

60

75

100

125

60

75

100

125

60

75

100

125

15

20

30

40

50

15

20

25

Horsepower

200V 230V 460V 575V

40

50

➀

60 ➀

75

100

125

150 200

200 ➁ 300

250 ➂ 300

300

➂

40

350

50

50

➀

60

➀

75

60

75

75

100 125

125

150

150

200

200

➁

300

250 ➂ 300

300 ➂ 350

40

50

60

➀

➀

50

60

75

75

100

125

75

125

150

150 200

200 ➁ 300

250

➂

300

➂

300

350

50

60

75

75

125

150

30

50

60

20

25

25

25

30

50

60

75

100

100

150

75

100

100

150

75

100

100

150

20

25

30

50

60

20

25

25

➀ Use M power unit for 450% for 30 sec. Heavy Duty rating.

➁ Use S power unit for 450% for 30 sec. Heavy Duty rating.

➂ Standard Duty only

IC (kA) @

480V

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

65

65

65

65

100

100

65

65

65

42

42

42

Section

Width

20"

20"

20"

20"

24"

24"+ 20"

24"+ 20"

24"+ 20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

24"

24"+ 20"

24"+ 20"

24"+ 20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

24"

24"+ 20"

24"+ 20"

24"+ 20"

20"

20"

X-Height

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

4.5

5

3.5

3.5

4

5

5.5

5 + 2.5

5 + 2.5

5 + 2.5

5 + 2.5

5 + 2.5

5 + 2.5

5 + 2.5

5

4 + 2.5

4 + 2.5

4 + 2.5

3.5

3.5

3

4

5

3

3

3

Run C-2000 Contactor

The ASTAT-BP is supplied with a bypass contactor across the entire product line. Refer to factory if NEMA contactors are required.

G26




Reduced-Voltage, 300/450%

ASTAT SS Starters Standard Duty (300/450% selectable)

Function

SSS

BASIC

SSS with

Isolation

SSS with

Bypass

Isolation

NEMA

Size

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

➀

HP @

200/208

.1-3

5-7.5

10

15

20-25

30

40

50-60

75

100

125-150

.1-3

5-7.5

10

15

20-25

30

40

50-60

75

100

125-150

HP @

230/240

.1-3

5-7.5

10-15

20

25-30

40-50

60-75

100

125

150

200

.1-3

5-7.5

10-15

20

25-30

40-50

60-75

100

125

150

200

200-250

➀

250-300

➀

.1-3

5-7.5

10

15

20-25

30

40

50-60

75

100

125-150

.1-3

5-7.5

10-15

20

25-30

40-50

60-75

100

125

150

200

200-250

➀

250-300

➀

HP @

380/50HZ

.1-7.5

10

15

20-25

30

40-50

60

75

100-125

150

200-250

300

.1-7.5

10

15

20-25

30

40-50

60

75

100-125

150

200-250

300

400-500

.1-7.5

10

15

20-25

30

40-50

60

75

100-125

150

200-250

300

400-500

➀

➀

HP @

460/480

.1-10

15-20

25

30-40

50

75

100

150

200

300

350

400

500

.1-10

15-20

25

30-40

50

75

100

150

200

300

350

400

500

.1-10

15-20

25

30-40

50

75

100

150

200

300

350

400

500

QC2KDP

54.8 A

QC2MDP

91.3 A

QC2QDP

187.0 A

QC2SDP

321.7A

QC2TDP

413.0A

QC2UDP

547.8A

QC2GDP

13.9 A

QC2IDP

27.8 A

QC2KDP

54.8 A

QC2MDP

91.3 A

QC2QDP

187.0 A

QC2SDP

321.7A

QC2TDP

413.0A

SSS Cat# FLA

@1.15 SF

QC2GDP

13.9 A

QC2IDP

27.8 A

QC2KDP

54.8 A

QC2MDP

91.3 A

QC2QDP

187.0 A

QC2SDP

321.7A

QC2TDP

413.0A

QC2UDP

547.8A

QC2GDP

13.9 A

QC2IDP

27.8 A

QC2UDP

547.8A

➀ Application rated C2000 contactors. NEMA size is used as a reference to horsepower only.

➁ 65/85KAIC rating is with fuses.

SELT

SELT

Disconnect IC (kA)

➁

Section 1

Width

Section 2

Width

X-Height

Stab

In

25 20” 2X

SELT

— 20” 2.5X

100

SFLT

SGT

SKT

65

20”

24”

30”

30”

30”

36”

36”

20”

20”

20”

20”

4X

5X

3X 5.5X

3X 5.5X

5.5X

3X 5.5X

5.5X 5.5X

SFLT

SGT

SKT

SFLT

SGT

SKT

Stab

In

—

Stab

In

—

42

65

42

65

20”

20”

24”

30”

30”

36”

20”

20”

24”

30”

30”

36”

20”

20”

20”

20”

2.5X

3X

5X

5X

5X 3.5X

5X 3.5X

2.5X

3.5X

5X

5X

5X 3.5X

5X 3.5X

G

G27




Standard Reduced-Voltage, Nonreversing with Primary Disconnect

Options

1. Solid-State Starter with Isolation Contactor

2. Solid-State Starter with Bypass Contactor

G

3. Solid-State Starter, Isolation & Bypass

G28



Solid State Drives & Starters

Arc Flash Mitigation (AFM)

The E9000 AFM units are designed to reduce the likelihood of exposure to electrical shock and the potential of internal arcing faults from occurring during maintenance. The retractable stab mechanism allows for closed-door racking of the unit, providing added protection to the electrical personnel from the dangers of an arc flash occurrence.

For more information see page D2 and GE Publication DEA-593.

.

AFM Solid State Drives & Starters

Unit Type

ASTAT-BP

(Internal Bypass)

ASTAT-XT

(External Bypass)

VFD-GP

(Constant Torque)

VFD-FP

(Variable Torque)

Rating @ 480V (hp)

5-30

40-50

60-100

5-20

25-50

0.25-5

5-10

10.1-20

20.1-40

0.25-5

5-10

10.1-25

25.1-50

C2000 Standard Unit Height (in)

18

24

30

24

30

36

18

24

30

36

18

24

30

G

G29


Components

Spectra RMS* Mag-Break*

Motor Circuit Protectors

Interchangeable Rating Plug

Spectra RMS Mag-Break motor circuit protectors use the same snap-in rating plugs as fully configured (long-time trip function) Spectra RMS circuit breakers. Each rating plug defines the range of instantaneous-trip settings available to the circuit breaker through its trip setting adjustment.

Spectra RMS Mag-Break Trip Unit Characteristics

Spectra RMS Mag-Break motor circuit protectors provid positive, reliable and cost-effective instantaneous, with tracking short-time overcurrent protection to those circuits where long-time overload protection is supplied by thermal or solid-state overload devices.

Trip Setting Adjustment

The solid-state instantaneous-trip circuitry of the Spectra

RMS Mag-Break motor circuit protectors has a single, multiposition adjustment at the front of each breaker. Changes in settings vary the instantaneous-trip and tracking short-time characteristics. The Mag-Break motor circuit protectors differ from a fully configured circuit breaker by only providing an instantaneous and tracking short-time trip function.

Motor Circuit Short Circuit Protection

When a squirrel-cage induction motor is energized, a high value of magnetizing inrush current flows for the first few cycles, followed by a substantial reduction in current flow while the motor accelerates to its rated speed. When plotted on a time current curve, the motor current has three distinct regions – for the first five to eight cycles, typical magnetizing inrush currents are approximately ten times the full-load motor current (but can be much greater for high efficiency motors). Between 0.10 and 10 seconds, the magnetizing inrush current drops to approximately five to six time the full-load motor current. After approximately 10 seconds, the motor reaches its full speed and the current quickly decreases to the full-load current of the motor.

Accessory Pockets

Spectra RMS Mag-Break motor circuit protectors have the same accessory pockets and use the same internal accessories as Spectra RMS circuit breakers. This important capability allows field modification of Mag-Break units with shunt trip,undervoltage release, bell alarm or auxiliary switch accessories,in any combination, without affecting the

UL Listing status.

Optimum motor protection for the first two regions of the motor time current plot would involve a two-tiered protection scheme with a high value of current tolerated for a few cycles, followed by a lower,sustained trip setting.

Spectra RMS Rating Plugs

Use of the same UL Listed interchangeable rating plugs for both Mag-Break and fully configured Spectra RMS circuit breakers expands the flexibility of the entire Spectra RMS family of products. The advantages of interchangeable rating plugs with Spectra RMS circuit breakers are inherent to

Spectra RMS Mag-Break units, which permit wider ranges of motor ratings to be protected by a given breaker frame size.

This is exactly the protection that is offered by the Mag-Break motor circuit protector. This two tiered protection scheme prevents nuisance tripping due to magnetizing inrush current, without compromising superior short circuit protection during motor acceleration. Protection for the third region of the motor time current plot is accomplished via the motor starter’s overload relay.

H

SE150 Spectra RMS Mag-Break

Motor Circuit Protector

H1

H


Components

The time current curve below illustrates this motor protection scheme. Curve A and the shaded area directly above it represents the region of operation that will produce permanent damage to either the motor, its feeder conductors or both.

Curve B represents the trip characteristics of the motor starter’s overload relay, which provides both long-term overload and stall protection but does not protect the system from short circuits in either the motor or its feeder conductors.

Curve C is a plot of the motor current during a worst-case start (e.g., low line voltage, highest load torque, etc.). Curve D represents the trip characteristics of the Mag-Break motor circuit protector — with this addition, the motor and its feeder conductors are now fully protected against short circuits.

Spectra RMS Mag-Break Motor Circuit Protector Ratings

The table below lists rating plugs available for each Mag-Break motor circuit protector frame size. Instantaneous trip settings are listed under electrical data on page 21 and UL interrupting ratings are shown on page 28 (per UL 489, motor circuit protectors are not marked with interrupt ratings). Except for

3 amp and 7 amp plugs, all other rating plugs are used in both circuit breaker and Mag-Break motor circuit protectors .

Motor Circuit Protection Using Mag-Break

Motor Circuit Protectors

Spectra RMS Mag-Break Motor Circuit Protector and

Rating Plug Current Ratings

Frame

SE-Frame

SF-Frame

SG-Frame

SK-Frame

Maximum Amperes

7①

30

60

100

150

250

400

600

800

1,200

Available Rating Plugs, Amperes

3 & 7

15, 20, 25 & 30

40, 50 & 60

70, 80, 90 & 100

110, 125 & 150

70, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 & 250

125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350 & 400

250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 & 600

300, 400, 500, 600, 700 & 800

600, 700, 800, 900, 1000 & 1200

① The 7-amp frame and the 3A and 7A rating plugs are used only with the

Spectra RMS Mag-Break motor circuit protector.

H2


Components

Spectra RMS Molded Case Switches

Construction. The family traditions of ruggedness and dependability are continued in the Spectra RMS molded case switch line. These units provide a circuit disconnect function using the compactness of molded case circuit breaker construction. The operating handle actuates all three poles of the switch using the same common trip bar of Spectra

RMS circuit breakers and Mag-Break units.

Termination Lugs. Snap-in termination lugs used with SEand SF-Frame Spectra RMS circuit breakers are used interchangeably in Spectra RMS molded case switches.

SG- and SK-Frame molded case switches use the same bolt-on termination lugs used with Spectra RMS circuit breakers.

External Accessories. The full range of external circuit breaker accessories offered for use with Spectra RMS circuit breakers and Mag-Break motor circuit protectors, are available for molded case switches. In addition, plug-in bases, motoroperated mechanisms, mechanical interlocks, and the full complement of external handle operators (STDA, TDR and TDM) are available for use with Spectra RMS molded case switches.

Fixed-Trip Setting. The Spectra RMS molded case switches are equipped with a fixed Hi-set instantaneous trip setting whose values are shown in the table below.

Spectra RMS Molded Case Switch

Spectra RMS Molded Case Switch Applications

Molded case switches are inherently horsepower-rated. By virtue of the UL489 six-times rated-current overload test, they can be used as motor circuit disconnects where overload and short-circuit protection are provided by other protective devices.

Spectra RMS molded case switches are most commonly used as a disconnect in main, feeder, or starter applications in combination with fuses.

All Spectra RMS molded case switches are UL Listed and tested per UL Standard 1087 for molded case switches.

Spectra RMS Molded-Case Switch Fixed-Trip Setting

Molded Case

Switch Frame

SE-Frame

SF-Frame

SG-Frame

SK-Frame

Maximum Ampere

Rating

100

150

250

400

600

800

1200

Fixed-Trip Setting RMS Amperes

Nominal ±20%

2100

2450

5600

6000

12,600

12,700

H

H3

H


Components

Heavy Duty Fusible Disconnects

QMW Fusible Switch

Spectra Molded Case Switch (MCS) 400 & 600 Amp

A growing number of industrial applications with high available short-circuit current has made switch fuse coordination increasingly important. In addition, there has been a growing number of requirements for 400 amp and above applications, including Ground Fault, Annunciation and Remote Tripping.

The Evolution E9000 MCC supports these requirements by incorporating Spectra Molded Case Switches with separate fuse blocks for all 400A and 600A applications. The same accessories used in the Spectra Circuit Breaker can be used in the MCS. In addition to ease of accessorizing, the MCS saves space.

Withstand capability – Safety and reliability depend on the interrupting capacity of both the switch and the switch-fuse combination. While switch-fuse interrupting ability is limited by the maximum current the fuse will interrupt, it is also determined by the maximum let-through energy the switch will withstand as the fuse clears a short circuit.

QMW Fusible Switch (30-200 Amps)

The QMW Fusible Switch is a premium heavy-duty disconnect switch. It was developed to meet the most rigorous industrial requirements. It meets or exceeds all industry standards for withstand capability and interrupting ratings, and it is UL listed for use in Evolution MCC.

The switch must remain operable after the fuse has cleared.

Switch withstand capability rating is determined by the maximum energy the switch can withstand (and remain operable), stated as ampere-squared seconds, l

2 t.

Interrupting Capacity – In addition, the switch may have to interrupt a wide range of currents without assistance from the fuse, including normal switching-duty currents (up to fullload rating), overload and motor “jogging” currents (up to 10 times motor full load) or intermediate fault currents (usually arcing faults–from overload to near full-system available).

Previously, basic switch design criteria has been primarily concerned with interrupting normal switching and motor starting currents. New applications require a switch capable of interrupting intermediate fault currents without assistance from a fuse. For maximum protection, a switch should be able to interrupt any current on which it can be closed and reopened before the fuse blows. This is commonly called

“fuse racing.”

H4


Components

New Generation High Pressure Contact

(HPC) Switches

The new generation HPC switch is based on the time-proven platform of the Power Break* II circuit breaker. Now, it’s

ArcWatch-enabled to provide a better Arc Flash hazard mitigation solution. The new generation HPC builds on the abilities of the original HPC by utilizing the features of the

Power Break II (PBII) circuit breaker. In addition, the new generation GE HPC utilizes the EntelliGuard* control unit which incorporates many of the features of the EntelliGuard Trip

Unit for GE circuit breakers. The new generation GE HPC switch is available in frame ratings of 800, 1200, 1600, 2000,

2500, 3000 and 4000A, both top and bottom feed, with IC ratings to 200kA with the appropriate UL Class L fuses. The new generation HPC switch is available for new installations and for retrofit, to replace the older GE HPC. By retrofitting with the new generation HPC switch, remote operation of the switch through the motor operators, shunt trips with lockouts, RELT and the Adjustable IOC for continuous reduced incident energy can be added in the same footprint as that of the older existing switch.

Features and Benefits

• Top or Bottom Feed

— 800-4000 Amperes 600 Volts ac Max

• High Durability–Safety of Operation

— High-dielectric strength, glass reinforced insulating case

• High Interrupting Capability

— Arc chute of unique construction suppresses arcs and cools gases rapidly, providing quick arc interruption and extended switch life

• High Transient Voltage Withstand Capability

— Interphase partitions mesh with switch cover to completely isolate each pole

• Extended Switch Life

— Preloaded constant pressure pivot eliminates braid whip and fraying on high short-circuit currents and repeated operations

• Positive “ON-OFF” Indication

— Green (OFF), Red (ON), eliminates any question about the position of the switch contacts

• Easy Operation Quick Make

• Emergency Open–Quick Break

— Finger-tip “OFF” button instantly opens the switch contacts

• Fuse Mounting Bolts with Captive Washers for Ease of

Mounting Fuses

• Padlocking Provisions Standard

In addition, the new generation GE HPC utilizes the EntelliGuard* control unit which incorporates many of the features of the

EntelliGuard Trip Unit for GE circuit breakers:

• Built-in metering, waveform capture and Modbus communications

• Ground fault protection or alarm, optional GF disable

• GE’s patented WFR Adjustable Selective Instantaneous protection

• RELT Alternate Adjustable fast instantaneous setting, remote operable and with positive status feedback

• Zone-Selective operation for GF that works with all circuit breaker trip platforms and includes four different

GF curve shapes

• Instantaneous Zone-Selective operation that works with upstream EntelliGuard Trip Units and EntelliGuard control units

RELT Control Schematic

H

H5


Components

H

Power Break II Insulated Case Circuit

Breakers

General Description

The GE line of Power Break II insulated case circuit breakers offers the rugged, reliable type of system protection critical for heavy-duty applications. In

Evolution Series E9000 MCC, Power

Break II circuit breakers are rated up to 100,000 amperes RMS symmetrical interrupting capacity without fuses or current limiters. In Evolution E9000

MCC, the Power Break II design consists of 800, 1600, 2000, and 2500 Amp frame sizes.

Power Break II is a versatile breaker, designed for a wide variety of applications with features such as temperature insensitive trip units, push-to-open and -close buttons, standard padlocking provision, maximum three-cycle closing time, field installable rating plugs to change ampere ratings, UL listing, plug in field installable accessories, and easy-to-operate two stage pumphandle, stored-energy operating mechanism capable of change after close.

EntelliGuard* TU Trip Unit

GE’s EntelliGuard TU is the trip unit with the built-in flexibility required to match your system’s needs, whether for optimum safety, optimum system reliability or both at the same time. The EntelliGuard TU trip unit provides the industry’s most advanced instantaneous protection without compromising system selectivity.

Standard Features for Exceptional Flexibility

• Highly flexible time current settings

— up to 22 Long Time Delays

— up to 22 (fuse shaped) Long Time

— up to 14 Short Time Delay bands

— 3 Short Time slopes (I

2

T)… novel GE feature

• Selective Instantaneous algorithm (WFR)…novel GE feature

• Ammeter

• Large backlit LCD screen

①

• Breaker status indication

• Universal rating plugs – less plug inventory

• Status and event log (10 Events)

• Date and time event stamping

①

• LED health status indicator

①

• Free set-up software

• Discrete I/O

①

• Thermal memory, battery back-up

• Common interface across all versions

• Mechanism self-timing… novel GE feature

Optional Full-function Metering

• Current (Amps, kAmps)

• Voltage (Ph-Ph, Ph-N)

• Energy (kWh, MWh, GWh)

• Real power (kW, MW)

• Total power (kVA, MVA)

• Frequency (Hz)

• Demand (avg. kW, MW) and peak demand

Options

• Internal/external ground fault trip or alarm with 4 curves to select from (I

2

T, I

4

T, special selective GF curve, and definite time slope)

①

• Switchable ground fault trip / alarm (now password protected and UL Listed)

• Modbus RTU communications

①

(Profibus also available for

EntelliGuard G)

• Waveform capture for harmonic analysis

• Full-function metering

①

• Protective relaying

①

(see list of functions below)

• Zone-Selective-Interlocking for GF, ST, Instantaneous

(I-ZSI)

①

…novel GE feature

• Threshold Zone-Selective-Interlocking for ST and Instantaneous (T-ZSI)

①

…novel GE feature

• Built-in Zone-Selective-Interlocking test capability…novel

GE feature

• RELT – Reduce Energy Let Through

①

• RELT and ground fault alarm harness kits

• Test Set GTUTK20

• Digital Test Kit Software, available December 2013

Optional Protective Relaying Functions

• Undervoltage

• Overvoltage

• Voltage unbalance

• Current unbalance

• Power reversal

• Power direction setup

① Some options require 24VDC additional hardware to enable Metering, Relaying, RELT,

ZSI, Modbus to be added to the breaker, equipment cubicle and equipment sections.

H6


Components

Spectra RMS Circuit Breakers

Features

Spectra RMS

SE150, SF250, SG600 and SK1200 circuit breaker frames have a digital, solid state, RMS sensing trip system with field installable, front-mounted rating plugs to establish or change the breaker ampere rating. Adjustable instantaneous with tracking short-time is standard on all frames. The trip unit uses digital sampling to determine the RMS value of sinusoidal and non-sinusoidal currents. See more at: http://www.geindustrial.com/products/circuit-breakers/ spectra-rms-electronic-trip#sthash.fmoX8l9f.dpuf.

A complete circuit breaker consists of a UL Listed circuit breaker frame and a rating plug (UL Listed interchangeable trip breaker unit). Terminal lugs for cable connection are available if required.

• All frames use the same UL listed, field installable internal accessories (auxiliary switch, shunt trip, undervoltage release and bell alarm).

• All frame sizes have maximum UL listed interrupting ratings of 200 kA @ 240 volts AC and 100 kA @ 480 volts AC with

600 volts AC ratings to 65 kA depending on frame size.

UL listed current limiting versions are provided through the SG600 frame for the 65 kA @480 volts AC and the

100 kA @ 480 volts AC models, with no increase in physical frame size.

• Spectra RMS Mag-Break instantaneous-only motor circuit protectors also use the same digital, solid state trip unit and rating plugs as the circuit breakers. The interchangeable rating plug establishes the instantaneous pickup range (with tracking short-time) but does not change the frame ampere rating.

• Spectra RMS molded case switches have a fixed, high-set instantaneous trip (without tracking short-time function) and have short circuit withstand ratings equal to their equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating in most cases.

• RMS breakers are ambient insensitive. Trip times will not vary over the range 10-50° breaker ambient .

• Spectra RMS breakers contain no parts that would support fungus growth and are, therefore, inherently fungusproof.

Other MCCB Features

• Broad product line to meet virtually any application need.

• Reduced downtime. A tripped breaker is easily spotted and can be immediately reset after the fault has been corrected.

• Eliminates single phasing. A common trip bar disconnects all poles simultaneously on both overloads and short circuits.

• Offers application flexibility through the use of a wide variety of accessory devices and special attachments.

• Repetitive operation — no fuses to replace.

• Breakers can be repetitively tested. Fuses must be destroyed to confirm calibration accuracy.

Reference – GET-7002 for further application information.

The add-on limiter coordinates with the Spectra thermal magnetic trip to allow normal tripping functions at standard ratings with backup limiting at high short-circuit levels for

150A frame Spectra circuit breakers

H

H7

H


Components

Spectra RMS Circuit Breakers

Features

microEntelliGuard* Trip Unit

The microEntelliGuard trip unit is the newest and most advanced trip unit available in the Spectra* line of molded case circuit breakers. Based on the EntelliGuard TU trip platform, the new microEntelliGuard trip unit allows you to select the enhanced system protection, coordination, metering and communications options required for the application. New features include enhanced time-current adjustability, Ground Fault Alarm, Neutral Protection,

Zone Selective Interlock (ST/GF/INST), and direct Modbus communications. Other features that enhance system protection and diagnostics include long-time thermal memory, waveform capture, programmable output contacts, and an LED “Health” status indicator.

Standard Features

• Adjustable Long-Time pickup and delay bands with three curve shapes (MVT I

2 t, CB and Fuse I

4 t) for optimal system coordination (includes thermal memory for enhanced system protection)

• Adjustable Short-Time pickup with multiple delay bands, curve slopes, I

2 t IN/OUT, and OFF setting

• Adjustable Instantaneous pickup

• 3-Phase ammeter

• Backlit LCD display with five-button tactile keypad and sealable, clear LEXAN cover for tamper resistant settings

• LED Status Indicator to show “health” of trip unit

• Trip Target indication and local pickup warning signal

• Interchangeable/universal rating plugs

• Test set jack for GTUTK20 test kit

• True RMS sensing for accurate response to high harmonic content waveforms

• EMI immunity per ANSI C37.90

Optional Features

• Ground Fault (Trip or Alarm) pickup and delay bands with multiple slopes, I

2 t IN/OUT for optimal system coordination

• Neutral Protection provides overload protection on the system neutral

• Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI) capability on Short Time,

Ground Fault and Instantaneous settings for optimal system coordination and selectivity

• Reduced Energy Let-Through (RELT) setting for enhanced equipment and personnel protection

• Advanced metering option includes the ability to monitor current, voltage, energy, frequency, power factor, power

(real/reactive/apparent) and peak power demand

• Modbus communications system with user selectable address assignment for communicationdirectly with

EnerVista Viewpoint power system monitoring software

• Waveform capture for enhanced system diagnostics

• Protective Relays for enhanced system protection

–Voltage Unbalance

–Current Unbalance

–Under Voltage

–Over Voltage

–Power Reversal

–Load Alarm

• Input relay for RELT signal or remote tripping of the breaker

• Two programmable output relays for enhanced signaling and diagnostics

• Control Power option provides connection capability for

+24Vdc control power via the distributioncable system

Other Features

• UL Listed for reverse feed and HACR type (standard)

• UL Listed 100% continuous current rating (optional)

• UL Listed Current Limiting (optional on SG Frame)

• Internal Accessories (Shunt Trip, Undervoltage Release,

Auxiliary Contacts, Bell Alarm) – UL Listed for field installation and common across the entire line of

Spectra RMS breakers

H8


Components

Ground Fault Current Detection Systems

Model BGFL (Relay)

Trip Currents 5-60, 30-360, or 100-1200A

Description

These Class 1 Model BGFL ground fault relays and sensors form a system for detecting a ground fault current on a ground ac power system. When a ground fault exceeds a pre-selected current level and time delay setting, the relay initiates a trip signal for a shunt trip disconnect device to open and clear the fault. This BGFL system provides protection for electrical equipment, not for personnel.

Operating range: Trip currents of 5-60, 30-360, or 100-1200A. Time delay from

0.10 to 1 second (adjustable).

Input power: 2 VA plus shunt coil requirements. Rated @ 120 Vac.

Input withstand: 200,000 Amperes RMS for 3 cycles, 50/60 Hz.

Nominal input voltage: 120 Volts ac, 125 Volts dc, 24

Volts dc, 48 Volts dc.

Frequency: 50/60 Hz.

Ambient temperature range: -30°C to +60°C

Only for use with GFL sensors.

Approximate weight 1.5 lbs.

• Meets NEC service entrance equipment standards.

• Available in three basic styles: Standard, Form C or Zone

Interlocking for coordination of single or multiple ground fault devices in system.

• Integral test panel with Push To Test and Shunt Trip Bypass pushing for ease in proper operational testing of the system, with or without tripping the protective device.

• Power On LED indicator in cover.

• Positive visual trip indicator, manual reset.

• Infinitely adjustable Time Delay.

• Discrete current threshold adjustment.

• Panel or door mounting.

• Rear terminal kit and clear plastic cover standard with door mounting.

• Electromechanical relay output, positive ON and OFF.

• Operates with molded case and power circuit breakers, bolted pressure switches, fusible disconnect switches.

Contact Rating

Device Input Power Inrush Cont.

120 Volts ac 10A 3A

125 Volts dc

48 Volts dc

24 Volts dc

1A

4A

8A

1A

4A

8A

Note: Mounting provision on reteangular GFL sensors with 11.1" and 13.2" widths.

H

H9


Components

Ground Fault Current Detection Systems

Model GFM Relay

2.0 to 65 Amp Trip Currents

H

Description

These Class 1 Model GFM Ground Fault protection systems are designed to minimize damage or loss to equipment caused by destructive arcing ground faults. This GFM system is designed for all polyphase applications and is ideally suited for motor control, motor control centers, and medium voltage starters. Systems can be wye or delta, grounded or resistance grounded. When the ground fault current exceeds a preselected condition (current and time settings) the relay trips. The relay contacts can be connected in the control circuit of a motor starter, to the shunt trip of a circuit breaker or similar disconnecting or alarm devices. The system has an inverse time characteristic to prevent nuisance tripping. The relay tripping current value is field adjustable over the trip current range of the sensor. The adjustable trip time delay relay is field settable up to 36 cycles.

Operating range: Trip currents from 2.0-65A.

Time delay from instantaneous to 36 cycles.

Input power: Self-powered

Frequency: 50/60 Hz.

Ambient temperature range: -30°C to +60°C

Only for use with GFL sensors.

Operation

• Positive condition indication

• Normal (Reset) - Green (“ON”)

• Tripped - Red (“OFF”)

• Manual Reset

1.77"

3.53"

2.75"

3.00"

(4) 0.31X0.21

OPEN SLOTS

1.09" 2.15"

0.44"

3.65"

1.56" DIA

1.83

Model

Number

GFM 156

1.77"

Trip

➀

Current

3.8 to 18

4.6"

3.5"

LABEL

10.75"

GFX2 GFX1

2.0"

H1

3.75"

Model

Number

GFM 3P208

Trip

➀

Current

5 to 20

Model GFM-252 and 262

Contacts rated 10 Amps continuous, 23 Amps inrush, 120 Volts AC

0.46"

2.00"

.86"

1.17"

0.50"

3.30"

2.50"

1.15"

1.18"

0.46"

3

8

10

1 12

2.25" 0.35"

#6-32X.35LG.

TERMINAL SCREWS

To current Sensor X1 and X2 all contacts shown with the relay in the tripped position

3

1

8

10

12

Typical Circuit

L1 L2 L3

1

STAB

(3)

L3

(2)

L2

(1)

L1

(2)

1FU

(1)

(5) (6)

(5)

M

(6)

K3

(3)

CB

OR

(4)

(1)

LSW

(2)

K2

(3)

(4)

X1

(1) (2)

K1

(1)

(2)

(H1)

(3)

2FU

(4)

(H2)

T

(X1) (X2)

(5)

K6

(3)

K5

(1)

K4

Gnd

X2

OL

(6)

(4)

(2)

(H1)

8CT.

T3

T2

(FX1)

G1

(1)

(FX2)

G2

T1

GFR

(3)

GFR

(10) (9)

(13)

SW PB

Hand Auto

OFF

(14)

1A

3

M

(A) (B)

48

OL

(7) (8)

49

MOTOR

(15) x=Closed(MC)

(16)

5

2

R

(1) (2)

PB

① Trip current tolerance is ± 15 percent.

H10


Components

C2000 Line Motor Starters

GE’s C2000 Line motor starters offer greater design versatility.

C2000 Line components are loaded with features that make them easier to install, allow more flexible configurations, and allow for a smaller unit footprint. These components conform to international standards (UL, cUL and IEC-947) and have dual (U.S./European) markings to ensure global acceptance. A single nomenclature system allows simple sourcing worldwide. AC coils (both 50 Hertz and 60 Hertz versions) are available for a wide range of voltages for flexibility.

Design Versatility

• 3-pole AC contactors (non-reversing and reversing, ranging from 5-500 hp @ 460 volts)

• RT overload relays (Class 10 versions for contactors 5-125 hp range, and Class 10 and Class 30 versions for contactors in the 150-500 hp range)

• Contactor accessories — front– and side-mount auxiliary contact blocks, mechanical interlocks, pneumatic times, and surge suppressors

• Wye-delta starters

• Control relays available in various contact arrangements

• Up to six front-mount auxiliary contact blocks and one side-mount auxiliary contact block can be added to contactors in the 30-75 hp range.

Easier Installation

• 5-75 hp contactors can be either DIN-rail or screw mounted

• Mechanical interlocks allow quick, easy configuration of reversing contactors

• Coil information is printed on top of each contactor for easy reference

• On 5-25 hp contactors, pozi-drive screws accept any screwdriver

• Easy attachment of accessories

Flexible, Compact Configurations

• In the 5-75 hp range, each contactor accepts both front– and side-mount auxiliary contact blocks

• Pneumatic timers can be used in conjunction with side-mount auxiliary contact blocks

• Double-clamp terminal accepts two differently sized wires; both control and power wires can be inserted

• Surge suppression is built into the electronic control module inside 100-500 hp contactors

• RT overload relays mount directly on 5-125 hp contactors to reduce space requirements

Safety Protection

• Contactors in the 5-75 hp range have built-in finger and back-of-hand protection

Dimensions (in/mm)

Contactor

CL08

CL09

CL10

CK75

CK08

CK09

CL00

CL01

CL02

CL25

CL04

CL45

CL06

CL07

CK95

CK10

CK11

CK12

Width①

1.77/45

1.77/45

1.77/45

1.77/45

2.17/55

2.17/55

2.60/66

2.60/66

2.60/66

2.95/75

2.95/75

4.86/123

4.86/123

5.90/150

5.90/150

6.29/160

6.29/160

9.06/230

Height

3.19/81

3.19/81

3.19/81

3.19/81

3.43/87

3.43/87

4.63/117.5

4.63/117.5

4.63/117.5

4.63/117.5

4.63/117.5

7.01/178

7.01/178

8.34/212

8.34/212

9.00/229

9.00/229

9.84/250

Depth①

3.35/85

3.35/85

3.35/85

3.43/87

3.86/98

3.86/98

4.57/116

4.57/116

4.57/116

4.96/126

4.96/126

6.50/165

6.50/165

8.18/208

8.18/208

9.05/230

9.05/230

10.31/262

① Does not include front- or side-mount auxiliary contacts required on CL25, CL45 and CL06-CL10.

Contactor with

Overload

CL00+RT1

CL01+RT1

CL02+RT1

CL25+RT1

CL04+RT1

CL45+RT1

CL06+RT2

CL07+RT2

CL08+RT2

CL09+RT2

CL10+RT2

CK75+RT3

CK08+RT3

CK09+RT4

CK95+RT4

CK10+RT5

CK11+RT5

CK12+RT5

Width

1.77/45

1.77/45

1.77/45

1.77/45

2.17/55

2.17/55

2.60/66

2.60/66

2.60/66

2.95/75

2.95/75

4.86/123

4.86/123

5.90/150

5.90/150

6.29/160

6.29/160

9.06/230

Height

5.03/128

5.03/128

5.03/128

5.03/128

5.27/133.7

5.27/133.7

7.25/184

7.25/184

7.25/184

7.43/189

7.43/189

10.39/264

10.39/264

16.53/420

16.53/420

14.45/367

14.45/367

16.18/410.9

Depth

4.20/106.7

4.20/106.7

4.20/106.7

4.20/106.7

4.06/103

4.06/103

4.57/116

4.57/116

4.57/116

4.96/126

4.96/126

6.50/165

6.50/165

9.12/231.6

9.12/231.6

11.36/289

11.36/289

11.81/300

H

H11


Components

300-Line Motor Starters

The 300-Line starter is a full-voltage, magnetic motor starter with encapsulated coil and three-leg block overload relay with visual trip indicator, manual reset and manual weld check. It incorporates all the features and benefits most asked for by users and has received standard specification approval by many major manufacturers. In addition to the basic non-reversing form, the 300-Line is available in reversing, two-speed and combination forms in NEMA Sizes 00-5.

The 300-Line’s toolless contactor disassembly allows quick access for inspection and maintenance. Simply release two coil retainers and pull the spring clip from the “I” magnet to gain access to the magnet, coil and contacts. No need to remove any wiring.

Improved

Auxiliary

Contacts

Rated for Heavy

Pilot-Duty

Manual Weld

Check

Overload Trip Adjustment

±10%

Visual Trip

Indication

Optional N.O. Isolated

High Fidelity Contacts

Staggered Saddle

Clamp Terminals with Permanent

Terminal

Identification

Quick

Contact

Inspection and Coil

Change

GE Exclusive

Dual

Bimetal

Overload

Protection

Optional terminals can be provided to permit the easy connection of power factor correction capacitors for energy conservation.

H

The molded coil is impervious to moisture, dirt and oil. It is highly resistant to mechanical damage and high-humidity failure. Retaining clips engage detents encapsulated in the coil to hold it securely in place.

H12


Components

300-Line Motor Starters

(Cover removed)

Where it’s essential to monitor performance or diagnose faults, a

300-Line starter may be ordered with an additional isolated, highfidelity, normally-open contact on the overload relay. This contact may be used for direct input to a programmable controller or direct interface with a computer.

Overriding is eliminated because overload reset occurs only when the reset arm is released on the standard manual-reset form.

A bright yellow visual trip indicator tells operators at a glance if the overload has tripped. An optional automatic-reset overload relay is available for special applications upon request.

All line and load terminals on NEMA Size 00, 0 and 1 starters have saddle clamps to accommodate all types of terminations– ring, spade and stripped-wire. Terminal numbering is permanently stamped, and terminals are staggered to help prevent shorting. NEMA Size 2, 3 and

4 starters are also available with provision for ring terminations with staggered terminals. Size 5 starters are available with provision for ring terminations. In-line terminals for spade and stripped-wire connections are standard.

On NEMA Size 1 starters and larger, contact tips are weld-resistant with cool operation and extended life. The contacts have a wedgeshaped configuration for positive make with minimum bounce.

They can be easily changed from normally open to normally closed without additional parts on Sizes 0 and 1.

Magnet provides long life and is specially treated to resist rust.

Overload relay heaters are completely interchangeable with heaters for 200- and 100-Line starters, eliminating the need to stock different heaters.

Relay trip points are factory calibrated at given currents for high accuracy. For added flexibility, the trip current of the relay is protection to any given motor and to eliminate nuisance tripping. A single calibration adjusts all three legs. The overload relay is available in standard or ambient-compensated forms.

Each auxiliary contact is rated 10 amperes

AC, continuous current (NEMA A600), and is suitable for either right or left side mounting.

All necessary parts are supplied in the modification kit for easy installation. An insulating shield is also provided for use between each auxiliary contact unit and the starter.

Auxiliary contact kits offered include one with a basic contact block and one with an adder block. The basic block is supplied with either a single circuit (one normally open contact or one normally closed contact) or a double circuit (one normally open and one normally closed contact). The adder block must be used in conjunction with a basic block. It may be ordered with either one normally open or one normally closed contact.

The overload relay can be manually tripped deliberately as a convenient way to check against contact welding. Depressing the manual weld check arm trips the relay. Then a welded contact can be detected with a simple continuity check.

H13

H


Components

H

Overload Relays

Description

Type

Protection Class

Ambient

Compensation

Phase loss protection

Phase unbalance

Series RT Thermal

Overload Relay

RT overload relays provide motor overload protection through fixed bimetal heaters. These relays are ambient compensated and utilize a differential mechanism for single-phase sensitivity. Overload relays may be set for 4 different operational modes — manual reset only, automatic reset only, manual reset/stop, or automatic reset/stop.

Stop is initiated by pushing the reset button which interrupts the holding circuit in the latter two listed modes.

Overload relays feature visible trip indication, reset on the upstroke, weld check, and trip test.

CR324 Thermal Bimetallic

Overload Relay

The CR324 thermal bimetallic overload relays use interchangeable match overload relays to motor amps. A ±10 trip adjustment dial is used to fine tune the motor overload relays.

Overload relay features include trip test, manual reset on upstroke, weld check visible trip indicator and an optional normally open signal contact.

Thermal Thermal bimetallic

20

CR324X Electronic

Overload Relay

The CR324X is an electronic alternative to the CR324 bimetallic overload relay. The

CR324X eliminates the need for heater elements, providing a broader amperage adjustment range.

Provisions for increased diagnostic capabilities permit automation control via auxiliary contacts and remote reset open collector.

Mounting dimensions are identical to the

CR324 thermal overload relay and permit fast, simple field upgrades.

Electronic

Basic Communication

Overload Relay

The Basic

Communication overload relay is a solid-state overload relay with selectable trip class and wide current adjustment range settings. This robust relay allows for either ground fault or communication modules to be side mounted to the relay.

Electronic

MM200

Motor Controller

The MM200 integrates protection, control and multiple communication protocols in a rugged compact device for low voltage motor applications. Easily integrated into new and existing control system architectures, the

MM200 provides comprehensive low voltage motor protection and communications for all types of motor protection applications.

Electronic

MM300

Motor Controller

The MM300 integrates protection, control, automation, metering, diagnostics and multiple communication protocols in a rugged compact device for low voltage motor applications. Designed for motor control centers, the MM300 delivers superior protection and control to extend equipment life and maximize process uptime.

Electronic

10, 20, 30 (selectable) 10, 15, 20, 30 (selectable) 10, 15, 20, 30 (selectable) 10, 15, 20, 30 (selectable) 10, 10A, 20, 30

Ambient temperature compensating

Optional Ambient insensitive Ambient compensated Yes* Yes*

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Ground Fault

Self Powered

No

Yes

±5%

±3%

No

Yes

±5%

±3%

No

Yes

±2%

±2%

0.4-540 A (Depending on relay chosen)

Manual

Yes*

Yes

2.5-5%

1%

0.4-540 A (Depending on relay chosen)

Manual & Automatic

Yes

No (power from starter CPT)

2%

Yes

No (power from starter CPT)

2% Accuracy

Repeatability

FLA Adj. Range

Reset Mode

Trip Test

Trip Indication

Operating Temp.

Range

0.16-850A

Manual & Automatic

Yes

Yes

–25° to 60°C

(compensated)

Up to 135A

Manual (auto optional)

Yes

Yes

0° to 55°C

Yes

Yes

–20° to 70°C

Yes

Yes

–20° to 60°C

—

5 to 1000 FLA in steps of 1A**

Manual & Automatic

Manual & Automatic

—

5 to 1000 FLA in steps of 1A**

Manual & Automatic

Manual & Automatic

LED/User Interface/SCADA LED/User Interface/SCADA

-20°C to 60°C -20°C to 60°C **

Communications No No No

Profibus*

DeviceNet*

Ethernet IP*

Modbus RTU

Modbus RTU

Modbus RTU + Profibus DP

Modbus RTU + Profibus

+ DeviceNet

Yes

Modbus RTU + Modbus TCP

+ Profibus DP

Modbus RTU + Modbus TCP

+ DeviceNet

Yes Addressable No No No Yes

Heater Required

PFC Terminals

Yes

No

Yes

Yes (optional through

NEMA Size 2)

No

Yes (optional through

NEMA Size 2)

No

No

No

No

No

No

PLC Compatible

Contacts

No No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Aux. Contacts NO & NC NC (NO optional) NO & NC NO & NC 2 NO, 1 C form

2 NO standard, add on available

Mount

Reference

Publication

Notes

Designed to mount directly to C2000 contactor or panel mount

—

—

Designed to mount directly to CR305 contactor or panel mount

Designed to mount directly to CR305 contactor or panel mount

GE Control Catalog

This table reflects GE’s standard offering of overload relays; however, other overload relays can be included if needed. If you have other overload relays you wish to add to your MCC, please contact the factory for assistance.

Section 1

—

DEP-015

—

Din-Rail Panel Mount Din-Rail Panel Mount Din-Rail Panel Mount

—

* Ground fault and communication modules cannot be used at the same time

090824 - V17,

GEK-113400E,

1601-9034-A6

*When ordered with

RTD Module

**1-10 turns are available to accommodate CT turns lower than 5A

131111 - V21,

GEK-113022J,

1601-9023-AA

*When ordered with

RTD Module

** based on 1" around base unit

***1-10 turns are available to accommodate CT turns lower than 5A

ASTATs and AF-6 VFDs utilize integral overload protection algorithms. External overload relays are only used with ASTATs and AF-6 VFDs to support the motor control in a bypass configuration.

H14


Components

Industrial Relays

C2000* Control Relays

Accessories for C2000 Contactor and

Control Relay

Front-Mount Auxiliary Contact Blocks

The C2000 Control Relay is a compact, industrial style relay designed for heavy-duty applications where reliability and versatility are required.

Basic forms: 4 NO; 3NO-1NC; 2NO-2NC; 4 NC

Max front mounted aux. contacts: 4 (NO or NC)

Contact Rating: A600; P600

Aux. Contact Rating: A600; Q600; P300

Timer Contact Rating: A600; P600

1NO or 1NC

Front-mount auxiliary contact blocks clip into front face of control relay.

Pneumatic Timers

Coil Data

Burden

Inrush

Holding

Pickup Voltage (% of Coil Volts)

Drop-Out Voltage (% of Coil Volts)

Switching Delay (ms)

Switching Delay on

Coil Voltage at +10% to -20%

Coil Voltage at Rated Value

Switching Delay off

Coil Voltage at +10% to -20%

Coil Voltage at Rated Value

Maximum Operations per Hour

No Load

Rated load

AC Voltage DC Voltage

45 VA

6 VA

85-110

40-55

6-25

8-20

6-13

6-13

9000

1200

5.5 W

5.5 W

80-110

20-40

35-65

40-45

30-60

30-60

3600

1200

Coil Rating

AC Coil Rating

24V/60 Hz 24V/50 Hz

48V/60 Hz

120V/60 Hz

208V/60 Hz

240V/60 Hz

240V/60 Hz

42V/50 Hz

110V/50 Hz

190V/50 Hz

220V/50 Hz

220V/50 Hz

240V/50 Hz

277V/60 Hz

—

—

480V/60 Hz

600V/60 Hz

380V/50 Hz

415V/50 Hz

440V/50 Hz

550V/50 Hz

DC Coil Rating

24VDC

48VDC

125VDC

250VDC

Contact Ratings

A600

Continuous Thermal Current

Max. VA/Amps Making

10A

7200VA/60A

Max. VA/Amps Breaking

Max. Operating Voltage

720VA/6A

600VAC

P600

5A

138VA

138VA

600VDC

Q600

2.5A

69VA

69VA

600VDC

P300

5A

138VA

138VA

300VDC

Pneumatic timers are adjustable time-delayed auxiliary contacts. They come equipped with two time-delayed contacts:

1NO or 1 NC, electrically separated. Setting is scaled over a

350° rotation by means of a knurled knob with timing guide marks. To mount a pneumatic timer, simply clip it on front face of control relay.

Type

Time

Delay On

Time

Delay Off

Range

.1-30 sec

1-60 sec.

.1-30 sec.

1-60 sec

Contacts

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

Surge Suppressor

For suppression of disturbances on electronic circuits due to the coil transient voltage occurring on opening of the contactor.

Limits high voltage transients that may be produced when coil is de-energized. Mounts directly on top of the coil.

Control Relay - Front View AC Control Relay - Side View

1.77

45

5.55

141

4.49

1114

3.35

85

E

3.19

81

C B

.195

5

1.38

35

.18

4.5

TYP.

H15

H


Components

H

CR104P Pilot Devices

Description

Newly-designed nameplates with chrome-plated octagonal rings project an attractive, quality appearance. Positive feel selector switches give a quality touch in all illuminated, solid color, spring return, and maintained units.

Standard and illuminated push buttons and selector switches are available. Both push button and selector switches are available with key or for conventional operation. The CR104P push-button line also includes press-to-test and standard indicating lights, mushroom-head, joy stick, push-pull and push-push operators.

Application

Especially adapted to machine-tool service or any application where oil or coolant is present. The convenient one-hole mounting makes this line suitable for general purpose use in equipment of all kinds where panel mounting is possible.

This line is ideal for applications where oil tightness, watertightness and long life are essential.

All units are suitable for use in Type 1, 3, 3R, 4, 12 and 13 environments when mounted in enclosures rated for those same applications.

➀

Contact Ratings

AC Ratings, NEMA A600 Heavy Pilot Duty

Max. Ac

Continuous Current

Amps

600 10

AC Voltamperes @ 60/50 Hz

➁

Make

7200

Break

720

DC Ratings, NEMA P600

125V

1.1

Max. Make or Break Amps

250V

0.55

600V

0.2

➀ CR104PTP units are suitable for Type 1,12, and 13 applications only.

➁ Maximum make and break currents are 60 and 6 amperes respectively for voltages of 120 and below.

Features

• Ease of assembly–One screw contact block mounting.

Octagonal ring provides ease in front panel mounting and enclosure applications.

• Greater torque–Due to the eight-sided ring design, greater torque can be developed during assembly and installation to provide oil tightness.

• Stocking inventories reduced–Forms may be furnished as complete units or as components, allowing building block construction from a minimum of stock.

• Color Coded–Colored knobs and caps are available in kit forms for easy field conversion.

CR104P pilot lights

Pilot lights match appearance of switches above. Standard applications use full voltage or transformer type lights.

Optional nameplates match those used with switches, neon lights are available (with limited lens colors).

Type

Full Voltage

(120 VAC)

Transformer

(6 VAC Secondary)

Neon

LED

(Transformer Type only)

STD

X

X

X

X

Push-To-Test

X

Bulb

#120PSB

X

N/A

X

#755

Neon

LED

(6 Volt)

Color

Red

Green

Amber

Blue

White

Clear

Red

White

Amber

Clear

Red

Green

Blue

Amber

H16


Components

C2000 Pilot Devices

C2000 Pilot Devices

Description

C2000 Push Buttons are heavy-duty, 22.5mm water-tight and oil-tight pilot devices. Four operator styles – round polished and satin chrome, round and square engineered plastic – are available. They just snap onto the mounting flange and all reflect a sleek, distinctive European style that give you precisely the look and function you want in your push buttons. Choose from full-voltage, resistor and transformer power supplies with incandescent, LED or neon lamps.

Features

• Installation is quick, labor cost are reduced.

• Ergonomic design adds ease of assembly and operation.

• Back-tightened locking rings discourage tampering, accommodate a range of panel thickness, and tighten down with either a custom wrench or any flatbladed screwdriver.

• A removable orientation tab allows universal mounting in either notched or round 22.5 mm holes.

• Permanently bonded front gasket provides superior sealing against contaminants and makes installation nearly foolproof.

• Markings are easy to read and laser-etched so they remain permanently legible.

• 4-point contact, flanges snap securely onto the operator.

• Ultrasonically welded contact block housings hold up longer and resist contamination better, even in the dustiest environments.

• Double bridge sliding contacts provide excellent performance, even in low-voltage applications.

• Terminals (both screw and quick-connect) can be wired off the operator, then snapped on.

• Contacts are rated A600, Q300.

Standard for 1/2X compact starter. See GE Control Catalog, Section 9.

C2000 Double Bridge Feature

H

H17


Components

H

Solid-State Motor Winding Heater

Description

The motor winding heater is designed for use with 3-phase ac motors to guard against damage caused by condensation build-up on motor windings, which can occur in high-humidity environments during motor idle periods. With the heater connected as indicated in the connection diagram, and the motor not running, an SCR controlled current flows in the motor windings, producing enough heat to maintain the temperature inside the motor above the ambient temperature.

The motor winding heater is automatically energized after the starter contacts (M) open, and de-energized when the starter contacts close. Fuses are included for SCR overcurrent protection and protection for wiring.

Applications

50 Hertz Applications: The 230/460 volt device can be used at 220/440 volts, 50 Hertz. The 575 volt device can be used at 550 volts, 50 Hertz.

Typical Wiring Diagram

If desired, a pilot light can be connected as shown (“Fuse

Condition Indicator”) to visually monitor the condition of the fuses. With the starter contacts open, the light will be On if current paths through FU1 and FU2 are complete. The pilot light should have a line voltage rating.

Specifications

Output Voltage Regulation: Voltage applied to motor winding

Note: Since voltage is present at motor terminals at all times, cautionary information sent with the device must be observed.

-15%.

Operating Temperature Range: -20°C to +50°C.

Fusing: FU1–Fast-acting semiconductor fuse for SCR overcurrent protection. FU2–Class RK-5 rejection type fuse with time delay for wiring protection.

Additional SCR Protection: Metal oxide varistor protects against voltage surges. RC snubber circuit limits rate of change of circuit voltage.

Motor Voltage

+10%, –15%, 3-Phase 60 Hz

230/460V

575V

Heater is UL Listed in MCC Construction

Motor Horsepower Range

15-400 Hp

25-400 Hp

H18


Components

EPM 6000 Power Meter

High Accuracy Power and Energy Measurement

Overview

EPM 6000 is one of the industry’s highest performance revenue grade panel meters. Based on the latest technology and an all-new platform, EPM 6000 has a superior cost to performance ratio and significantly outperforms other metering products many times its price.

Applications

• Continuous metering of electrical loads such as generator panels, feeders, switchgear etc.

• Provides remote status when used with EnerVista suite of software

• Low and medium voltage applications

• Replaces multiple analog meters saving space and installation costs

Key Benefits

• High accuracy multifunction power meter

• Superior performance at competitive pricing

• Ultra compact, easy to install, program and use

• 0.2% class revenue certifiable energy and demand metering

• Total harmonic distortion (%THD)

• Fits both ANSI and DIN cutout

• Large 3 line .56” bright LED display for better visibility and longer life

• User programmable for different system voltages and current measurements

• Standard Modbus and DNP communications

• Optional Ethernet port for simplified integration into onto new or existing LAN infrastructures and multi-point connectivity

Features

Monitoring and Metering

• True RMS multifunction measurements including voltage, current, power, freq., energy, etc.

• Meets ANSI C12.20 (0.2%) and IEC 687 (0.2%) accuracy classes

• Future field upgradeable for added functionality without removing installed meter

• Load percentage graphical bar for instant load visualization

Communications

• RS485 Modbus and DNP 3.0 Protocol up to 57.6K Baud

(Serial Option)

• Modbus TCP Protocol through 10/100BaseTX via RJ45

(Ethernet Option)

• 3 Line .56” Bright Red LED Display

• Front IrDA Port laptop communication

• Pulse output for accuracy testing and energy

For more information on EPM 6000, please see https://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin/catalog/ epm6000.htm

H

H19


Components

H

EPM 6010 Automation Power Meter

BACnet*/IP Communications and Energy

Measurement

Overview

The Multilin EPM 6010 is an industry leading revenue grade power meter with native BACnet/IP communications. This meter is designed to integrate seamlessly into existing and new building management systems using the popular BACnet protocol. The meter allows users to gather data on voltage, current, power and energy usage throughout a facility.

Designed to be the perfect device for environmental initiatives, LEED certified projects and smart energy projects, the

EPM 6010 provides superior metrology, and revenue testable 0.2% energy accuracy. The meter is in compliance with ANSI and IEC accuracy standards, has advanced DSP technology, samples at high rates, and has 24 bit A/D conversion to measure and analyze power accurately and reliably.

Applications

• LEED projects

• Smart buildings

• Commercial energy management

• HVAC efficiency monitoring

• Building management systems

Key Benefits

• Rapid integration into BACnet management systems

• High accuracy multifunction power meter, 0.2% class revenue certifiable energy and demand metering

• Ultra compact and easy to install, fits both ANSI and DIN cutouts

• EnerVista* software makes metered data and power quality status easily accessible

• User programmable for different system voltages and current measurements

• Standard Modbus* and TCP communications

• Easy to read, large 3 line .56” bright LED display for better visibility and longer life

Features

Measuring and Metering

• High accuracy multifunction power meter, 0.2% class revenue certifiable energy and demand metering

• Samples at 400+ times per cycle and has 24 bit A/D conversion to measure accurately and reliably

• Meets ANSI C12.20 (0.2%) and IEC 687 (0.2%) accuracy classes

• Total harmonic distortion (%THD)

• Load percentage graphical bar for instant load visualization

• True RMS multifunction measurements including voltage, current, power, frequency and energy

Communications

• BACnet/IP 100BaseT Ethernet protocol

• 40 pre-defined BACnet objects facilitate rapid integration

• Embedded web-server, allows BACnet/IP interface to be remotely configured and BACnet objects can be remotely viewed over the internet with a web browser

• Standard Modbus TCP communications can be used to poll the EPM 6010 while BACnet/IP interface is being used


H20


Components

EPM 7000 Power Meter

Power Quality and Energy Cost Measurement

Overview

The EPM 7000 meter provides revenue class (0.2%) three phase power metering with optional Ethernet, relay, status, and analog output communication modules. This flexible meter can be used for a wide range of high accuracy applications including disturbance recording and power quality studies.

EPM 7000 can easily be mounted in a panel for generator monitoring, substation automation, power quality studies, data recording and more. The meter can also provide data to RTUs, PLCs and other control devices.

The EPM 7000 is a highly accurate meter providing 0.1% accuracy for Voltage and Current. The unit’s real-time clock provides time stamping of all logs as they are created. Up to 4 MB of data can be logged for analysis of historical trends, limit alarms, I/O changes power quality recording and sequence of events.

Features

Metering

• Meets ANSI C 12.20 and IEC 687 (0.2%) accuracy

• Ia Ib Ic In

• Va Vb Vc Vab Vbc Vca

• Hz W VAR VA

• Wh VARh VAh

• Demand: W VAR VA

• Power Factor

• Voltage and Current Angles

• Load Bar

Applications

• Four quadrant energy and power monitoring of distribution feeders, transformers, reactors and generators

• Power monitoring of LV and MV industrial power control centers and motor control centers

• Energy monitoring of commercial and distribution utilities

Power Quality

• Harmonics to the 40th order

• Total Harmonic Distortion

• Disturbance Recording and Waveform Capture

• Sag and Swell

Key Benefits

• Four Quadrant Energy and Power Measurement, complying with ANSI C12.20 (0.2% Accuracy)

• Analyze power quality over long periods of time to improve network reliability through high resolution event and disturbance recording

• Ideal for monitoring industrial power centers, data centers and hospitals due to high accuracy disturbance recording

(up to 512 samples/cycle)

• Retrieve archived data, capture past events and analyze disturbances through high resolution data recording (up to

4MB of data logging)

• Flexible communication options provide easy to access meter values, simplified configuration and seamless integration into new or existing automation systems

Data Logging

• Up to 4 MB Memory

• Disturbance Recording

• Power Quality Studies

• Load Studies

Communications

• Standard RS485 Modbus (DNP 3.0 and Modbus RTU or ASCII)

• Optional Ethernet 100BaseT

• IrDA Port

• Intuitive faceplate programming

Software

• Embedded Web Server

• GE Communicator

• EnerVista* Integrator

• EnerVista* Launchpad

H


H21


Components

H

PQM II Power Quality Meter

Power Quality and Energy Cost Management

Overview

GE Multilin has set a new standard in metering technology with the introduction of the PQM II. This meter, designed on the latest industry specifications, provides accurate and reliable three-phase power metering with an optional

Ethernet and fiber communications module in a small and modern package. The PQM II can be used for a variety of applications including metering of distribution feeders, transformers, generators and motors.

Applications

• Metering of distribution feeders, transformers, generators, capacitor banks and motors

• Medium and low voltage systems

• Commercial, industrial, utility

• Flexible control for demand load shedding, power factor, etc.

Key Benefits

• Power quality metering with waveform capture and historical data logging

• Easy to program and use with keypad and large illuminated

40 character display

• Multiple communication ports for integration with DCS and SCADA systems

• Supports DNP 3.0 and Modbus protocols

• Digital and analog I/Os for control and alarms

• Voltage disturbance recording capability for electrical sag and swell events

Features

Monitoring and Metering

• Ia Ib Ic In

• Va Vb Vc Vab Vbc Vca

• V I unbalance

• True PF crest and K factor

• Hz W var VA

• Wh varh VAh W cost

• Demand: A W var VA

• Harmonic analysis through 63rd with THD and TIF

• Event recorder - 150 events

• Waveform capture

• Data logger -98,000 events

• Voltage Disturbance Recorder (VDR) -500 events

Communications

• Front RS232 serial port (1,200 to 19,200 bps)

• Two rear RS485 serial ports with ModBus and DNP 3.0

protocol

• Ethernet connectivity provided by MultiNet

• EnerVista* software is provided for setup and monitoring functions

• External dial-in modem capabilities

Protection and Control

• Load shedding

• Power factor control

• Pulse input totalizing

For more information on PQM II, please see https://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin/catalog/ pqmil.htm

H22


Components

Three-Phase Voltage Monitors

Model SPVRB

General

UL Listed file No. E103039

The model SPVRB Voltage Sensing Relay is designed to protect against single phase, phase loss, phase unbalance, and phase reversal in a power system. The output contacts change their normal state only when a single phase, phase loss, phase unbalance, or phase reversal occurs for longer than the preset trip delay. A total power loss or de-energization of the SPVRB relay will not change the output contacts position. Recommended for manual reset switches and breaker applications. The SPVRB is suitable for loss of phase with motor loads.

Features

• Phase unbalance: 8%

• Adjustable Trip Delay: 1 to 10 seconds after failure occurs, prevents nuisance operations

• Output Relay: normally de-energized, form C contacts for easy circuit configuration

• Electro-mechanical indicator: retains memory of fault until manually reset

• Door or panel mounting

• Status Indicator: bi-colored LED

— Green: Output relay de-energized (normal condition)

— Red: Output relay energized (fault condition)

— Dark: Output relay de-energized (input power off)

• Single Phase, Phase Reversal, Phase Unbalance and

Phase Loss Protection: operates the output relay after a preselected time

• Automatic or Manual mode

— Automatic mode: Upon removal of fault conditions, relay automatically resets to normal

— Manual mode: Upon removal of fault conditions, relay resets to normal after local or remote reset button has been pressed

➀ Bi-Colored LED Indicator

•Power system condition Normal (Green), Trip (Red)

➁ Electromechanical Diagnostic Indicator

• Phase loss

➂ Adjustable System Delay

• Phase loss

• Phase unbalance

• Single phase

• Phase reversal

• Under and over voltage

(2) 0.24 Dia. Holes

Clearance holes for

#12 screws

Panel Mounting Layout

SPVRB — XXX

Input Voltage:

120/208/240/480 or

575 Vac, (60 Hz)

380 or 415 Vac, (50 Hz)

Available Models

Model No.

Nominal Vac

SPVRB–120

SPVRB–208

SPVRB–480

SPVRB–575

SPVRB–380

SPVRB–415

120

208

480

575

380

415

Hz

60

60

60

60

50

50

Output Contact Ratings

Voltage

120 Vac

240 Vac

600 Vac

Continuous

10 A

10 A

3 A

10 A, 28 Vdc/120 Vac/240 Vac, 80% pf

3 A, 480 Vac/600 Vac, 80% pf

HP

1/3

1/2

1/2

H

H23


Components

H

High-Resistance Ground

Equipment Overview

High Resistance Grounding Equipment coordinates the use of resistors and control devices, creating a high-resistance ground for a power system. The grounding equipment has the following features:

• Over-voltage Reduction: Reduces the transient over voltages that can occur during arcing faults.

• Fault Detection: Gives immediate warning when the first ground fault occurs.

• Fault Tracking: Helps locate the fault by producing a tracer signal of current pulses easily distinguishable from background noise.

• Operation Protection: Enables the system to continue operation with a single line-to ground fault present.

Operational Description – Low-Voltage Systems (600v Max)

Typical circuit used in low-voltage is shown on page L22.

Where to Use

The function of high-resistance grounding equipment is:

1. To provide a ground for neutral of an ungrounded threephase power system, utilizing the high-resistance method.

Using this equipment allows the system to operate basically as an ungrounded system. The equipment is designed to eliminate the danger of high-transient overvoltages during certain types of ground faults.

Note: The use of high-resistance grounding on 600 volt maximum systems precludes line-to-neutral loading.

2. To provide an immediate warning when the first ground fault occurs through an alarm system.

3. To provide a method for quickly locating and removing the fault before another fault develops on another phase, thereby preventing circuit outages due to double line-toground faults. This is done by using the pulsing ground current feature and portable detector.

When a ground fault occurs, the resistor acts to limit the ground current to a pre-determined low value. Taps are provided on the resistor to adjust the fault current. The voltage appearing across the resistor or the amperage through the resistor is sensed by the PulserPlus Pro* Controller. A variable time delay is entered via the operator’s panel. When the time delay expires, the red Ground Fault indicator light will illuminate. Auxiliary contacts are provided in case a remote indication of the fault is needed or desired. The red light will stay illuminated until the ground fault is removed and the system is reset. Optionally, the PulserPlus Pro can be set for auto-reset. In addition, an audible alarm will sound when the ground fault occurs. This alarm can be silenced from the operator’s panel.

Approximate Dimensions and Weights

Equipment

Enclosure

Type

NEMA 1

W x D x H

(inches)

20 x 20 x 90

With Pulsor in Pounds

Wye

600

Delta

700

Without Pulsor in

Pounds

Wye

575

Delta

675

600 Volt Maximum Wye System

PULSING CONTACTOR

NGI

CURRENT LOOP INPUT

CONTROL MODULE

SW1

NEUTRAL

A#

CPT LINE

FUSES INTERLOCKING

DISCONNECT

B#

Features

• Undervoltage and undercurrent detection and alarm

• Adjustable pulser from 10 to 50 per minute for custom setup

• Adjustable trip delay to avoid nuisance downtime

• Alarm contacts for remote monitoring of ground fault, high harmonics and loss of ground

• High harmonic filtering and detection

• Third harmonics generator winding protection

• Remote operation and monitoring via RS232, Modbus or Ethernet communication

ALARM CONTACTS

600 Volt Maximum Delta System

PULS

OPERATOR

INTERFACE

Line and Control Connections

The line connections are made to the main bus. The control power and auxiliary device connections are made to the terminal blocks rated 30 amperes, 600 volts. Refer to the specific diagrams furnished with the equipment for location detail. Setup information is through the operator’s panel.

PulserPlus Pro is a trademark of Post Glover.

H24


Components

MM200 Motor Management System

Low Voltage Motor Protection and Control

Overview

The MM200 meter integrates protection, control and multiple communication protocols in a rugged compact device for low volage motor applications. Easily integrated into new and existing control system architectures, the MM200 provides comprehensive low voltage motor protection and communications for all types of motor protection applications.

Applications

• Low Voltage Three-Phase AC Motors

• MCC and standalone Panel Mount Applications

• IEC NEMA Motor Control Center (MCCs)

• Process control applications

• System architecture requiring multiple simultaneous communications

• FVNR, FVR, two speed

Key Benefits

• Flexible Protection, Control, and Communication options to suit Low Voltage Motor applications

• Small footprint designed specifically for IEC and NEMA MCC applications

• Integrated pushbuttons and LED indicators reduce external components and wiring

• Flexible DIN rail mounting

• Multiple communication protocols allows simple integration into monitoring and control systems

• Optional control panel provides local control

Features


• Motor Thermal Model

• Undercurrent

• Current Unbalance

• Acceleration Time

• Sensitive Ground Fault

• Built-in Starter Logic

• FVNR, FVR, Two-Speed

• Auto / Manual Control

• Configurable Inputs

• Power Fail Restart

Metering & Monitoring

• Current, Motor Loads, Thermal Capacity

• Motor Running Time, Cause of Trip, Total Number of Trips

• 1A / 5A combined CT inputs

Communications

• Networking through RS485

• Multiple Protocols - Modbus RTU ODVA Compliant

DeviceNet Internally powered Profibus

• Simultaneous Communications

User Interface

• Optional Control Panel with control push buttons and LED status indicators

• Includes EnerVista MM200 Setup software for simple programming and retrieval of system or trip information

EnerVista* Software

• State of the art software for configuration and commissioning GE Multilin products

• Graphical Logic Designer and Logic Monitor to simplify designing and testing procedures

• Document and software archiving toolset to ensure reference material and device utilities are up-to-date

H

For more information on MM200, please see https://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin/catalog/ mm200.htm

H25


Components


Functional Block Diagram

ANSI Device Numbers and Functions

Device No.

37

46

49

50G

51R

Function

Undercurrent

Current Unbalance

Thermal Overload

Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent

Locked/Stalled Rotot, Mechanical Jam

52

BUS

Power Fuse

H

Contactor

Temperature

Thermistor

Phase CT 3

Ground CT 1

RS485 - Modbus RTU

Profibus/DeviceNet

Motor Load

7 inputs and 3 outputs (standard)

24 V DC

Metering

A

51R 49 37 45

51G

MM200

Motor Management System

H26


Components


User Interface

Front Panel Controls

• Integrated Device Controls

12 LED Indicators

• Motor Status

• Alarm Indication and Trip

• Communication Status

• Additional User LEDs

• Auto/Manual

• % Motor Load

Optional FieldbusProtocols

(ProfiBus or DeviceNet)

Power Supply and Digital

Inputs

• 24 VDC Power Supply

• 7 x 24 VDC Inputs (wet)

• 60-300VAC Power Supply

• 6x AC Inputs

Optional Control Panel Interface

Dimensions

Side View Front View Top View

3 Phase CT Inputs

RS485 Communications and Thermistor Input


• 2 Form A Outputs (5 Amps)

• 1 Form C Outputs (5 Amps)

H

H27


Components

H


Integrated Automation and Protection for

Low Voltage Motors

Overview

The MM300 meter integrates protection, control, automation, metering, diagnostics and multiple communication protocols in a rugged compact device for low volage motor applications.

Designed for Motor Control Centers, the MM300 delivers superior protection and control to extend equipment life and maximize process uptime.

Applications

• Low Voltage three-phase AC motors

• MCC or stand alone panel mount applications

• Reversing and reduced voltage applications

• Motor applications requiring advanced automation or control such as conveyor systems or well recovery pumps

• IEC or NEMA class motors

Automation

• Programmable Flexlogic Option

• Starter Control

• Process Interlocks

• Programmable Inputs and Outputs

• Undervoltage Auto-restart

Key Benefits

• Full-featured protection for low voltage AC motors

• Advanced automation capabilities for providing customized protection and integrated process control

• Advanced FlexLogic* reduces requirement for local PLC’s

• Reduced installation space requirements through integration of multiple devices including protection, control functions, pushbuttons, status LEDs and communication interfaces

• Application flexibility with multiple I/O options and programmable logic options (FlexLogic)

• Enhanced troubleshooting tools including sequence of event records and waveform capture

• Powerful communications including Serial, Ethernet,

Profibus, and DeviceNet protocols

• Small form factor and remote display options designed to fit in MCC buckets

Metering & Monitoring

• Metering — Current, Voltage, Power, Energy, Frequency,

RTD, Thermistor

• Oscillography — Analog Values at 32 Samples/cycle and

Digital States

• Event Recorder — Up to 256 Time Tagged Events with 1ms re

• Advanced Device Health Diagnostics

Communications

• Networking Interfaces — Two Wire RS485, RJ45 Ethernet

• Multiple Protocols (Modbus RTU , Modbus TCP/IP, Internally

Powered Profibus, ODVA Compliant DeviceNet)

• Programming Ports - USB, RS485

• Network Time Protocol (When Ordered with Ethernet)

User Interface

• Control Panel with 12 Status LED’s, Motor Control and

Function Keys

• Color HMI Display featuring a full color graphical display,

Motor and system status LED’s, USB programming port and motor control keys

Features


• Enhanced Thermal Modeling

• Mechanical Jam / Stalled Rotor

• Undercurrent

• Underpower

• Acceleration Time

• Current Unbalance

• Ground Fault


• Phase Overvoltage / Undervoltage

• Auxiliary Undervoltage

• Phase Reversal

• VT Fuse Failure

• Thermistor

• RTD Overtemperature

EnerVista* Software

• State of the art software for configuration and commissioning GE Multilin products

• Graphical Logic Designer and Logic Monitor to simplify designing and testing procedures

• Document and software archiving toolset to ensure reference material and device utilities are up-to-date

For more information on MM300, please see https://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin/catalog/ mm300.htm

H28


Components


Functional Block Diagram

ANSI Device Numbers and Functions

Device No.

27AUX

27

37

38

46

47

49

50G

51G

51R

59

66

Function

Undervoltage - Auxiliary Input

Undervoltage - Three Phase

Undercurrent/Underpower

Bearing Temperature RTD

Current Unbalance

Voltage Phase Reversal

Thermal Overload

Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent

Ground Time Overcurrent

Locked/Stalled Rotor/Mechanical Jam

Overvoltage - Three Phase

Starts/Hour & Time Between Starts

52

BUS

Power Fuse

Contactor

Phase CT 3

Ambient air

Ground CT 1

RTD

Thermistor

Control PT

Control fuse

27X

Direct voltage inputs

(690 V AC maximum)

Optional three-phase voltage card

6 inputs and 2 outputs (standard)

27 59 47

Metering

V, A, W, var, VA, PF, Hz

51R 49 37 66 46

Stator RTDs

Bearing RTDs

Temperature

50G 51G

49

38

Expansion module, two cards per module, maximum of two modules

Optional

RTD card

Motor

Load

RS485 - Modbus RTU

Ethernet - Modbus TCP/IP

Profibus/DeviceNet

MM300

Motor Management System

H

H29


Components


User Interface

H

Dimensions

H30


Components

Integrated Tranquell* HE & ME

Surge Protective Device (SPD) with Enhanced Thermal Protection

Overview

GE Surge Protective Devices (SPD) are engineered for reliability, flexibility and long life in the most extreme surge environment. The true maximum surge current rating has been proven successful in third-party tests.

These SPD models connect to the panelboard or switchboard bus bars without adding width or depth to the panel enclosure, and only occupying 7X of vertical bus space. Third-party tested per IEEE C62.62 and NEMA LS-1 for the rated 8x20µs surge current, per mode with fusing included. Standard features include a surge counter, audible alarm, indicating lights, dry contacts and an integral surge rated disconnect.

Rating options range from 65kA per mode to 300kA per mode.

All mode protection is provided with surge components

(MOVs) connected on the phase to neutral, phase to ground and neutral to ground paths as appropriate for the voltage configuration.

Technical Specifications

Nominal Discharge Current (In): 20kA

Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): 200kA

Operating Frequency: 50/60 Hz

Connection: 6 to 2/0 Conductors,

Parallel Connected

Operating Temperature: -40° F to 149° F

(-40° C to +65° C)

Operating Humidity: 0% to 95%

Non-Condensing

Weight: 24 lbs. (10.89 kg)

Features and Benefits

• UL 1449 3rd Edition, Type 1 or Type 2

• UL 1283, EMI/RFI noise filter

• UL 96A, Lightning Protection System

• cUL, CSA C22.2

• Integral surge rated disconnect

• Compact design requires only 7X height of space

• Tranquell* ME device is tested to a minimum of 5,000 category C3 impulses (10kA, 20kV) per mode

• Tranquell* HE device is tested to a minimum of 20,000 category C3 impulses (10kA, 20kV) per mode

• Industrial-sized MOV technology

• Thermally protected MOVs eliminate the need for additional upstream overcurrent protection

• Form C dry contacts for remote monitoring

• Green status indicating lights, red alarm light

• Audible alarm with test/disable feature

• LCD surge counter

• 5 year limited warranty (standard),

10 year limited warranty (optional)

H

H31


Components

Integrated Tranquell* HE & ME

Surge Protective Device (SPD)

Catalog Number

TPHE

TPME

120S

120Y

220Y

240D

240H

240Y

277Y

347Y

480D

Nominal Voltage

(Volts RMS)

120/240

120Y/208

220Y/380

240 Delta

120/240 Delta HL

240Y/415

277Y/480

347Y/600

480 Delta

System

Voltage

1 Ph, 3 W + G

3 Ph, 4 W + G

3 Ph, 4 W + G

3 Ph, 3 W

3 Ph, 4 W + G

3 Ph, 4 W + G

3 Ph, 4 W + G

3 Ph, 4 W + G

3 Ph, 3 W

MCOV Max.

Continuous

Operating Voltage

L-N/G (Vrms)

150

150

06

08

320

270

12

150/270 HL

15

320

320

420

10

20

25

30

550

Maximum Surge

Current Capacity

Exposure

Level

Per

Mode

Per

Phase

TPME

TPME

TPME

TPHE

TPHE

TPHE

TPHE

TPHE

65kA

80kA

130kA

160kA

100kA 200kA

125kA 250kA

150kA 300kA

200kA 400kA

250kA 500kA

300kA 600kA

PP

SG

ME

Spectra panel or switchboard)

for UL Type 2 Locations

For all TPHE devices (125kA -

300kA) integral to switchgear for UL Type 2 Locations

MCC) for UL Type 2 Locations

PPT1

Spectra panel or switchboard)

for UL Type 1 Locations

SGT1

For all TPHE devices (125kA -

300kA) integral to switchgear for UL Type 1 Locations

MET1

MCC) for UL Type 1 Locations

H

Protection Ratings

Voltage Code 1 2 0 S / 1 2 0 Y 2 4 0 D 2 4 0 H 2 2 0 Y / 2 4 0 Y / 2 7 7 Y 3 4 7 Y 4 8 0 D

Protection Mode

UL 1449, 3 rd

edition

Voltage Protection Ratings

(VPR) (assigned UL rating)

UL 1449, 2 nd

edition

Suppression Voltage

Ratings (SVR)

(assigned UL rating)*

L-N L-G N-G L-L L-G L-L L-N

400 400 400 700 800 1500 500

HL-N

900 800 700 1200 1200 1800 1000 1200 800 1200 700 2000 2200 1500 1200 1200 2000 1500 1500 1500 2500 1800 3000

700

L-G

400

HL-G

700

N-G

400

L-L

900

HL-L

—

L-N

800

L-G

800

N-G

800

L-L

1500

L-N

1200

L-G

1000

N-G

1000

L-L

2000

L-G

1500

L-L

3000

B3 Ring Wave Clamping

Voltage @ 6kV, 500A

470 463 452 752 750 1240 465 — 466 — 476 1025 — 763 836 828 1393 883 1000 1000 1723 1223 1800

C3 Combo Wave

Clamping Voltage

@ 20kV, 10kA

793 670 680 1007 890 1640 775 — 670 — 680 1163

*NOTE: SVR R atings are no longer assigned by UL and are included in the table above for reference purposes only.

— 1170 1073 1180 1827 1467 1240 1240 2220 1607 2933

Dimensions

0.340

[8.636]

17.722

[450.130]

17.382

[441.494]

0.280

[ 7.112] HOLE

(4 PLACES)

9.400

[238.755]

6.762

[171.751] TYP

2.638

[67.004] TYP

NOTE: All dimensions are for reference only and are shown in inches [millimeters]

See instruction manual for details

6.964

[176.877]

7.202

[182.922]

H32


Application Data

Motor

HP

1/4➀

1/2➀

1/2

3/4

1

1 1/2

2

3

5

7 1/2

10

15

20

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

Synchronous

Speed, RPM

1800

1200

3600

1800

1200

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

Approximate Motor Full-Load

Current Ratings

Full-Load Current for EPAC Compliant Motors

Average Expected Values

For three-phase, 60 Hertz, GE Type KE (NEMA Design B) dripproof, normal starting torque, continuous 40°C ambient (1.15

service factor) horizontal induction motors.

4.2

5.4

5.4

5.7

2.6

3.7

3.3

3.4

2.1

2.5

2.4

2.5

1.5

1.9

1.8

2.1

1.3

1.5

1.3

1.4

0.80

1.4

0.96

1.1

575V

0.56

0.60

0.68

0.60

0.68

0.70

0.80

11.4

11.5

14.8

16.2

15.7

16.6

21.7

20.6

19.7

22.2

9.0

9.9

9.5

10.9

6.7

6.9

7.5

8.2

27.4

27.0

32.7

33.1

42.6

40.3

45.1

47.6

15.4

14.4

19.3

19.8

21.4

23.7

26.0

28.5

62.3

53.2

56.6

63.9

24.0

23.8

25.8

28.8

36.0

35.0

33.0

41.4

12.2

12.6

14.0

17.2

18.0

18.0

19.8

24.0

45.4

46.2

50.0

55.6

6.9

7.1

7.6

10.6

9.4

9.9

12.0

15.4

5.3

6.0

6.0

7.1

3.7

4.1

4.4

5.5

2.8

3.2

3.7

4.4

2.0

2.3

2.3

3.2

200V

1.6

Average Expected Values of Full-load Currents

230V

1.4

460V

0.70

1.7

2.0

1.7

2.0

1.5

1.7

1.5

1.7

0.75

0.85

0.75

0.85

1.8

2.0

2.0

2.8

2.4

2.8

3.2

3.8

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.9

0.88

1.0

1.0

1.4

3.2

2.2

4.6

4.8

4.8

4.4

4.6

6.2

6.0

5.8

6.2

9.2

8.0

7.9

8.6

13.4

4.0

3.9

4.3

6.7

3.0

2.9

3.1

4.6

2.4

2.2

2.3

3.1

1.6

1.6

2.3

2.4

12.0

11.9

12.9

14.4

18.0

17.6

19.1

20.7

9.0

9.3

9.9

12.4

6.1

6.3

7.0

8.6

22.7

23.1

25.0

27.8

Motor

HP

25

30

40

50

60

75

100

125

150

200

250

300

350

400

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

Synchronous

Speed, RPM

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

3600

1800

1200

3600

1800

3600

1800

3600

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

340

352

370

398

412

419

435

–

468

482

574

590

594

676

686

774

792

890

296

306

322

346

348

364

378

446

207

206

221

262

281

283

296

338

142

144

159

163

172

172

176

206

81.7

88.6

92.2

101

112

114

122

140

200V

72.0

Average Expected Values of Full-load Currents

230V

56.0

460V

28.0

71.3

73.8

82.6

85.6

60.0

63.2

71.8

67.8

30.0

31.6

35.9

33.9

71.2

73.8

80.2

89.0

97.8

99.6

105.8

129

35.6

36.9

40.1

44.6

48.9

48.5

52.9

64.5

122

125.2

138.2

145.6

147.4

149.2

153.4

181

180.0

179.2

191.8

238

232

246

258

290

91.6

86.7

95.9

119

116

118

129

139

61.1

61.0

69.1

72.8

73.7

69.8

76.7

90.5

226

239

287

295

297

338

340

387

396

445

143

149

161

164

169

177

189

217

76.7

91.2

97.7

98.4

103

116

118

122

55.3

56.6

59.9

59.7

61.4

71.5

72.0

71.7

32.1

39.2

40.3

39.8

42.3

48.9

49.4

50.1

575V

25.0

24.8

25.7

28.7

29.8

29.9

30.8

230

236

238

270

274

310

317

356

129

138

143

146

151

178

187

193

➀ Open, Type K, general purpose, NEMA SF, solid base, rolled-steel-shell, GE induction motors.

Note: The listed data is based on approximate full-load current ratings of standard, open, 1.15 service factor, continuous rated General Electric motors. Full-load current ratings of similar motors of other manufacturers may vary considerably. Therefore, whenever possible use actual full-load current rating given on motor nameplate.

Contact motor manufacturer for full-load currents of single-phase and DC motors.

J1

J

J


Application Data

Mag-Break Magnetic Circuit Breaker Trip

Set Positions

The greatest degree of protection is provided when the magnetic trip setting is just above the motor starting inrush current. It is therefore recommended that the magnetic trip position be adjusted to a setting one position higher than the setting that carries the motor starting current. For recommended continuous-current ratings, see overload heater tables on pages J-5 through J-12.

Cat No.

3 Pole

TEC36003

TEC36007

TEC36015

TEC36030

TEC36050

TEC36100

TEC36150

TFC36225

TFC36225A

TJC36400B

TJC36400E

TJC36400F

TJC36400G

TJC36600G

TJC36600H

Continuous

Amperes

3

7

15

30

50

100

150

225

225

Lo

8

18

42

90

180

300

600

2

13

30

68

140

260

468

950

Trip Setting Positions

4

18

42

94

190

340

636

1300

6

23

804

1650

600 780 1020 1200

1000 1200 1630 1920

8

28

972

2000

10

33

54 66 78

120 146 172

240 290 340

420 500 580

1140

2350

Hi

38

90

198

390

660

1300

2700

1400

2250

400

400

400

400

600

600

1200

330

550

1000

1800

1400

435

720

1280

2100

1850

600

1780

2600

3250

860

945 1280

1000 1280 1780 2360

2360

3600

4000

1100

1670

3300

3300

6000

Spectra RMS Circuit Breaker Current Ratings

Max.

Rating Instantaneous Trip Setting, Nominal RMS Sym. Amperes

Frame Frame Plug

Amps Amps Min.

Trip Setting Adjustment Position

2 3 4 5 6 Max.

7

3

7

15

20

30

11

22

43

58

13

27

55

74

16

35

69

93

19

43

24

56

31

71

86 111 143

116 151 196

39

90

182

254

SE 60

25

30

40

50

73

87

118

148

93

112

150

187

117

142

188

236

147 193 253

179 237 314

237 308 394

296 386 498

332

415

501

637

100

150

100

110

125

150

60

70

80

90

178

206

236

267

297

328

374

450

224

261

299

338

376

415

474

570

284

329

377

426

475

524

598

720

355

411

472

532

593

654

745

897

464

534

614

694

775

857

979

604

684

787

892

998

1,105

1,265

1,181 1,528

777

863

999

1,138

1,280

1,426

1,640

1,991

SF 250

400

70

90

100

110

125

150

175

200

225

250

125

150

175

200

225

590

665

740

380

455

530

605

680

Min.

205

265

295

325

370

440

515

2

260

335

375

410

465

560

655

750

840

935

480

575

670

765

860

3

330

425

470

520

570

705

825

940

1,050

1,180

620

740

865

990

1,115

4

410

530

590

650

740

885

1,035

1,180

1,330

1,480

765

920

5

535

690

765

845

960

1,150

1,345

1,535

1,730

1,920

990

Max.

700

900

1,000

1,100

1,250

1,500

1,750

2,000

2,250

2,500

1,275

1,185 1,530

1,070 1,385 1,785

1,225 1,580 2,040

1,375 1,780 2,295

SG

SK

600

800

1,200

450

500

600

300

400

500

600

700

250

300

350

400

250

300

350

400

800

600

700

800

1,000

1,200

755

905

1,060

1,210

765

915

1,070

1,200

1,375

1,525

1,830

940

1,255

1,570

1,875

2,155

2,440

1,825

2,125

2,430

3,040

3,650

955 1,235

1,145 1,480

1,340 1,730

1,530 1,980

965 1,215

1,155 1,455

1,350 1,700

1,540 1,940

1,735 2,185

1,925 2,425

2,310 2,910

1,150 1,445

1,535 1,930

1,915 2,410

2,290 2,895

2,665 3,375

3,035

2,310

2,695

3,080

3,850

4,620

3,860

2,905

3,390

3,870

4,840

5,805

1,530 1,975 2,550

1,835 2,370 3,060

2,140 2,765 3,570

2,445 3,160 4,080

1,500 1,960 2,530

1,800 2,355 3,035

2,100 2,745 3,545

2,400 3,135 4,050

2,695 3,530 4,555

2,995 3,920 5,060

3,595 4,705 6,075

1,795 2,375 3,015

2,395 3,165 4,015

2,990 3,955 5,020

3,610 4,740 6,195

4,240 5,525 7,420

4,875

3,685

4,300

4,910

6,140

7,370

6,305

4,730

5,515

6,305

8,880

9,455

8,705

6,110

7,125

8,145

10,180

12,215

J2


Application Data

Thermal Magnetic Trip Ratings for

Motor Circuits

These selections are based on 2005 National Electric Code requirements for squirrel-cage motors without code letters or with code letter through G. Lower trip ratings may be required for motor with code letter A and higher trips for motors with code letters H to V. Local code or specific application requirements may necessitate special selection. Thermal-magnetic circuit breaker combination motor control units are not recommended for motors with full-load currents of 3.8 amperes or less.

NEMA Motor

Size HP

2

3

1 5

7.5

10

10

2

3

20

25

30

40

15

20

25

15

4

50

30

40

50

60

75

100

CB

Type

SE

SE

SE

SF

SGL

200/208V

Trip

15

20

30

50

50

70

100

100

125

200

230V

Trip

15

15

30

30

50

70

100

100

125

150

200

380V

Trip

15

15

20

30

30

50

70

70

100

100

125

150

200

460V

Trip

15

15

15

20

20

40

50

60

575V

Trip

15

15

15

20

20

30

40

50

70

100

125

150

200

225

50

70

100

100

125

150

NEMA Motor

Size HP

5

50

60

75

100

6

125

150

200

100

125

150

200

250

300

350

400

CB

Type

SGL

SGL/SKL

SKL

200/208V

Trip

200/250

300

350

500

800

800

230V

Trip

225/250

300/350

400 225/250

300

300/350

800

800

1000

380V

Trip

500

800

800

460V

Trip

225/250 225/250

300 250

350/400 300

500

600

800

1000

575V

Trip

400

500

800

800

Motor Selection Table for Spectra Motor Circuit Protectors

208V

0.5

1.0

2.0

3.0

5.0

–

7.5

10

25

40

40

50

60

75

100

150

Max HP per System Voltage

230V 380V 460V

0.5

1.5

1.0

3.0

1.0

3.0

3.0

5.0

7.5

10

15

25

30

50

50

50

60

75

100

5.0

10.0

15

25

30

50

75

60

75

100

125

150

200

300

5.0

10.0

15

25

25

30

60

100

60

100

125

150

200

250

350

400

575V

1.5

3.0

7.5

10.0

15

20

25

30

40

60

60

100

75

100

150

200

250

300

400

Starter

Size

1

2

3-4

4RVAT

4STD

5

6

➀

150

200

➀ Size 4 RVAT with SF CB requires an additional 6" height extension.

350

400

400

500

800

1000

100

150

100

150

150

200

250

300

50

60

50

70

40

25

30

40

Amps

3

7

15

20

25

30

Rating Plug

CAT#

SRPE7A3

SRPE7A7

SRPE30A15

SRPE30A20

SRPE30A25

SRPE30A30

SRPE60A40

SRPE30A25

SRPE30A30

SRPE60A40

SRPE60A50

SRPE60A60

SRPE60A50

SRPE100A70

SRPE100A100

SRPE150A150

SRPE150A100

SRPE150A150

SRPF250A150

SRPF250A200

SRPG400A250

SRPG400A300

SRPG400A350

SRPG400A400

SRPG800A400

SRPG800A500

SRPK1200A800

SRPK1200A1000

CB

Sensor

7

400

100

150

150

200

30

60

30

60

600

1200

CB

Frame

SE

150

SF

250

SG

600

SG

600

SK

1200

J3

J


Application Data

J

Overload Heater Tables

Heaters for Ther-Mag Controllers

For continuous rated motors with a service factor of 1.15 to

1.25, select heaters from the heater table. For continuous rated motors with a service factor of 1.0, multiply the motor full-load current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters.

Overload relay tripping current in 40°C ambient is the minimum value of full load current multiplied by 1.25.

Provide short circuit protection in accordance with the

National Electrical Code.

WARNING: Opening of the circuit breaker may be an indication that a fault current has been interrupted. To provide continued protection against fire or shock hazard, all current-carrying parts and other components of the motor controller should be examined and replaced if damaged. If heater burnout occurs, the complete overload relay must be replaced.

Size 0 and 1 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

.41-.45

.46-.49

.50-.53

.54-.59

.60-.65

.66-.76

.77-.84

.85-.93

.94-1.04

1.05-1.15

1.16-1.27

1.28-1.39

1.40-1.55

1.56-1.73

1.74-1.89

1.90-2.05

2.06-2.28

2.29-2.47

2.48-2.79

2.80-3.31

3.32-3.70

3.71-4.06

4.07-4.47

4.48-4.95

C196A

C220A

C239A

C268A

C301A

C326A

C356A

C379A

C419A

C466A

C526A

Heater

Number

CR 123

C054A

C060A

C066A

C071A

C078A

C087A

C097A

C109A

C118A

C131A

C148A

C163A

C184A

17.2-18.1

18.2-20.0

20.1-21.5

21.6-22.5

22.6-23.9

24.0-26.3

26.4-27.0

Size 2 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

5.48-5.85

5.85-6.47

6.48-7.35

7.36-8.06

8.07-9.03

9.04-9.61

9.62-10.5

10.6-11.6

11.7-12.5

12.6-13.6

13.7-16.7

Heater

Number

CR 123

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B

C163B

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

16.8-17.9

18.0-18.7

18.8-20.4

20.5-22.7

22.8-24.7

24.8-26.3

26.4-29.5

29.6-32.5

32.6-36.7

36.8-41.9

42.0-43.2

43.3-45.0

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

4.96-549

5.50-5.91

5.92-6.47

6.48-7.20

7.21-8.22

8.23-8.72

8.73-9.67

9.68-10.4

10.5-11.0

11.1-12.4

12.5-13.2

13.3-15.4

15.5-17.1

17.2-18.0

Size 1

Heater

Number

CR 123

C180B

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C303B

C330B

C366B

C400B

C440B

C460B

Heater

Number

CR 123

C592A

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B

C163B

C180B

C198B

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C303B

C330B


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

19.0-19.3

19.4-22.1

22.2-23.4

23.5-27.0

27.1-29.1

29.2-31.8

31.9-33.9

34.0-37.6

37.7-41.9

42.0-47.7

47.8-52.1

52.2-55.8

55.9-59.7

59.8-68.1

68.2-71.5

71.6-78.2

78.3-87.5

87.6-90.0

Heater

Number

CR 123

F233B

F243B

F270B

F300B

F327B

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

17.8-18.4

18.5-21.1

21.2-22.1

22.2-26.1

26.2-28.0

28.1-31.3

31.4-33.3

33.4-34.3

34.4-40.9

41.0-44.7

44.8-51.0

51.1-52.0

52.1-55.4

55.5-63.3

63.4-66.1

66.2-73.5

73.6-82.2

82.3-90.0


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

27.1-32.2

32.3-34.0

34.1-36.8

36.9-44.6

44.7-48.4

48.5-53.9

54.0-57.4

57.5-60.0

60.1-69.5

69.6-71.7

71.8-79.9

80.0-92.3

92.4-97.0

97.1-108

109-118

119-131

132-135

Heater

Number

CR 123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

28.8-32.0

32.1-34.2

34.3-36.7

36.8-43.9

44.0-46.6

46.7-52.6

52.7-55.6

55.7-58.7

58.8-67.1

67.2-70.6

70.7-76.3

76.4-88.7

88.8-93.4

93.5-105

106-114

115-128

129-131

132-135


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

109-118

119-128

129-138

139-155

156-168

169-184

Heater

Number

CR 123

C592A

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

185-200

201-221

222-237

238-262

263-270

J4

Heater

Number

CR 123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C

F174C

Heater

Number

CR 123

F233B

F243B

F270B

F300B

F327B

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

Heater

Number

CR 123

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B


Application Data


Heaters for Mag Controllers

The Mag-Break protector is factory adjusted to the minimum trip setting.

WARNING: To maintain overload, short circuit, and ground fault protection, use the following instructions to select heaters and to adjust the Mag-Break trip setting.


1.25, select heaters from the heater table. For continuous rated motors with a service factor of 1.0, multiply motor fullload current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters.

Use the heater table to verify that the Mag-Break and current limiter rating is correct for the motor full-load current. Then set the Mag-Break trip setting to the recommended value.

If the Mag-Break trips when starting the motor, increase trip setting one step at a time until the motor can be consistently started.

Do not exceed the maximum trip setting shown in the heater table.

Overload relay tripping current in 40°C ambient is the minimum value of heater full-load current multiplied by 1.25.

WARNING: Overload relays with automatic reset may automatically start a motor connected to a 2-wire control circuit. When automatic restarting is not desired, use a 3-wire control circuit.

WARNING: Tripping of the Mag-Break may be an indication that a fault current has been interrupted. To provide continued protection against fire or shock hazard, all current-carrying parts and other components of the motor controller should be examined and be replaced if damaged.

If heater burnout occurs, the complete overload relay must be replaced.

Size 0 and 1 (Standard )

C379A

C419A

C466A

C526A

C592A

C630A

C630A

C695A

C196A

C220A

C239A

C268A

C301A

C301A

C326A

C356A

Heater

Number

CR 123

C087A

C097A

C109A

C118A

C131A

C148A

C163A

C184A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C137B

C151B

C151B

C163B

C180B

C198B

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

.65-.74

.75-.84

.85-.92

.93-1.02

1.03-1.10

1.11-1.23

1.24-1.38

1.39-1.49

1.50-1.67

1.68-1.79

1.80-1.98

1.99-2.24

2.25-2.43

2.25-2.43

2.44-2.75

2.76-3.25

3.26-3.43

3.44-4.03

4.04-4.43

4.44-4.94

4.95-5.36

5.37-5.77

5.37-5.77

5.78-6.35

6.36-6.92

6.93-7.99

8.00-8.47

8.48-9.19

9.20-10.0

10.1-10.7

10.8-12.0

10.8-12.0

12.1-12.9

12.1-12.9

13.0-15.1

15.2-16.3

16.4-17.9

Size 1

18.0-19.7

19.8-21.2

21.3-22.3

22.4-23.5

23.6-25.5

23.6-25.5

25.6-27.0

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C303B

C303B

C330B

7

7

15

15

7

7

7

7

7

7

3

7

3

3

3

3

TEC &

TECL

Rating

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

15

15

15

30

15

15

15

15

15

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

50

50

1

1

2

2

3

LO

LO

1

2

2

LO

LO

LO

1

1

3

LO

LO

LO

1

2

3

LO

LO

LO

1

1

2

3

LO

LO

LO

1

2

1

1

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Rec.

Max.

LO

LO

LO

LO

LO

LO

LO

LO

3

4

2

2

LO

LO

1

1

2

2

7

6

5

6

4

4

2

3

8

1

6

7

4

5

7

2

6

6

4

5

3

3

3

4

8

2

4

8

3

7

8

3

5

6

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

.66-.76

.77-.84

.85-.93

.94-1.04

1.05-1.15

1.16-1.27

1.28-1.39

1.40-1.55

1.56-1.73

1.74-1.89

1.90-2.05

2.06-2.28

2.29-2.47

2.29-2.47

2.48-2.79

2.80-3.31

3.32-3.70

3.71-4.06

4.07-4.47

4.48-4.95

4.96-5.49

4.96-5.49

5.50-5.91

5.50-5.91

5.92-6.47

6.48-7.20

7.21-8.22

8.23-8.72

8.73-9.67

9.68-10.4

10.5-11.0

11.1-12.4

11.1-12.4

12.5-13.2

13.3-15.4

15.5-17.1

Size 1

17.2-18.1

18.2-20.0

20.1-21.5

21.6-22.5

22.6-23.9

22.6-23.9

24.0-26.0

24.0-26.0

26.1-27.0

Size 0 and 1 (Ambient Comp.)

C419A

C466A

C526A

C592A

C592A

C630A

C630A

C695A

C220A

C239A

C268A

C301A

C301A

C326A

C356A

C379A

Heater

Number

CR 123

C087A

C097A

C109A

C118A

C131A

C148A

C163A

C184A

C196A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C137B

C151B

C163B

C180B

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C273B

C303B

C303B

C330B

15

7

15

15

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

3

3

3

3

TEC &

TECL

Rating

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

15

15

15

30

15

15

15

15

30

30

30

30

50

30

50

50

30

30

30

30

2

LO

3

LO

LO

2

2

1

1

1

2

2

LO

LO

LO

1

1

LO

LO

LO

LO

3

LO

LO

2

2

1

1

LO

LO

LO

LO

2

3

1

2

Rec.

LO

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

LO

LO

LO

LO

1

LO

LO

LO

LO

4

4

2

3

LO

1

1

2

2

2

1

8

6

7

5

5

3

4

1

2

7

8

5

6

7

2

6

7

4

5

3

3

2

3

4

8

3

8

2

4

6

7

5

5

J5

J

J


Application Data


Heaters for Mag-Break Controllers

Size 2 (Standard)

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

8.81-9.27

9.28-9.99

10.0-11.1

11.2-12.1

11.2-12.1

12.2-13.0

12.2-13.0

13.1-15.5

15.6-16.8

16.9-18.0

18.1-19.7

19.8-21.6

21.7-23.9

21.7-23.9

24.0-25.5

24.0-25.5

25.6-26.0

25.6-28.2

28.3-31.6

31.7-34.7

34.8-37.8

37.9-40.6

40.7-43.4

Heater

Number

CR 123

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C137B

C151B

C151B

C163B

C180B

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

C250B

C273B

C273B

C303B

C303B

C330B

C366B

C400B

C440B

C460B

30

30

30

30

15

30

30

30

TEC &

TECL

Rating

15

15

15

15

30

50

50

50

50

50

30

50

30

50

50

LO

1

2

2

LO

3

LO

3

3

3

2

3

2

2

4

LO

1

1

Rec.

2

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

5

2

3

3

LO

6

6

7

2

6

7

5

5

3

4

8

2

5

6

3

4

7

8

3

9

2

8

Size 2 (Ambient Comp.)

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

9.04-9.61

9.62-10.5

10.6-11.6

11.7-12.5

11.7-12.5

12.6-13.0

12.6-13.6

13.7-16.7

16.8-17.9

18.0-18.7

18.8-20.4

20.5-22.7

22.8-24.7

22.8-24.7

24.8-26.0

24.8-26.3

26.4-29.5

29.6-32.5

32.6-36.7

36.8-41.9

42.0-43.2

43.3-43.4

C250B

C273B

C273B

C303B

C330B

C366B

C400B

C440B

C460B

Heater

Number

CR 123

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C137B

C151B

C151B

C163B

C180B

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

30

30

30

30

15

30

30

30

TEC &

TECL

Rating

15

15

15

15

30

50

50

50

50

50

50

30

50

50

2

3

1

2

3

LO

4

LO

LO

2

3

2

2

4

LO

1

1

Rec.

2

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

5

2

3

3

LO

6

7

8

2

7

8

5

6

3

5

9

3

7

9

4

6

9

4

4

2

9


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

17.8-18.4

18.5-21.1

21.2-22.1

22.2-26.0

26.1-28.0

28.1-31.3

31.4-33.3

33.4-34.3

34.4-40.9

41.0-43.4

43.5-44.7

44.8-51.0

51.1-52.0

52.1-55.4

Heater

Number

CR 123

F233B

F243B

F270B

F300B

F327B

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

50

50

50

50

50

100

100

100

100

TEC &

TECL

Rating

30

30

30

30

50

2

LO

LO

1

1

LO

1

1

1

Rec.

1

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

5

1

2

3

LO

6

7

7

4

3

4

8

3

4

6

6

4

5

Size 3 (Standard and Ambient Comp.) cont.

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

55.5-63.3

63.4-66.1

66.2-73.5

73.6-82.2

82.3-86.9

Heater

Number

CR 123

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

TEC &

TECL

Rating

100

100

100

100

100

2

3

2

2

Rec.

1

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

5

6

6

7

9


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

28.8-32.0

32.1-34.2

34.3-36.7

36.8-43.4

43.5-43.9

44.0-46.6

46.7-52.6

52.7-55.6

55.7-58.7

58.8-67.1

67.2-70.6

70.7-76.3

70.7-76.3

76.4-86.9

76.4-88.7

88.8-93.4

93.5-102

103-110

111-122

123-131

Heater

Number

CR 123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F914B

F104C

F104C

F114C

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

150

TEC &

TECL

Rating

50

50

50

50

100

100

150

150

150

150

150

150

1

1

2

4

LO

1

1

2

3

3

LO

1

2

1

1

3

1

2

2

Rec.

1

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

4

7

3

5

6

7

1

5

6

4

5

3

3

4

4

5

3

3

8

2


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

28.8-32.0

32.1-34.2

34.3-36.7

36.8-43.4

36.8-43.8

43.9-46.6

46.7-52.6

52.7-55.6

55.7-58.7

58.8-67.1

67.2-70.6

70.7-76.3

76.4-86.9

76.4-88.7

88.8-93.4

93.5-105

106-114

115-128

129-130

Heater

Number

CR 123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F104C

F114C

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

TEC &

TECL

Rating

50

50

50

50

100

150

150

150

150

150

150

LO

1

1

1

2

2

3

4

2

3

1

2

2

1

Rec.

2

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

4

2

2

3

LO

7

2

5

6

7

8

5

6

4

5

3

3

5

6

3

4

2

3


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

106-115

116-125

126-135

126-135

136-151

152-164

165-179

180-195

196-215

216-231

232-255

256-270

Heater

Number

CR 123

C592A

C630A

C695A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B

TEC &

TECL

Rating

550-1670

550-1670

550-1670

1000-3300

1000-3300

1000-3300

1000-3300

1000-3300

1000-3300

1000-3300

1000-3300

1000-3300

3

4

4

LO

1

2

2

Rec.

2

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

6

3

3

LO

LO

3

3

7

7

6

7

HI

5

6

4

5

J6


Application Data



Size 0 and 1 (Standard)

2.25-2.43

2.44-2.75

2.76-3.25

3.26-3.43

3.44-4.03

4.04-4.43

4.44-4.94

4.95-5.36

5.37-5.77

5.37-5.77

5.78-6.35

6.36-6.92

6.93-7.99

8.00-8.47

8.48-9.19

9.20-10.0

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

.65-.74

.75-.84

.85-.92

.93-1.02

1.03-1.10

1.11-1.23

1.24-1.38

1.39-1.49

1.50-1.67

1.68-1.79

1.80-1.98

1.99-2.24

10.1-10.7

10.8-12.0

12.1-12.9

13.0-15.1

15.2-16.3

16.4-17.9

C630A

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C113B

C301A

C326A

C356A

C379A

C419A

C466A

C526A

C592A

Heater

Number

CR123

C087A

C097A

C109A

C118A

C131A

C148A

C163A

C184A

C196A

C220A

C239A

C268A

C125B

C137B

C151B

C163B

C180B

C198B

15

15

15

20

7

15

15

15

7

7

7

7

7

7

3

7

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

SE

Rating

Plug

3

3

3

3

20

20

20

20

25

25

3

2

2

2

4

LO

LO

LO

3

3

2

2

3

LO

LO

LO

3

4

2

2

3

3

LO

LO

2

3

LO

LO

LO

LO

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Rec.

Max.

LO

LO

LO

LO

LO

LO

LO

2

5

5

4

5

3

4

2

2

5

6

5

5

5

6

5

4

4

5

3

4

6

3

5

6

4

5

4

4

6

3


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

18.0-19.7

19.8-21.2

21.3-22.3

22.4-23.5

23.6-25.5

25.6-27.0

Heater

Number

CR123

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C303B

C330B

SE

Rating

Plug

30

30

30

40

40

40

2

3

3

3

3

Rec.

3

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

5

5

5

5

6

5

Size 0 and 1 (Ambient Comp.)

2.29-2.47

2.48-2.79

2.80-3.31

3.32-3.70

3.71-4.06

4.07-4.47

4.48-4.95

4.96-5.49

5.50-5.91

5.50-5.91

5.92-6.47

6.48-7.20

7.21-8.22

8.23-8.72

8.73-9.67

9.68-10.4

10.5-11.0

11.1-12.4

12.5-13.2

13.3-15.4

15.5-17.1

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

.66-.76

.77-.84

.85-.93

.94-1.04

1.05-1.15

1.16-1.27

1.28-1.39

1.40-1.55

1.56-1.73

1.74-1.89

1.90-2.05

2.06-2.28

C630A

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C113B

C301A

C326A

C356A

C379A

C419A

C466A

C526A

C592A

C125B

C137B

C151B

C163B

C180B

Heater

Number

CR123

C087A

C097A

C109A

C118A

C131A

C148A

C163A

C184A

C196A

C220A

C239A

C268A

15

15

15

20

7

15

15

15

20

20

20

20

25

7

7

7

7

7

7

3

7

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

SE

Rating

Plug

3

3

3

3


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

17.2-18.1

18.2-20.0

20.1-21.5

21.6-22.5

22.6-23.9

24.0-26.0

26.1-27.0

Heater

Number

CR123

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C303B

C330B

SE

Rating

Plug

25

30

30

30

40

40

40

3

2

2

2

4

LO

LO

2

3

4

2

2

3

3

3

2

2

3

LO

LO

2

2

3

2

2

LO

LO

LO

LO

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Rec.

Max.

LO

LO

LO

LO

LO

LO

LO

2

5

5

4

5

3

4

2

3

5

4

4

5

3

4

6

3

5

6

4

5

5

5

6

4

5

4

4

6

3

3

2

3

3

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Rec.

Max.

3 6

3

3

5

5

6

5

5

5

J

J7

J


Application Data




Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

8.81-9.27

9.28-9.99

10.0-11.1

11.2-12.1

12.2-13.0

13.1-15.5

15.6-16.8

16.9-18.0

18.1-19.7

19.8-21.6

21.7-23.9

24.0-25.5

25.6-28.2

28.3-31.6

31.7-34.7

34.8-37.8

37.9-40.6

40.7-43.4

Heater

Number

CR123

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B

C163B

C180B

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C303B

C330B

C366B

C400B

C440B

C460B

30

40

40

50

20

25

25

30

SE

Rating

Plug

15

20

20

20

20

50

50

50

60

60

2

2

3

2

3

3

4

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

2

2

Rec.

3

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

5

5

5

4

5

6

5

5

6

6

5

5

5

5

6

5

6

5


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

9.04-9.61

9.62-10.5

10.6-11.6

11.7-12.5

12.6-13.6

13.7-16.7

16.8-17.9

18.0-18.7

18.8-20.4

20.5-22.7

22.8-24.7

24.8-26.3

26.4-29.5

29.6-32.5

32.6-36.7

36.8-41.9

42.0-43.2

43.3-43.4

Heater

Number

CR123

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B

C163B

C180B

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C303B

C330B

C366B

C400B

C440B

C460B

30

30

40

40

20

20

25

25

SE

Rating

Plug

15

20

20

20

50

50

50

50

60

60

3

3

2

3

3

3

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

4

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Rec.

Max.

2

3

3

3

5

5

5

4

5

5

5

6

5

6

5

6

6

6

5

5

5

6


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

17.8-18.4

18.5-21.1

21.2-22.1

22.2-26.0

26.1-28.0

28.1-31.3

31.4-33.3

33.4-34.3

34.4-40.9

41.0-44.7

44.8-51.0

51.1-52.0

52.1-55.4

55.5-63.3

63.4-66.1

66.2-73.5

73.6-82.2

82.3-86.9

Heater

Number

CR123

F233B

F243B

F207B

F300B

F327B

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

70

100

100

100

50

50

50

70

SE

Rating

Plug

30

30

30

40

40

100

100

100

150

150

3

LO

LO

2

3

2

3

3

3

2

3

3

2

3

3

3

3

Rec.

2

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

5

5

5

5

5

6

4

5

5

5

4

5

5

4

5

5

5

5


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

28.8-32.0

32.1-34.2

34.3-36.7

36.8-43.9

44.0-46.6

46.7-52.6

52.7-55.6

55.7-58.7

58.8-67.1

67.2-70.6

70.7-76.3

76.4-88.7

88.8-93.4

93.5-102.0

103.0-110.0

111.0-122.0

123.0-131.0

Heater

Number

CR123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

28.8-32.0

32.1-34.2

34.3-36.7

36.8-43.8

43.9-46.6

46.7-52.6

52.7-55.6

55.7-58.7

58.8-67.1

67.2-70.6

70.7-76.3

76.4-88.7

88.8-93.4

93.5-105.0

106.0-114.0

115.0-128.0

129.0-130.0

Heater

Number

CR123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C

70

100

100

100

100

100

150

150

SE

Rating

Plug

50

50

70

70

150

150

150

150

150

70

100

100

100

100

100

150

150

SE

Rating

Plug

50

50

70

70

150

150

150

150

150

2

2

3

3

2

2

3

2

3

4

3

3

4

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Rec.

Max.

2

3

3

3

5

5

5

5

5

6

5

5

6

4

5

5

6

5

5

5

4

2

2

3

3

2

2

3

2

3

4

3

3

4

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Rec.

Max.

2

3

3

3

5

5

5

5

5

6

5

5

6

4

5

5

6

5

5

5

4

J8


Application Data




Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

28.8-32.0

32.1-34.2

34.3-36.7

36.8-43.9

44.0-46.6

46.7-52.6

52.7-55.6

55.7-58.7

58.8-67.1

67.2-70.6

70.7-76.3

76.4-88.7

88.8-93.4

93.5-102.0

103.0-110.0

111.0-122.0

123.0-131.0

Heater

Number

CR123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C

70

100

100

100

150

150

150

200

SF

Rating

Plug

70

70

70

70

200

200

200

200

200

LO

LO

2

LO

2

2

3

2

LO

LO

2

2

2

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Rec.

Max.

2

2

2

2

5

5

4

4

6

6

4

5

6

4

4

4

4

4

5

5

4


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

28.8-32.0

32.1-34.2

34.3-36.7

36.8-43.8

43.9-46.6

46.7-52.6

52.7-55.6

55.7-58.7

58.8-67.1

67.2-70.6

70.7-76.3

76.4-88.7

88.8-93.4

93.5-105.0

106.0-114.0

115.0-128.0

129.0-130.0

Heater

Number

CR123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C

70

100

100

100

150

150

150

200

SF

Rating

Plug

70

70

70

70

200

200

200

200

200

LO

LO

2

LO

2

2

3

2

LO

LO

2

2

2

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Rec.

Max.

3

3

2

3

5

5

4

4

6

6

4

5

6

4

4

4

4

4

5

5

4

Size 5 – 300:15 CT (Standard and Ambient Comp.)

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

106-115

116-125

126-135

136-151

152-164

165-179

180-195

196-215

216-231

232-255

256-270

Heater

Number

CR123

C592A

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B

SG

Rating

Plug

250

250

250

250

300

300

350

350

400

400

400

2

2

2

2

2

3

Instantaneous

Trip Setting

Rec.

LO

Max.

3

LO

2

2

2

5

4

4

4

5

4

5

4

5

5


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

181-197

198-214

215-238

239-258

259-290

291-346

347-387

388-424

Heater

Number

CR123

C220A

C239A

C268A

C301A

C326A

C356A

C379A

C419A

SG

Rating

Plug

400

400

500

500

500

600

600

600

Instantaneous

Trip Setting

Rec.

Max.

MIN.

2

MIN

MIN

4

4

4

5

2

MIN

2

3

5

5

5

MAX


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

181-197

198-214

215-238

239-258

259-290

291-346

347-387

388-423

424-467

468-516

517-540

Heater

Number

CR123

C220A

C239A

C268A

C301A

C326A

C356A

C379A

C419A

C466A

C526A

C592A

SK

Rating

Plug

400

400

400

500

500

800

800

800

1000

1000

1000

LO

LO

2

LO

2

2

Instantaneous

Trip Setting

Rec.

Max.

LO 4

2

3

LO

2

4

5

4

5

4

5

5

4

4

5

J

J9

J


Application Data


Overload Relays

Electronic Overloads for Circuit Breaker Controllers

Tripping current is 120% of Dial setting. Motors with 1.15-1.25

service factor, set dial to motor FLA Motors with 1.0 service factor, set dial to 0.9 motor FLA.

4

4

3

4

3

3

2

2

NEMA Size FLA Range in Amps Catalog Number

1

1

0.8 to 1.7

1.8 to 3.4

CR324CXD

CR324CXE

1

2

1

1

3.2 to 6.8

6.5 to 13.5

13 to 27

6.5 to 13.5

CR324CXF

CR324CXG

CR324CXH

CR324DXG

5 ➀

5 ➀

5 ➀

6 ➁

6 ➁

13 to 27

25 to 50

17 to 35

35 to 70

65 to 135

17 to 35

35 to 70

65 to 135

35 to 70

65 to 135

130 to 270

130 to 270

260 to 540

CR324DXH

CR324DXJ

CR324FXK

CR324FXL

CR324FXM

CR324FXK

CR324FXL

CR324FXM

CR324GXN

CR324GXP

CR324GXQ

CR324HXS

CR324HXT

➀ 300:15 CT’s

➁ 800:5 CT’s

Breaker Frame & Type

E Mag. & Thermal Mag.











E,F&G Mag. & Thermal Mag.



G Mag. & Thermal Mag.



G,K Mag. & Thermal Mag.

K Mag. & Thermal Mag

Overload Relays for Compact 6" Starter CL45A310MJ, NEMA Size 1

FLA Range in Amps

0.4-.65

0.65-1.1

1-1.5

1.3-1.9

1.8-2.7

2.5-4.1

4.0-6.3

5.5-8.5

8.0-12

10.0-16

14.5-18

17.5-22

21-26

Class 10 Class 20

Catalog Number Catalog Number

RTN1D

RTN1F

RTN1G

RTN1H

RTN1J

RTNIK

RTNIL

RTNIM

RTNIN

RTNIP

RTNIS

RTNIT

RTNIU

RT12K

RT12L

RT12M

RT12N

RT12P

RT12S

RT12T

RT12U

Breaker Frame & Type














J10


Application Data


Heaters for Fused Controllers

The Mag-Break protector is factory adjusted to the minimum trip setting.


1.25, select heaters from the heater table. For continuous rated motors with a service factor of 1.0, multiply the motor full-load current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters.

Overload relay tripping current in 40°C ambient is the minimum value of full-load current multiplied by 1.25.

Provide short-circuit protection in accordance with the

National Electrical Code, except Fuses are not to exceed the value shown in the table.

Suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than the maximum RMS symmetrical amperes indicated in the table below, 600-volts maximum, when protected by an appropriate fuse having an interrupting rating not less than the available short-circuit current.

Table 1–Maximum Fuse and Short-Circuit Rating

Class RK Fuse Class J Fuse

NEMA Max.

Size

Clip

Max. RMS

Sym. Amps

Max.

Clip

Max. RMS

Sym. Amps

3

4

1

2

5

30A

60

100

200

400

100,000

100,000

100,000

100,000

100,000

60A

100

200

400

600

100,000

100,000

100,000

100,000

100,000

Class K-1, K-5 Fuse

Max.

Clip

Max. RMS

Sym. Amps

Fuse per

Overload

Heater

Table

5,000

5,000

5,000

10,000

10,000

WARNING: Opening of the fuse(s) may be an indication that a fault current has been interrupted. To provide continued protection against fire or shock hazard, all current-carrying parts and other components of the motor controller should be examined and replaced if damaged. If heater burnout occurs, the complete overload relay must be replaced.

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph., 3-Heater

Size 1

17.2-18.1

18.2-20.0

20.1-21.5

21.6-22.5

22.6-23.9

24.0-26.3

26.4-27.0

Heater

Number

CR123

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C303B

C330B

Maximum

Fuse

Rating

60➀

60➀

60➀

60➀

60➀

60➀

60➀

Size 0 and 1 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)

1.90-2.05

2.06-2.28

2.29-2.47

2.48-2.79

2.80-3.31

3.32-3.70

3.71-4.06

4.07-4.47

4.48-4.95

4.96-5.49

5.50-5.91

5.92-6.47

6.48-7.20

7.21-8.22

8.23-8.72

8.73-9.67

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph., 3-Heater

.41-.45

.46-.49

.50-.53

.54-.59

.60-.65

.66-.76

.77-.84

.85-.93

.94-1.04

1.05-1.15

1.16-1.27

1.28-1.39

1.40-1.55

1.56-1.73

1.74-1.89

9.68-10.4

10.5-11.0

11.1-12.4

12.5-13.2

13.3-15.4

15.5-17.1

C526A

C592A

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C239A

C268A

C301A

C326A

C356A

C379A

C419A

C466A

Heater

Number

CR123

C054A

C060A

C066A

C071A

C078A

C087A

C097A

C109A

C118A

C131A

C148A

C163A

C184A

C196A

C220A

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B

C163B

C180B

25

30

30

35➀

15

20

20

25

10

12

15

15

6

6

6

10

3

6

6

6

3

3

3

3

Maximum

Fuse

Rating

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

35➀

40➀

45➀

50➀

60➀

60➀


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph., 3-Heater

5.48-5.85

5.86-6.47

6.48-7.35

7.36-8.06

8.07-9.03

9.04-9.61

9.62-10.5

10.6-11.6

11.7-12.5

12.6-13.6

13.7-16.7

16.8-17.9

18.0-18.7

18.8-20.4

20.5-22.7

22.8-24.7

24.8-26.3

26.4-29.5

29.6-32.5

32.6-36.7

36.8-41.9

42.0-43.2

43.3-45.0

C163B

C180B

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C303B

C330B

C366B

C400B

C440B

C460B

Heater

Number

CR123

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B

60

60

70➀

80➀

80➀

90➀

90➀

100➀

100➀

100➀

100➀

100➀

100➀

Maximum

Fuse

Rating

20

20

35

40

45

50

25

30

30

35

➀ See Table 1 for maximum fuse and short-circuit rating.

J

J11


Application Data


Heaters for Fused Controllers


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph., 3-Heater

19.0-19.3

19.4-22.1

22.2-23.4

23.5-27.0

27.1-29.1

29.2-31.8

31.9-33.9

34.0-37.6

37.7-41.9

42.0-47.7

47.8-52.1

52.2-55.8

55.9-59.7

59.8-68.1

68.2-71.5

71.6-78.2

78.3-87.5

87.6-90.0

Heater

Number

CR123

F233B

F243B

F270B

F300B

F327B

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

Maximum

Fuse

Rating

70

80

80

90

100

110➀

125➀

125➀

150➀

175➀

175➀

200➀

200➀

200➀

200➀

200➀

200➀

200➀


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph., 3-Heater

17.8-18.4

18.5-21.1

21.2-22.1

22.2-26.1

26.2-28.0

28.1-31.3

31.4-33.3

33.4-34.3

34.4-40.9

41.0-44.7

44.8-51.0

51.1-52.0

52.1-55.4

55.5-63.3

63.4-66.1

66.2-73.5

73.6-82.2

82.3-90.0

Heater

Number

CR123

F233B

F243B

F270B

F300B

F327B

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

Maximum

Fuse

Rating

70

80

80

90

100

110➀

125➀

125➀

150➀

150➀

175➀

200➀

200➀

200➀

200➀

200➀

200➀

200➀

J


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph., 3-Heater

27.1-32.2

32.3-34.0

34.1-36.8

36.9-44.6

44.7-48.4

48.5-53.9

54.0-57.4

57.5-60.0

60.1-69.5

69.6-71.7

71.8-79.9

80.0-92.3

92.4-97.0

97.1-108

109-118

119-131

132-135

Heater

Number

CR123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C

Maximum

Fuse

Rating

110

125

125

150

175

175

200

225➀

225➀

250➀

275➀

300➀

350➀

400➀

400➀

400➀

400➀

➀ See Table 1 (page J-17) for maximum fuse and short-circuit rating.


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph., 3-Heater

28.8-32.0

32.1-34.2

34.3-36.7

36.8-43.9

44.0-46.6

46.7-52.6

52.7-55.6

55.7-58.7

58.8-67.1

67.2-70.6

70.7-76.3

76.4-88.7

88.8-93.4

93.5-105

106-114

115-128

129-131

132-135

Heater

Number

CR123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C

F174C

Maximum

Fuse

Rating

110

125

125

150

175

175

200

225➀

225➀

250➀

275➀

300➀

350➀

350➀

400➀

400➀

400➀

400➀

Size 5 – 300:15CT (Standard and Ambient Comp.)

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph., 3-Heater

109-118

119-128

129-138

139-155

156-168

169-184

185-200

201-221

222-237

238-262

263-270

Heater

Number

CR123

C592A

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B

Maximum

Fuse

Rating

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

Electronic Overload Table for Fusible Controllers

Tripping current is 120% of Dial setting. Motors with 1.15-1.25 service factor, set dial to motor FLA Motors with 1.0 service factor, set dial to 0.9 motor FLA.

4

5 ➀

5 ➀

5 ➀

3

3

4

4

6 ➁

6 ➁

NEMA Size FLA Range in Amps Catalog Number Max. Fuse in Amps

1 0.8 to 1.7

CR324CXD Class R 30 Class J 60

1

1

1

1

1.8 to 3.4

3.2 to 6.8

6.5 to 13.5

13 to 27

CR324CXE

CR324CXF

CR324CXG

CR324CXH

60 100 2

2

2

3

6.5 to 13.5

13 to 27

25 to 50

17 to 35

CR324DXG

CR324DXH

CR324DXJ

CR324FXK 100 200

35 to 70

65 to 135

17 to 35

35 to 70

65 to 135

35 to 70

65 to 135

130 to 270

130 to 270

260 to 540

CR324FXL

CR324FXM

CR324FXK

CR324FXL

CR324FXM

CR324GXN

CR324GXP

CR324GXQ

CR324HXS

CR324HXT

200

400

600

400

600

Class L 1200

➀ 300:15 CT’s

➁ 800:5 CT’s

J12


Application Data

Starter Fuse Selection

The following tables are furnished as a guide. Check vendor fuse characteristics before making final selection.

200 and 208 Volts

Size

1

2

3

4

5

5

7 1/2

10

15

20

25

30

40

Hp

1/2

3/4

1

1 1/2

2

3

50

60

75

BMC–Bussman Fuse

CSC–Chase Shawmut Fuse

16.3

25.3

31.3

45.1

591

731

881

120

Typical

FLA

2.3

3.2

3.9

5.3

7.1

10.6

150

174

210

30

30

60

100

100

100

200

200

Switch

Amp

30

30

30

30

30

30

400

400

400

UL Class J

Time Delay No Time DelayBMC CSC

CSC# AJT Clip CSC# A4J Clip FRN

Time-Delay RK-5

Clip TR

6

8

3

5

30

30

30

30

10

10

15

20

30

30

30

30

2.8

4

5

7

30

30

30

30

3.5

4.5

6.25

8

10

15

25

30

50

60

90

100

125

175

225

250

300

30

30

30

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

400

25

30

45

60

90

110

150

175

200

225

300

350

450

30

30

60

60

100

200

200

200

200

400

400

400

600

9

12

20

30

40

60

70

90

100

150

175

200

250

30

30

30

30

60

60

100

100

100

200

200

200

400

125

175

225

225

300

40

60

90

100

12

15

25

30

100

100

200

200

30

30

60

60

Clip

30

30

30

30

30

30

400

400

400

230 Volts

Size

1

2

3

4

5

6

14.2

22.0

27.2

39.2

39.2

51.4

63.6

76.6

Typical

FLA

2.0

2.8

3.4

4.6

6.2

9.2

104

130

151

183

240

296

348

468

5

7 1/2

10

15

15

20

25

30

Hp

1/2

3/4

1

1 1/2

2

3

40

50

60

75

100

125

150

200

100

100

100

100

30

30

60

60

Switch

Amp

30

30

30

30

30

30

200

200

400

400

400

600

600

600

100

100

150

200

225

300

350

450

500

–

40

60

60

80

10

15

25

30

UL Class J

Time Delay No Time Delay

CSC# AJT Clip CSC# A4J Clip

6

8

3

4

30

30

30

30

10

15

15

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

60

60

60

100

25

30

45

60

90

–

110

150

100

–

200

200

30

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

400

600

600

–

175

200

225

300

350

400

600

600

–

–

200

200

400

400

400

400

600

600

–

–

17.5

25

35

50

–

60

80

100

BMC

FRN

2.5

3.5

4

6.25

8

12

125

150

175

225

300

350

450

500

Time-Delay RK-5

–

60

100

100

30

30

60

60

Clip

30

30

30

30

30

30

200

200

200

400

400

400

600

600

–

80

100

100

25

30

40

60

TR

3

4

5.6

8

10

15

150

200

225

300

350

450

500

600

–

100

100

100

30

30

60

60

30

30

30

30

CSC

Clip

30

30

200

200

400

400

400

600

600

600

J13

J


Application Data

Starter Fuse Selection

460 Volts

Size

1

2

3

4

5

6

65.0

75.5

91.5

120

148

172

224

295

343

396

453

7.1

11.0

13.6

19.6

25.7

31.8

38.3

52.0

Typical

FLA

1.0

1.4

1.7

2.3

3.1

4.6

50

60

75

100

125

150

200

250

300

350

400

5

7 1/2

10

15

20

25

30

40

Hp

1/2

3/4

1

1 1/2

2

3

100

200

200

200

400

400

400

600

600

600

600

60

60

100

100

30

30

30

60

Switch

Amp

30

30

30

30

30

30

60

80

100

110

150

175

225

250

300

450

500

600

–

20

30

40

50

5

8

10

15

UL Class J


CSC# AJT CLIP CSC# A4J CLIP

1.5

2

3

4

30

30

30

30

3

3

6

6

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

60

60

10

15

25

35

40

50

90

100

60

60

100

100

30

30

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

200

400

400

400

600

600

600

–

110

125

150

175

225

225

300

350

500

600

–

–

–

200

200

200

200

400

400

400

400

600

600

–

–

–

80

90

110

150

200

225

300

350

400

450

500

9

15

17.5

25

35

40

45

60

BMC

FRS

1.25

1.6

2

2.8

3.5

5

60

60

100

100

200

200

200

400

400

400

400

600

600

30

30

60

60

30

30

30

30

Time-Delay K-5

Clip

CSC

TRS

30

30

30

30

1.4

2

2.5

4

20

30

40

50

5

7

10

15

60

75

100

110

150

175

225

250

350

400

500

600

600

100

200

200

200

400

400

400

400

600

600

600

60

60

60

100

30

30

30

30

Clip

30

30

30

30

30

30

J

575 Volts

Size

1

2

3

4

5

6

7 1/2

10

15

20

25

30

40

50

Hp

3/4

1

11⁄2

2

3

5

60

75

100

125

150

200

250

300

350

400

8.8

10.9

15.7

20.6

25.4

30.6

41.6

52.0

Typical

FLA

1.1

1.4

1.8

2.5

3.7

5.7

60.4

73.2

96.0

118

138

179

236

274

317

363

60

100

100

100

30

30

60

60

Switch

Amp

30

30

30

30

30

30

200

200

200

400

400

400

600

600

600

600

60

80

90

125

150

175

225

300

350

450

500

600

25

35

40

45

6

10

15

15

UL Class J


CSC# AJT CLIP CSC# A4J CLIP

3

4

2

2

30

30

30

30

3

6

6

10

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

60

60

60

15

20

30

35

45

60

80

100

60

60

100

100

30

30

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

200

400

400

400

600

600

600

110

125

150

175

225

225

300

400

500

600

–

–

200

200

200

200

400

400

400

400

600

600

–

–

35

40

45

60

10

15

20

25

BMC

FRS

1.25

1.6

2.25

2.8

4.5

7

70

90

110

150

175

225

300

350

400

450

60

60

100

100

200

200

200

400

400

400

400

600

30

30

60

60

30

30

30

30

Time-Delay K-5

Clip

CSC

TRS

30

30

30

30

1.6

2

3

4

25

35

40

45

6

9

15

15

60

80

90

125

150

175

225

300

350

450

500

600

60

60

60

100

30

30

30

60

Clip

30

30

30

30

30

30

100

200

200

200

400

400

400

600

600

600

J14


Application Data

Control Transformer Fusing

600V Type ATMR or Equivalent

XFMR

VA

200-230V

60HZ

60 1

240V

60HZ

380-400V

50HZ

1 3/4

416V

50HZ

6/10

440-480V

60HZ

1/2

575-600V

60HZ

1/2

75 1-1/2 1-1/2 8/10 8/10

100 2 2 1-1/4 1

3/4

1

6/10

3/4

150 3-1/2 3

200 4 4

250 5

300 6

500 6 6

5

6

1-1/2

2

2

6

1-1/2

2

2

6

1-1/2

2

2

3-1/2 3-1/2 2

5

1-1/4

1-1/2

2

2

4

Secondary Volts 250V

Type TRM or Equivalent

110-120V

50HZ

6/10

220-240V

50HZ

3/10

8/10

1

1/2

6/10

1-6/10

2

2-8/10

3-2/10

5

8/10

1

1-1/2

1-6/10

2-8/10

Control Fusing for Non-CPT Applications

Type Control

Line to Line

Line to Neutral

Common Control

Separate Source

Fuse Amps (Class CC)

10

10

6

6

VA

60

100

150

200

250

300

500

Typical CPT Ratings (480V/120V Shown)

%R %X

Open Circuit

Secondary Volts

9.05

6.39

5.02

5.09

1.03

1.18

1.01

1.06

131.9

129.4

127.3

126.2

6.81

5.15

5.84

.88

.73

1.45

127.8

126.4

128.7

Heat Loss Considerations

In determining the heat loss of a motor control center for air conditioning requirements, 250 watts per foot of lineup is a reasonable assumption.

Actual heat loss will vary due to section loading and diversity factors. A typical motor control center may operate normally at 60 percent of maximum possible loading.

Fully rated circuit breaker starters with CPT’s, approximate losses are:

Size 1– 27 Watts

Size 2– 57 Watts

Size 3–130 Watts

Size 4–200 Watts

Size 5–300 Watts

Size 6–650 Watts

Heat losses for feeders and mains vary depending on frame size, loading and type of trip with electronic trips having lower losses. The following table provides a general guide for estimating losses assuming 80 percent loading. For critical applications refer to the Company.

Type

Molded Case

Breaker Frame

Insulated Case

Power Break

Frame

SE150

SF250

SG600

SK800

SK1200

800A

1600A

2000A

2500A

Loss (Watts)

15

20

25

40

50

80

210

305

375

Typical losses for transformers:

1kVA, 1-Ph

5 kVA, 1-Ph

75 Watts

190 Watts

9 kVA, 3-Ph 295 Watts



Horizontal and vertical bus losses, when loaded to capacity are approximately 100 watts per section.

Solid State Starters or VFDs will typically generate 3 watts per ampere of load during operation.

J

J15

J


Application Data

Motor Loads

NEMA Contactor Ratings

Description 1

2

Normal Starting Duty HP/KW rating by NEMA Size

2

3

3

7.5

4

–

5

–

6

–

Single Phase

115V

230V

200V

3 7.5

15 – – –

7.5/5.5

10/7.5

25/18.5

40/30 75/55 150/110

230V 7.5/5.5

15/11 30/22 50/37 100/75 200/150

Three Phase 380/415V 10/7.5

25/18.5

50/37 75/55 150/110 300/260

460V

575V

10/7.5

25/18.5

50/37 100/75 200/150 400/260

10/7.5

25/18.5

50/37 100/75 200/150 400/260

Non-Motor Loads

When selecting contactors for non-motor loads, the following load characteristics should be considered:

1. Voltage and maximum continuous current.

2. Maximum peak inrush current and duration.

3. RMS current and duration of maximum current on cyclic loads.

4. Frequency of operation.

5. Maximum interrupting current, voltage, power factor and wave form.

6. Available short-circuit current.

Non-motor load ratings are based on the use of two poles to control single-phase loads and three poles to control three-phase loads.

Capacitor switching, requires special considerations. A discharged capacitor acts essentially like a short circuit, and the inrush current is limited by the impedance connected in series with the capacitor which includes connecting cables.

Therefore, the maximum capacitance which can be switched by a contactor will increase with higher series impedance. Switching more than one capacitor or capacitor bank in close electrical proximity to each other should be avoided as the energized capacitor bank can increase the inrush current to the second bank when it is energized.

Reactors or resistors may be required between the two capacitor banks to limit inrush currents.

NEMA Standards require shunt capacitors to operate satisfactorily at 135 percent of rated KVAR due to manufacturing tolerances and other variations. The higher inrush and steady state currents associated with these capacitors should be taken into consideration.

NEMA Publication ICS2-210 covers non-motor loads.

NEMA Contactor Ratings

Contactor

Maximum

Cont.

Inrush

Size of Amps Current

(Amps

Peak)

2

3

0

1

18

27

45

90

140

288

483

947

4

5

6

135

270

540

1581

3163

6326

Tung

sten➀

Resistive

Lamps

Loads➀

10

15

30

60

120

240

480

18

27

45

90

135

270

540

Transformer Primary Switching (kVA)

Transformers having inrush currents of not more than 20 times FLA

Transformers having inrush currents of over

20 through 40 times FLA

Single-Phase Volts

120 240 480 600

0.6

1.2

1.2

2.4

2.4

4.9

3

6.2

1.8

3.6

Three-Phase Volts

208 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 208 240 480 600

2.1

4.3

4.2

8.5

5.2

11

Single-Phase Volts

0.3

0.6

0.6

1.2

1.2

2.5

1.5

3.1

0.9

1.8

Three-Phase Volts

1.0

2.1

2.1

4.3

2.6

5.3

2.1

4.1

4.1

8.1

6.8

14

27

14

27

54

8.3

16

27

54

10

20

34

68

108 135

6.3

12

20

41

81

7.2

14

23

47

14

28

47

94

18

35

59

117

1.0

2.0

3.4

6.8

94 188 234 14

2.1

4.1

6.8

14

27

4.2

8.1

14

27

54

5.2

10

17

34

68

3.1

6.1

10

20

41

3.6

7.0

12

24

47

7.2

14

23

47

94

8.9

18

29

59

117

➀ 300-volts maximum, Tungsten lamp loads include infrared lamps having Tungsten filaments.

➁ Resistive loads include electric discharge lamps such as fluorescent, mercury, vapor, etc.

J16


Application Data

Non-Motor Loads

NEMA Contactor Ratings for Single Capacitor or Capacitor Bank Switching

Size of

Controller

Continuous Three-Phase Rating of Capacitor

Ratings RMS

Maximum Size of Three-Phase Capacitor in kVAR or Available Current➀ in Amperes RMS Sym.

Amperes 3000 5000 10,000 14,000 18,000 22,000

At 230 Volts, 60 Hertz

2 45

3

4

90

135

12

27

40

8

27

40

4

15

40

3

11

30

2

9

24

2

7

20

80

160

80

160

80

160

80

160

80

160

75

160

5

6

270

540


2 45

5

6

3

4

90

135

270

540

25

53

80

160

320

16

53

80

160

320

8

31

80

160

320

6

23

61

160

320

4

18

49

160

320

4

15

41

149

320


2 45

3

4

90

135

5

6

270

540

31

67

100

200

400

20

67

100

200

400

10

39

100

200

400

7

29

77

200

400

6

23

61

200

400

5

19

51

189

400

Disconnect minimums: thermal magnetic breakers rated 135%, fused switch rated 165%.

5

6

3

4

00

0

1

2

7

8

9

NEMA Contactor for Heating Loads

NEMA

Size

Continuous

Current

Rating

Amps

9

18

27

45

90

135

270

540

810

1215

2250

50

75

150

300

450

700

1290

2-Pole

1-Ph

575 Volts

3-Pole

3-Ph

5

10

15

25

9

18

25

43

86

130

260

515

775

1200

2200

40

60

120

240

360

540

1020

2-Pole

1-Ph

Maximum kW Ratings➁

460 Volts 230 Volts

3-Pole

3-Ph

2-Pole

1-Ph

3-Pole

3-Ph

4

8

12

20

7

14

20

34

2

4

6

10

3.5

7

10

17

68

105

210

415

625

960

1740

20

30

60

120

180

270

510

34

52

105

210

315

480

880

10

15

30

60

90

135

255

115 Volts

2-Pole

1-Ph

3-Pole

3-Ph

3

5

1

2

1.75

3.5

5

8.5

17

26

52

105

155

240

440

Application of Starters for Heating and Lighting Loads

1. No Tungsten lamp loads, No transformer loads.

2. Contactor loading must meet table above.

3. Overload heaters may be sized for maximum

➂

.

4. Disconnect must be thermal magnetic or fused switch rated per NEC @ 125% of load amps.

➀ Available at capacitor terminals.

➁ Applicable only to resistive loads having inrush currents not exceeding 1.5 times the continuous current rating.

③ Spectra CB will permit deletion of overload heaters for these loads.

J17

J


Application Data

J

Non-Motor Loads

Application Rated

Maximum kVA of Transformer for Primary Switching (50/60Hz)a

Catalog

Number

CL00

CL01

CL02

CL25

CL04

CL45

CL06

CL07

CL08

CL09

CL10

CK75

CK08

CK09

CK95

CK10

CK11

CK12

Max. Peak

Closing Current

450 Amps

450 Amps

450 Amps

550 Amps

550 Amps

550 Amps

1000 Amps

1000 Amps

1000 Amps

1280 Amps

1280 Amps

1850 Amps

1850 Amps

2500 Amps

3700 Amps

7000 Amps

7000 Amps

8400 Amps

10

17.5

11.4

20

14.2

25

18.5

32

4.2

7.5

5.7

10

7.1

12.5

8.5

15

22.8

40

28.5

50

45.7

80

2.8

5

3.4

6

1.8

3.2

2.2

4.0

120V

0.6

1.1

0.8

1.5

1.2

2.2

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

Phase

1

3

1

3

1

3

14.7

26

17.2

30.3

19.7

34.6

24.6

43.3

5.9

10.4

7.2

13

10

17.3

12.3

21.6

32.0

55.4

39.5

69.3

49.4

86.6

79.2

138.6

3.8

7.0

4.8

8.6

2.0

3.8

3.1

5.5

Inrush = 20 x Normal

208V 240V 480V

1

1.9

1.4

2.6

1.2

2.2

1.7

3.0

1.7

3.1

2.4

4.2

2.5

4.5

3.7

6.5

4.5

8.0

5.7

10

3.5

6.3

5.2

9.1

6.3

11.2

8.0

14.0

6.8

12

8.5

15

11.4

20

14.2

25

17.1

30

20

35

22.8

40

28.5

50

37.1

65

45.7

80

57.1

100

91.4

160

52

91

64

112

80

140

128

224

32

56

40

70

24

42

28

49

9.5

16.8

12

21

16

28

20

35

Maximum Three-Phase kVAR Rating for Switching Capacitors

Catalog 10,000 Amps RMS 22,000 Amp RMS

Number Maximum Available Fault Current Maximum Available Fault Current

CL00

200V

3

230V

3

460V

5

575V

5.7

200V

1.5

230V

1.5

460V

2.5

575V

2.8

CL01

CL02

CL25

CL04

435

6.5

9

12.5

4.5

6.5

9

12.5

9.5

11

15

21

11

12.5

17.5

24

2.2

3.2

4.5

6.2

2.2

3.2

4.5

6.2

4.5

5.5

7.5

10.5

5.5

6.2

8.2

12

CL45

CL06

CL07

CL08

CL09

CL10

CK75

CK08

CK09

CK95

CL10

CL11

CK12

17

22

25

30

40

50

60

70

95

105

135

190

250

17

22

25

30

40

50

60

70

95

105

135

190

250

30

40

45

50

65

80

100

130

165

190

260

325

400

35

50

65

70

95

120

150

175

230

288

370

450

600

8.5

11

12.5

15

20

25

60

70

95

105

135

190

250

8.5

11

12.5

15

20

25

60

70

95

105

135

190

250

15

20

22.5

25

32.5

40

100

130

165

190

260

325

400

230

288

370

450

600

17.5

25

32.5

35

47.5

60

150

175

31.3

55

34.2

60

48.5

85

62.8

110

14.2

25

20

35

22.8

40

28.5

50

85.7

150

97.1

170

160

280

6.4

11.2

7.8

13.7

9.7

17

12

21

600V

2.1

3.8

3.0

5.2

4.4

7.7

5

8.75

5.7

10

7.1

12.5

9.2

16

3.5

6.2

4.2

7.5

2.1

3.7

2.8

5

11.4

20

14.2

25

22.8

40

1.4

2.5

1.7

3

0.9

1.6

1.1

2.0

120V

0.3

0.5

0.4

0.7

0.6

1.1

7.3

13

8.6

15.1

9.8

17.3

12.3

21.6

2.9

5.2

3.6

6.5

5.0

8.6

6.1

10.8

16.0

27.7

19.7

34.6

24.7

43.3

39.6

69.3

1.9

3.5

2.4

4.3

1.0

1.9

1.5

2.7

Inrush = 40 x Normal

208V 240V 480V

0.5

0.9

0.7

1.3

0.6

1.1

0.8

1.5

0.8

1.5

1.2

2.1

1.2

2.2

1.8

3.2

2.2

4.0

2.8

5

3.1

5.6

4.0

7.0

1.7

3.1

2.6

4.5

3.4

6

4.2

7.5

5.7

10

7.1

12.5

8.5

15

10

17.5

11.4

20

14.2

25

18.5

32

22.8

40

28.5

50

45.7

80

40

70

64

112

26

45

32

56

12

21

14

24.5

16

28

20

35

4.7

8.4

6.0

10.5

8.0

14

10

17.5

15.6

27.5

17.1

30

24.2

42.5

31.4

55

7.1

12.5

10

16

11.4

20

14.2

25

42.8

75

48.5

85

80

140

3.2

5.6

3.9

6.8

4.8

8.5

6

10.5

600V

1

1.9

1.5

2.6

2.2

3.8

J18


Application Data

Non-Motor Loads

Application Rated

Utilization in Category AC-1, General Use

3-pole Contactors

Max. operational current at ambient temperature of: (for all voltages)

40°C

55°C

70°C

A

A

A

CL Contactors

00 01 02 25 04 45 06 07 08 09 10 75 08 09

CK Contactors

95 10 11 12

25 25 32 32 54 55 80 100 102 120 120 150 175 200 310 500 600 650

25 25 32 32 54 55 80 100 102 120 120 150 175 200 310 425 510 546

20 20 25 25 41 44 62 78 81 80 80 130 155 175 270 335 432 468

4-pole Contactors

Max. operational current at ambient temperature of: (for all voltages)

40°C

55°C

70°C

A

A

A

CL Contactors CK Contactors

01 02 03 04 06 07 08 09 08 09 95 10 11 12

25 32 40 54 70 100 110 120 175 200 310 500 550 650

25 32 40 54 70 100 110 120 175 200 310 425 462 543

20 25 28 41 52 78 88 80 155 175 270 335 462 468

Horsepower/kilowatt ratings are shown below

CL06

CL07

CL08

CL09

CL10

CK75

CK08

CK09

Catalog General Purpose

Number Ratings

CL00

CL01

25

25

CL02

CL25

CL04

CL45

32

32

54

55

CK95

CK10

CK11

CK12

80

100

110(O) 102 (E)

140 (O) 120 (E)

140 (O) 120 (E)

150

175

200

310

500

600

650(E) 750 (O)

Max. FLA

10

13.8

17.5

22,22,17➀

32A

34,34,27➀

48

62

68

80

104,96,80➀

140

156

192

302

398

480

602

1 Phase-HP A

115V 230V

.5 (9.8)

.75 (13.8)

1.5 (10)

2 (12)

1 (16)

1.5 (20)

2 (24)

3 (34)

3 (17)

3 (17)

5 (28)

5 (28)

3 (34)

5 (56)

5 (56)

7.5 (80)

10 (100)

10 (100)

15 (135)

–

–

–

–

–

7.5 (40)

10 (50)

15 (68)

15 (68)

20 (88)

25 (110)

30 (136)

–

–

–

–

–

200V

3 (11)

3 (11)

5 (17.5)

5 (17.5)

10 (32)

10 (32)

15 (48)

20 (62)

20 (62)

25 (78)

30 (92)

40 (120)

50 (149.5)

60 (169.4)

100 (285)

125 (358)

150 (414)

200 (552)

3 Phase-HP A

230V 460V

3 (9.6)

3 (9.6)

5 (7.6)

7.5 (11)

5 (15.2)

7.5 (22)

10 (28)

10 (28)

10 (14)

15. (21)

20 (27)

25 (34)

15 (42)

20 (54)

25 (68)

30 (80)

40 (104)

50 (130)

60 (145)

75 (192)

100 (248)

150 (360)

200 (480)

250 (602)

30 (40)

40 (52)

50 (65)

60 (77)

75 (96)

100 (124)

125 (156)

150 (180)

250 (302)

300 (361)

400 (477)

500 (590)

575V

7.5 (9)

10 (11)

!5 (17)

15 (17)

25 (27)

25 (27)

40 (41)

50 (52)

60 (62)

75 (77)

75 (77)

125 (125)

125 (125)

150 (144)

300 (289)

400 (382)

500 (472)

600 (574)

Power In

380/400V kW A

4 (9)

5.5 (12)

7.5 (18)

11 (25)

16 (32)

18.5 (40)

22 (50)

30 (65)

37 (80)

45 (95)

55 (105)

75 (154)

90 (185)

132 (250)

160 (310)

220 (420)

280 (550)

375 (700)

J19

J

J


Application Data

Publication References

Construction Equipment and Components

Publication

GEP-1100

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

GET-2779

GEZ-7000

GET-7002

Power Break Insulated Case Circuit Breakers

GET-6211

GEZ-7001

Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

GEI-86150

GEK-7310

GEZ-7002

GES-6227

GES-6228

Disconnect Switches

GET-6205

GEZ-7003

Ground Fault Protective Products

GET-2964

GEZ-7003

Panelboards

GET-6592

GEA-11316

Description

Buylog Catalog–Covers Full Line of Products

Application and Selection Guide for Molded Case Circuit Breakers

MCCB Time-Current Curves

Spectra RMS Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection and Application

Time-Current Curves

Installation and Operation Instructions

Maintenance Manual

Type AKR Time-Current Curves

Type AKR MicroVersaTrip RMS-9 Time Current Curves

MicroVersaTrip Ground Fault Time-Current Curves

Type HPC High-Pressure Contact Switches, Technical

Type HPC Time-Current Curves

Ground Break Systems

Ground Break Time-Current Curves

“A” series Tech. Specifications

A Series

Stocking Location

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Factory Automation Products

Publication➀

GE Fanuc Programmable Logic Control

GFW-0067

GE Fanuc I/O

GEK-90486

GFA-089

GEI-86150

GFA-150

GFT-298

GFA-180

Description

Automation Solutions Catalog

Genius I/O System User’s Manual

Genius I/O System

Installation and Operation Instructions

Field Control™

VersaMax I/O

VersaMax


Charlottesville

Charlottesville

Charlottesville

Bloomington

Charlottesville

Charlottesville

Charlottesville

Motor Control Center Equipment

Publication

Spectra Series and 8000-Line MCC

DEA-036

GEF-4628

GEH-4961

Description

Spectra Series Product Brochure

8000-Line Renewal Parts Bulletin

Installation and Maintenance (Instructions)

➀ For more information visit our website at www.gefanuc.com/default2.htm


Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

J20


Application Data

Publication References

General Purpose Controls

Publication

GEP-1260

Magnetic Motor Starters

GEA-10928

GEH-5190

GEH-4774

GEH-4806

GEH-4807

GEH-4869

GEH-5198

GEH-5190

GEH-4775

GEH-4806

GEH-4807

GEH-4839

Pilot Devices

GEA-10877

Relays and Timers

GEA-10639

GEH-4115

GEH-4120

GEH-4147

GEH-4139

GEH-6435

DET-069

Variable Speed Drives➀

GEI-100364

GEI-100363

Solid State Starters

DEH-40397

GEH-6533

DEH-40396

DEH-40417

Description

Control Catalog–Covers Full Line of Products

300-Line Magnetic Motor Starters, Descriptive

300-Line Instructions, Nema Size 1, FVNR






300-Line Instructions, Nema Size 1, FVR and 2-Speed





CR104P Push-buttons and Pilot Lights

CR122B, CR122BT, Series A Relays

CR120B AC Relays

CR120B Latched Relays

CR122B Time-Delay Relays

CR122BP Time-Delay Relays

Spectra ECM Instructions

Spectra ECM Product Brochure

AF 300P User Guide

AF 300G User Guide

ASTAT–CD Plus User Manual

ASTAT–CD Plus Instructions

ASTAT–IBP Plus User Manual

ASTAT–IBP Plus Instructions

Web Access

➀ G11/P11 Drives — www.ge.com/industrialsystem/drives/catalog/af300g11/index.htm

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Fort Wayne

Fort Wayne

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington


Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

J21

J


Application Data

J

Electrical Data

Motor horsepower output may also be calculated as follows:

HP = V x A x Pf x EFF

746

Rules of Thumb (Approximation)

At 1800 RPM, a motor develops a 3 lb. – ft. per HP.

At 1200 RPM, a motor develops 4.5 lb – ft. per HP.

At 460 volts, a 3-phase motor draws 1.25 amp per HP.

At 230 volts, a 3-phase motor draws 2.5 amp per HP.

Conversion Formulas

To find

Amperes when

Horsepower is known

Amperes when

Kilowatts is known

Amperes when

Kva is known

Kilowatts

Kva

Horsepower -

(Output)

KW (alternating current) = KVA x Power Factor

KW (direct current) = V x A x .001

KWH = KW x Hours

HP = KW

Motor Efficiency

Alternating Current Three-Phase

HP x 746

1.73 x V x Eff x fp

Kw x 1000

1.73 x V x pf

Kva x 1000

1.73 x V

1.73 x A x V x pf

1000

1.73 x A x V

1000

1.73 x A x V x Eff x pf

746

Values

V=Volts

A or I = Amperes (amps)

Work/P = Watts/Power

KW=Kilowatts

KwH=Kilowatt Hours

KVA=Kilovolt Amperes

Pf=Power Factor, Table

Ph= Phase Factor, Table

Ohms Law

I=E/R

R=E/I

E=IXR

P=IXE

P=IXIXR

kVAR Calculation When Motor Operating

Characteristics Are Known

If motor HP, full-load power factor (PF) and efficiency (eff) are known, its easy to calculate the correct kVAR necessary to improve PF to any value.

Example: 75HP, 3600 RPN, NEMA B motor with full-load PF of 87% and eff. of 92% corrected to 95%PF

Original PF = .87 Cos: Tan: = .567

Desired PF = .95 = Cos: Tan: = .329

Difference = .238

KW = HPx.746 or 75x.746 = 62

Eff. .902

.238 X 62 = 14.8 kVAR (use 15 kVAR)

Defining the Load

Rotating Motion

Horsepower

HP = T x N

Where: T = Torque (lb-in)

N = Speed (RPM)

Accelerating Torque/Force

T

A

5250

Where: T = Torque (lb-ft)

N = Speed (RPM)

HP = T x N

63,000

= WK

2

x N

308t

Linear Motion

HP = F x V

33,000

Where: F = Force or Tension (lb)

V = Velocity (FPM)

HP = F x V

396,000

Where: F = Force or Tension (lb)

V = Velocity (in/min)

Where: T

A

= Accelerating torque

(lb ft)

Where: F

A

(lb-ft)

= Accelerating Force

WK

2

= Total system inertia W = Weight (lb) that must be accelerated.

This includes motor rotor, speed reducer (if used), and load. (lb-ft

2

)

V = Change in velocity (FPM) t = Time (sec.)

Torque

T = F x R

F

A

= W x V

1933t

Where: T = Torque (lb-ft)

F = Force (lb)

R = Radius (ft)

WK 2 – reflected

Reflected WK

2

= WK

2

of Load

(Reduction Ratio)

2

This is for either belt or gear reductions.

FPM to RPM

RPM = FPM

.262 x (diameter in inches)

J22


Application Data

Electrical Data

Centrifugal Loads

Flow Rate:

Torque:

Pressure:

Horsepower:

Fans & Blowers:

Pumps:

Where:

Flow

1

= RPM

1

Flow

2

= RPM

2

Torque

1

Torque

2

= RPM

1

= RPM

2

2

Pres

1

Pres

2

= RPM

1

= RPM

2

2

BHP

1

= RPM

1

BHP

2

3

= RPM2

2

BHP = CFM x PSF

3300 x (fan efficiency)

BH = CFM x PIW


BHP = CFM x PSI


BHP = GPM x TH x (specific gravity)

3960 x (pump efficiency)

BHP = GPM x PSI x (specific gravity)

1713 x (pump efficiency)

BHP = Brake horsepower

PSF = Pounds per square foot

PIW = Pressure in inches of water guage

PSI = Pounds per square inch

GPM = Gallons per minute

TH = Total head (including friction)

Other Useful Formulas

Gear Ratio - Most Favorable

GR = WK

2

+ Tf

2

+ Tf

WKM

2

TM

2

T

M

Where: WK

2

= WK

2 of the load

WK

2

M

= WK

2 of the motor

Tf = Friction torque of the laod

T

M

= Average motor torque during acceleration

If friction torque is low compared to accelerating torque this can be reduced to:

GR = WK

2

WK

2

Duty Cycle Calculations

HP = HP

2

1 t + HP

2

2 t + HP

3 t

2

+ etc

RMS t

1

+ t

2

+ t

3

+ etc

J23

J


Drawings/Tests

G

H

I

E

F

A

B

C

D

M

N

O

J

K

L

1AD

Front View

E9000 MCC Unit Numbering System

The General Electric Engineering Documentation System will accept a 3-character unit address designation consisting of a combination of letters and/or numbers (such as: 12J, ABC,

A1D, 2AD, etc.). The recommended unit addressing system is illustrated and described in the following paragraphs.

Note: Should customer’s (3-character maximum) unit numbering system differ from the following GE unit addressing system, then both can appear when requested on the

CAD-generated motor control center unit summary drawings issued from the factory.

Benefits

When ordering NEMA Class I or II motor control centers where factory interconnections are required, this system produces a uniform numbering format for engineering documentation.

The GE unit numbering system produces a unique unit address designation. When wiremarkers are specified, it ensures consistency and ease of wire tracing/troubleshooting between factory-wired units and other devices within the motor control center lineup such as programmable control I/O racks.

Number the front view arrangement from left-to-right 1, 2, 3 … or A, B, C … Line off the space required for the top and bottom horizontal wireways. Then line off the interconnecting vertical wireway in each vertical section. Note that some units

(including large starters, transformers, panelboards, etc.) may require full width of section and that no separate vertical wireway door will be adjacent to these units.

Example:

Assume that the top horizontal wireway is to be 12 inches high. In the first section a full-voltage non-reversing NEMA

Size 1 combination starter is to be installed in the first available position below the top horizontal wireway. Assuming conventional unit sizing (FVNR-1 equals 1X or 12-inch unit height), the unit location assignment becomes:

Motor Control Center

Vertical Section

Unit Location

1 A D

General

Typical 3-Character Designation

Motor Control Center number/character

Vertical Section number/character

Unit Location (line number/character)

1 A D

Note: The motor control center number/character assignment may be a number (1, 2,

3, 4, etc.) provided the number of MCC lineups on an order does not exceed 9. If 10 or greater, then the motor control center character should be a letter of the alphabet (A,

B, C, D, etc.). Likewise, the vertical section character should be an alphabetic entry for lineups exceeding 9 sections.

Continue lining off the unit space requirements for various units and future spaces as required until the lineup is complete and all spaces have been addressed. Notice that every unit location has a unique unit location designation. This unit designation will not be repeated again within the order.

Since every motor control center lineup also has a unique panel catalog number, then the unit nameplate and catalog number will never be duplicated.

ML # 0447X0542L01 – 1AD

The outline summary drawing furnished with the equipment cross-references the unit location and the service designation specified for each unit.

Example:

MCC Cat Number

Unit Location

Motor Control Center No. 1

A B C D

A reminder about future spaces: If a 2X future space is to be arranged into two 1X compartments, then the outline sketch must be lined off into 1X compartments with individual unit addresses. This will ensure that the necessary unit doors and shelves will be provided by the factory.

K

K1

K

K2


Drawings/Tests


Mebane CAD documentation system permits the engineer to perform virtually all design functions without the need of traditional drafting tools and associated equipment. This computer-based system is used to translate equipment functional requirements into detailed equipment designs and material lists. These computerized drawings are used in the manufacturing process to increase product assembly accuracy, repeatability and consistency. Standardization of production procedures and methods has been improved such that given devices are consistently located in the same position on or within the equipment. Unit wiring is handled in the same manner, resulting in improved wiring accuracy and productivity.

The following drawing elements are included in the standard documentation package. Customer will receive A-size

(81/2 x 11 inches) prints.

1) Lead Sheet

2) Outline

3) Summary Tables

4) Unit Elementaries

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

Fig. 3

Section K

1. Lead Sheet – Contains special Customer notes and manufacturing or test instructions.

2. Outline – Presents front view plan drawings showing the physical arrangement of units and associated equipment within the motor control center lineup.

3. Summary Tables – Provides all necessary functional detail of each unit including nameplate inscriptions.

Fig. 1


Drawings/Tests


Fig. 2

FRONT

VIEW

SECT. HEIGHT 90 INCHES

UL SECT. NO.

X=SHIPPING

LENGTH

>=SPLICE

MOD SHEET

SECT. WXD

VERT. BUS A

UL

FVNR

1

AAD

FVNR

1.5

AAF

FVNR

1.5

AAH

FVNR

1.5

AAJ

FVNR

1.5

AAL

FVNR

1.5

AAN

UL

FVNR

1.5

ABD

FVNR

1.5

ABF

FVNR

1.5

ABH

FVNR

1

ABJ

FVNR

1

ABL

FVNR

1

ABN

> <

UL

FDRCB/

ACC

FDRCB/

ACD

FDRCB/

ACE

FDRCB/

ACF

FDRCB/

ACG

FDRCB/

ACH

FDRCB/

ACI

FDRCB/

ACJ

FDRCB/

ACK

FDRCB/

ACL

FDRCB/

ACM

FDRCB/

ACN

UL

INCLINE

600

001 002

1 2 3 4

FRONT

20X20

300

FRONT

20X20

300

FRONT 20X20

300

FRONT

20X20

600/300

ADC

SPACE

ADD

SPACE

ADF

SPACE

ADH

FDRCB/

ADI

FDRCB/

ADJ

SPACE

ADL

SPACE

ADN

Fig. 3

UNIT SUMMARY EVOLUTION SERIES MCC

REQ. NO.

PANEL CAT. NO.

ENG. NAME JBC

FRONT

UNIT

UNIT

MOD

LOC

SH

CUST

UNIT

NO

CAT# 273A7916P3FC

NAMEPLATE

ISSUED 01/16/1996 REV.

REV NO. 0

ELEM CONN.

I

Z

E

D

R

W

S FUNCTION

S

I

Z

E

AAD 6-MILL

FEED END

JACKING PUMP

RED RUN PTT LT

100

200A

FVNR

1

AAF

100

200A

FVNR

1

AAH

AAJ

AAL

6-MILL

FEED END

JACKING PUMP

RED RUN PTT LT

6-MILL

FEED END

FILTRATION PUMP

RED RUN PTT LT

6-MILL

DISCHARGE END

JACKING PUMP

RED RUN PTT LT

6-MILL

DISCHARGE END

EXT. LUBE PUMP

100

200A

100

200A

100 200A

FVNR

FVNR

FVNR

1

1

1

AAN

ABD

ABF

ABH

ABJ

RED RUN PTT LT

6-MILL

DISCHARGE END

FILTRATION PUMP

RED RUN PTT LT

7-MILL

FEED END

JACKING PUMP

RED RUN PTT LT

7-MILL

FEED END

EXT. LUBE PUMP

RED RUN PTT LT

7-MILL

FEED END

FILTRATION PUMP

RED RUN PTT LT

7-MILL

DISCHARGE END

JACKING PUMP

RED RUN PTT LT

100

200A

100

200A

100

200A

100

200A

100 200A

FVNR

FVNR

FVNR

FVNR

FVNR

1

1

1

1

1

HP

KW

K-KW

1

1.5

1.5

1.5

1.5

1.5

1.5

1.5

1.5

1

FLA RPM SF

OL

HEATER

CR123

OL

RELAY

TYPE

GE ENERGY

MEBANE, NC USA

CB

SW

1.8

1000 1.150

C220A AMBIENT SELI

DWG. FOR INSTALLATAION

DWG. NO. SH F01A

CONT. ON SH F01B

3

TRIP

FUSE/

CLIP

FUSES

BY

TOTAL

AUX

INILK

0

0

3 0

NOT LABELED

UL

UL

CSA

SC

LABEL LABEL

MARKER

157

CPT

VA

150

CATALOG

NUMBER

IA52-102437

2.4

1000

1.150

C301A AMBIENT SELI

2.4

1000

1.150

C301A AMBIENT SELI

2.4

1000

1.150

C301A AMBIENT SELI

2.4

1000

1.150

C301A AMBIENT SELI

2.4

1000 1.150

C301A AMBIENT SELI

2.4

1000 1.150

C301A AMBIENT SELI

2.4

1000

1.150

C301A AMBIENT SELI

2.4

1000

1.150

C301A AMBIENT SELI

1.8

1000

1.150

C220A AMBIENT SELI

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

0

UL

3 0

UL

3 0

UL

3

0

UL

3

0

UL

3

0

UL

3

0

UL

3

0

UL

3

0

UL

157

157

157

157

157

157

157

157

157

150

150

150

150

150

IA52-102438

150

IA52-102438

150

IA52-102438

150

IA52-102439

IA52-102439

IA52-102438

IA52-102438

IA52-102438

150

IA52-102437

K3

K

K

K4


Drawings/Tests

Paint Finish

Indoor Equipment

The standard Mebane paint system consists of the following two processes.

Phase I–Cleaning

In a 7-stage spray washer, steel parts are cleaned and sprayed in the controlled cleaning solutions.

Stage

1–Cleaning

2–Rinse

3–Iron Phosphate

4–Rinse

5–Non Chrome Sealer

6–Rinse

7–Deionized Rinse

Temperature

115-120°

105-118°

90-105°

Ambient

Ambient

Ambient

Ambient

Chemical Solution(s)

Ferro Clean GE

None

Secure Low Foam

None

Non Chrome Final Seal

None

None

Packaging and Storage

Domestic Packaging

Normally a motor control center Lineup is shipped in groups of three vertical sections for ease of handling. Each shipping split is mounted on a hardwood skid to facilitate moving by rollers or fork-lift truck. Lifting eyes are also provided for moving by crane. Shipping blocks are placed on the face of the sections to protect handles and devices. The shipping splits are wrapped in clear stretch polyfilm to protect the equipment from the usual dust and dirt encountered during shipment. Necessary bus splice bars are included for connecting the shipping splits together.

Cleaned steel parts enter a drying oven at 300-350°F. The preceding operating parameters have been determined to produce an Iron Phosphate coating of a minimum of 150 milligrams per square foot to meet MIL Spec. TT-C-490.

Phase II–Painting by Electro-static Powder Process

Primed metal parts are electrostatically coated with a powder paint consisting of the following:

670-011 ANSI-61 Polyester Paint (Light Gray)

Metal parts will enter drying oven at 375-400°F and remain for 20 minutes. The standard color is ANSI-61 light gray with a gloss of 60±5, and a thickness of 1.5 mils. This system will withstand a minimum of 1000 hour humidity test, plus 1000 hours salt spray test.

Export Crating

The sections are bolted to a skid with a solid floor. The equipment is then enclosed in a 3/8" plywood crate with 2 x 4 reinforcing at the top and corners. Three 1 1/4" steel bands are placed horizontally around the crate for additional reinforcing.

All equipment should be protected against moisture and temperature extremes during shipment and storage. See

Environmental Considerations in Section A (General). For prolonged shipping periods where export crating is involved, it is recommended the equipment space heaters (when specified) be wired for connecting to an external power source while in transit, to minimize condensation.

Storage

If it is necessary to store the equipment for any length of time, the following precautions should be taken:

1. Uncrate equipment.

2. Store in a clean, dry area at moderate temperature. Cover with a suitable canvas or heavy-duty plastic cover to prevent entrance of foreign material.

3. If equipment must be stored in cool or damp areas, not only should the equipment be completely covered, but heat should be provided to prevent condensation of moisture in the equipment. Energize space heaters (if furnished in the equipment) or place a standard 120-volt lamp rated

75 watts inside the bottom of each vertical section.


Drawings/Tests

Standard Commercial Tests and Inspection

General

The following summary description defines the standard factory tests and inspections performed during manufacture.

All GE motor control center equipment is tested and inspected for conformance with NEMA ICS 18-2001. Production tests and inspections encompass the verification of physical configuration of assembly and workmanship, the mechanical adjustments of parts and components, and the sequencing and functional operations of the control systems. These tests and inspections are performed on manufactured products to verify conformance of the equipment to a previously qualified design. The tests do not include type testing or other destructive tests on equipment to be shipped to a customer. Any additional factory tests beyond those listed in the following paragraphs must be referred to Mebane to verify availability of test facilities and qualified manpower. Additional testing beyond the scope of the following standard commercial tests will affect normal shipment schedules.

Continuity Tests – Control Wiring and Power Cables

The correctness of the individual circuit wiring contained in each assembly and the assembly wiring interfaces shall be verified as in accordance with the connection diagram, wiring table, or elementary drawing. The continuity of each circuit shall be checked.

Functional Operations Test

All equipments shall be subjected to an operational test. The test shall verify the functional operation of the control and power circuits and related components, devices and subassemblies-modules under simulated operating conditions

(excluding loading of the power circuits).

Devices

All devices, including subassemblies-modules, shall be operated, set and checked for their functional characteristics in accordance with the instructions for each and any additional characteristics peculiar to a device:

• Pick-up

• Drop-out

• Contact wipe

• Amperes

• In-rush current

• Time-delay

Production Tests

The following list of inspection activities shall be performed to assure proper and correct materials, workmanship and for any damage conditions in accordance with the manufacturing documentation and drawings:

• Components, parts and material

• Physical condition of components, parts, wire insulation

• Location and orientation of components and parts

• Finish–plating–painting

• Wire/cable type, size, insulating and clamping support

• Wire terminations, insulation removal and crimping of terminals

• Tightness of electrical connections and torque of bus bar bolts

• Wire markers and terminal markers (where specified)

• Labeling of components, parts, etc.

• Tightness torque of assembly bolts and hardware

• Welds (spot only)

• Mechanical clearance

• Electrical clearance (potential hazards)

Mechanical Operations Test

Mechanical operating tests shall be performed to insure proper functioning of operating mechanisms and interchangeability.

a. The operation of shutters, mechanical interlocks, circuitbreaker-door interlocks, operating handles, trip mechanisms, solenoid armature travels, contact wipes, electromechanical interlocks, physical clearances for mechanical and electrical isolation including any additional mechanically related operating functions shall be verified.

b. The interchangeability of removable units designed to be interchangeable shall be verified as well as the rejection functions of non-interchangeable units.

Contactors must pick-up and hold-in at or below the following percentage or rated coil voltage:

Device Type

DC

AC

DC

DC

Voltage Source

DC

AC

AC with rectifier

AC with rectifier

Pick-up (Percentage)

63

85➀

70 with holding resistor

75 with holding and pick-up resistor

➀ If a control power transformer is used, apply 90 percent voltage to primary of transformer.

Sequence and Timing Circuits

Assemblies and systems involving sequential operation of devices and time delays shall be tested to assure that the devices in the sequence function properly and in the order intended.

Polarity – Phase-sensitive Circuits

The polarity of direct-current circuits and phase connections of alternating-current circuits shall be verified by application of power and measurement of the relative polarities and phase sequence.

Grounding

The grounding circuits and buses shall be verified.

K

K5

K

K6


Drawings/Tests

Standard Commercial Tests and Inspection

High Potential – Insulation Tests

Control Wiring Insulation Tests

A dielectric test (hi-pot) shall be performed on circuit wiring to confirm the insulation resistance to withstand breakdown to a selected test voltage. The test voltage – amplitude and waveshape, method of application and duration of time applied – shall be specified in NEMA ICS 18-2001.

Option – Insulation Resistance (Megger) tests

Insulation resistance tests measure the amount of circuit resistance to current leakage. This test is performed when this resistance measurement is desired and so specified. A nominal charge will be assessed.

The test voltage and minimum insulation resistance shall be selected as specified by the contract. Standard test values are: a. 500 volts DC with 10 megohms minimum b. 1000 volts DC with 1 megohm minimum

Power Cable Insulation and Isolation Test

Power cables and buses shall be tested, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for insulation breakdown resistance and circuit isolation as specified in NEMA ICS 18-2001.

Note: These test conditions are as specified for newly constructed equipment and performed in a clean, temperature- and humidity-controlled factory environment.

The test voltages include the standard test voltage (two times rated plus 1000), times 120 percent (for one-second application).

Rated Circuit Voltage

AC or DC

120

240

480/600

High Potential

Test Voltage

1500

1800

2700

Duration of Test

1 second

1 second

1 second

The frequency of the test voltage shall not be less than the rated frequency of the equipment tested and shall be essentially sinusoidal in wave shape.

Note: Consideration shall be made for low-voltage devices, semiconductors, meters, instruments, transformers, grounding circuits, etc., in preparation for the dielectric tests.

Example of standard test report available on request for a nominal charge.


Typical Circuits

FVNR Size 1-4

Typical Circuit Diagrams

L1 L2 L3

Stab

(3)

L3

(5)

(2)

L2

(6)

CB

(3)

OR

(4)

(1)

LSW

(2)

(1)

L1

(5)

M

(6)

K3

(3)

(4)

K2

(1)

(2)

K1

(1)

(2)

H1

(H1)

(3)

2FU

(4)

H2

(H2)

(5)

OL

(6)

K6

(3)

K5

(4)

(1)

(2)

K4

T3

T2

T1

MOTOR

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

X1 (X1) (X2)

GND

X2

No Pilot Devices

3

(A)

M

(B) (7)

OL

(8)

2

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

(13)

STOP

(14)

1A

X1 (X1) (X2)

GND

X2

Start/Stop PB's

2

(3)

START

(10)

3

(A)

M

(B) (7)

OL

(8)

2

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

1A

X1 (X1)

(13)

SW

Hand Auto

OFF

(14)

(X2)

GND

X2

Hand-Off-Auto-SW

(15) x=Closed(MC)

(16)

5

(A)

M

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

3

(11)

M

(12)

2

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

(13)

SSW

Off On

(14) x=Closed(MC)

1A

X1 (X1) (X2)

GND

X2

On/Off Switch

3

(11)

M

(12)

2

(A)

M

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

(H-O-A Only)

2

1A

1

X2

T3

T2

T1

50

5

4

3

61

TB

60

51

(15)

M

(16)

50 51

(13)

M

(14)

60 61

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

X1 (X1) (X2)

GND

X2

Red Ind. Light

2

(12)

M

(11)

3

(A)

M

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

(1)

R

(2)

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

X1 (X1) (X2)

GND

X2

Red/Green Ind. Lights

2

(12)

M

(11)

3

(A)

M

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

(1)

R

(2)

(5)

G

(6)

1

(13)

M

(14)

4

(2)

IFU

(1)

(13)

STOP

(14)

1A

X1 (X1) (X2)

GND

X2

Start/Stop PB's

Red Ind. Light

2

(3)

START

(10)

3

(A)

M

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

(12)

M

(11) (1)

R

(2)

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

(13)

STOP

(14)

1A

X1 (X1) (X2)

GND

X2

Start/Stop PB's


2

(3)

START

(10)

3

(A)

M

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

(12)

M

(11) (1)

R

(2)

M

(13)

(14)

4

(5)

G

(6)

L1

L

L


Typical Circuits

FVNR Size 1-4


L1 L2 L3

Stab

(3)

L3

(5)

(2)

L2

(6)

CB

(3)

OR

(4)

(1)

LSW

(2)

(1)

L1

(5)

M

(6)

K3

(3)

(4)

K2

(1)

(2)

K1

(1)

(2)

H1

(H1)

(3)

2FU

(4)

H2

(H2)

L2

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

1A

X1 (X1)

(13)

SW

Hand Auto

OFF

(14)

(X2)

GND

X2

Hand-Off-Auto-SW

Red Light

(15) x=Closed(MC)

(16)

5

(A)

M

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

3

(11)

M

(12)

2

(1)

R

(2)

(2)

IFU

(1)

1

1A

1

(13)

M

(14)

4

(2)

IFU

(1)

X1 (X1)

(13)

SW

Hand Auto

OFF

(14)

(X2)

GND

X2

Hand-Off-Auto-SW

Red/Green Lights

(15) x=Closed(MC)

(16)

5

(A)

M

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

3

(11)

M

(12)

2

(1)

R

(2)

(5)

G

(6)

X1 (X1) (X2)

GND

X2

On/Off SW

Red Light

(13)

SSW

Off On

(14) x=Closed(MC)

1A

3

(11)

M

(12)

2

(A)

M

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

(1)

R

(2)

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

X1 (X1)

(13)

SSW

Off On

(14) x=Closed(MC)

(13)

M

(14)

4

1A

(X2)

GND

X2

On/Off SW

Red/Green Light

3

(11)

M

(12)

2

(A)

M

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

(1)

R

(2)

(5)

G

(6)

(5)

OL

(6)

K6

(3)

K5

(4)

(1)

(2)

K4

T3

T2

T1

MOTOR

(H-O-A Only)

2

1A

1

X2

T3

T2

T1

50

5

4

3

61

TB

60

51

(15)

M

(16)

50 51

(13)

M

(14)

60 61

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

ASW

(1B) (X1)

XB X1

To Remote

Control Source

X2

1A

5 2

3

(A)

M

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

1A

1

X2

3

2

5

4

X1

TB

61

60

51

50


Typical Circuits

FVNR Size 5-6


(1)

CR

(2)

OL

S-5 S-6

L1 L2 L3

(5) (6)

L3

CB

(3)

OR

(4)

L2

(1)

LSW

(2)

L1

K3

K2

K1

H1

(2)

3FU

(1)

K1

(5)

M

(6)

(3)

(4)

(1) (2)

K2

(3)

3FU

(4)

(A)

M

(B)

H2

T3

T2

T1

MOTOR

L1 L2 L3

L3

L2

L1

(5) (6)

CB

(3)

OR

(4)

(1)

LSW

(2)

K3

K2

K1

H1

(2)

2FU

(1)

K1 K2

(1)

OL

20

(2)

23

(3)

21

(5)

22

(4)

(6)

(5)

(3)

(1)

M

(6)

(4)

(2)

(3)

2FU

(4)

(1)

(2)

3CT

(1)

2CT

(2)

(1)

(2)

ICT

GND

(3)

CR

(4)

(A)

M

(B)

41

41

(1)

2FU

(2)

H1

(H1) (H2)

H2

(4)

2FU

(3)

(1)

2FU

(2)

(H1)

(H2)

(4)

2FU

(3)

H2

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

(13)

STOP

(14)

1A

X1 (X1) (X2)

GND

X2

No Pilot Devices

3

(A)

CR

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

2

X1 (X1) (X2)

GND

X2

Start/Stop PB's

2

(9)

START

(10)

3

(A)

CR

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

1A

X1 (X1)

(13)

SW

Hand Auto

OFF

(14)

(X2)

GND

X2

Hand-Off-Auto-SW

(15) x=Closed(MC)

(16)

5

(A)

CR

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

3

(11)

M

(12)

2

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

X1 (X1)

(13)

SSW

Off On

(14) x=Closed(MC)

1A

(X2)

GND

X2

On/Off Switch

3

(11)

M

(12)

2

(A)

CR

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

1

(13)

M

(14)

4

(2)

IFU

(1)

(13)

STOP

(14)

1A

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

(13)

STOP

(14)

1A

(H-O-A Only)

T3

3

2

5

4

61

60

51

50

1A

1

X2

TB

T2

MOTOR

T1

X1 (X1)

X1 (X1)

(X2)

GND

X2

Red Ind. Light

3

(A)

CR

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

(1)

R

(2)

2

(X2)

GND

X2


2

(12)

M

(11)

3

(A)

CR

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

(1)

R

(2)

(5)

G

(6)

X1 (X1) (X2)

GND

X2

Start/Stop PB's

Red Ind. Light

2

(9)

START

(10)

3

(A)

CR

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

(12)

M

(11)

(1)

R

(2)

X1 (X1) (X2)

GND

X2

Start/Stop PB's


2

(9)

START

(10)

3

(A)

CR

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

(12)

M

(11)

(1)

R

(2)

(15)

M

(16)

50 51

(13)

M

(14)

60 61

M

(13)

(14) (5)

G

(6)

L3

L


Typical Circuits

FVNR Size 5-6


S-5 S-6

L1 L2 L3

(5) (6)

L3

CB

(3)

OR

(4)

L2

(1)

LSW

(2)

K3

K2

L1

K1

H1

(2)

3FU

(1)

K1

CR

(1) (2)

41

(5)

M

(6)

(3)

(4)

(1) (2)

OL

K2

(3)

3FU

(4)

(A)

M

(B)

H2

T3

T2

T1

MOTOR

L1 L2 L3

L3

L2

L1

(5) (6)

CB

(3)

OR

(4)

(1)

LSW

(2)

K3

K2

K1

H1

(2)

3FU

(1)

K1

CR

(3)

(4)

K2

(1)

OL

20

(2)

23

(3)

21

(5)

22

(4)

(6)

(5)

(3)

(1)

M

(6)

(4)

(2)

(3)

3FU

(4)

(1)

(2)

3CT

(1)

(1)

(2)

2CT

(2)

ICT

GND

(A)

M

(B)

41

(1)

2FU

(2)

H1

(H1) (H2)

H2

(4)

2FU

(3)

(1)

2FU

(2)

(H1)

(H2) (4)

2FU

(3)

H2

(H-O-A Only)

T3

3

2

5

4

61

60

51

50

1A

1

X2

TB

T2

MOTOR

T1

(15)

M

(16)

50 51

(13)

M

(14)

60 61

L

L4

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

1A

X1 (X1)

(13)

SW

Hand Auto

OFF

(14)

(X2)

GND

X2

Hand-Off-Auto-SW

Red Light

(15) x=Closed(MC)

(16)

5

(A)

CR

(B)

3

(11)

M

(12)

2

40

(1)

(7)

OL

(8)

R

(2)

(2)

IFU

(1)

1

1A

1

M

(13)

(14)

4

(2)

IFU

(1)

X1 (X1)

(13)

SW

Hand Auto

OFF

(14)

(X2)

GND

X2

Hand-Off-Auto-SW

Red/Green Lights

(15) x=Closed(MC)

(16)

5

(A)

CR

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

3

(11)

M

(12)

2

(1)

R

(2)

(5)

G

(6)

X1 (X1) (X2)

GND

X2

On/Off SW Red Light

(13)

SSW

Off On

(14)

1A x=Closed(MC)

3

(11)

M

(12)

2

(A)

CR

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

(1)

R

(2)

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

X1 (X1)

(13)

SSW

Off On

(14) x=Closed(MC)

(13)

M

(14)

4

1A

(X2)

GND

X2

On/Off SW

Red/Green Lights

3

(11)

M

(12)

2

(A)

CR

(B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

(1)

R

(2)

(5)

G

(6)


Typical Circuits

FVNR with Voltage Indicator Module


L5

L

L


Typical Circuits

FVR Size 1-4


L1 L2 L3

Stab

(3)

L3

(2)

L2

(1)

L1

(5)

(6)

K3

(3)

CB

OR

(4)

(1)

LSW

(2)

K2

(5)

R

(6)

(5)

F

(6)

(3) (4)

(3)

(4)

(1) (2)

(1) (2)

K1

H1

(1)

(2)

(H1)

(3)

2FU

(4)

H2

(H2)

(5)

K6

OL

(6)

(3)

K5

(4)

(1)

K4

(2)

T3

T2

T1

MOTOR

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

X1 (X1) (X2)

GND

X2

No Pilot Devices

3

(12)

①

R

(11)

F

(A) (B)

6 40

(7)

OL

(8)

①

8

(14)

R

(13

9

①

5

①

(12)

F

(11) (A)

R

(B)

7

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

(13)

STOP

(14)

1A

X1 (X1) (X2)

GND

X2

Fwd/Rev/Stop PB

(8)

FWD

(6)

(12)

R

(11)

F

(A) (B)

3 6 40

(7)

OL

(8)

8

(14)

F

(13)

(21)

REV

(22)

5

F

(12) (11)

7

R

(A) (B)

(14)

R

9

(13)

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

X1 (X1)

1A

(13)

SW

R O F

(14)

(X2)

GND

X2

Rev-Off-Fwd SW

(15)

X=Closed (MC)

(16)

3

(12)

R

(11)

F

(A) (B)

6 40

(7)

OL

(8)

(13)

F

(14)

8

5

F

(12) (11)

7

R

(A) (B)

9

①

Polarity sensitive (all options).

1A

1

X2

T3

5

3

9

8

T2

T1

TB

(17)

F

(18)

50 51

(17)

R

(18)

52 53

(15)

F

(16)

60 61

(15)

R

(16)

62 63

(2)

IFU

(1)

1 X1 (X1) (X2)

GND

X2

Amber/Red/Green/

Ind. Lights

3

(12)

R

(11)

F

(A) (B)

6 40

(7)

OL

(8)

(14)

8

F

(13)

(1)

R

(2)

(14)

R

9

(13)

5

(12)

F

(11) (A)

R

(B)

7

(17)

A

(18)

(9)

G

(10)

1

16

(2)

IFU

(1)

13

X1 (X1) (X2)

GND

X2

Rev/Fwd/Stop PB

Amber/Red/Green Lights

(13)

1

STOP

(14)

1A

(8)

FWD

(6)

(12)

3

R

(11)

F

(A) (B)

6 40

(7)

OL

(8)

(11)

R

(12)

8

(14)

F

(13)

(21)

REV

(22)

5

F

(12) (11)

R

(A) (B)

7

(14)

R

9

(13)

(17)

A

(18)

(9)

G

(10)

16

(2)

IFU

(1)

16

13

X1 (X1)

SW

1A

(13)

R O F

(14)

(X2)

GND

X2

Rev-Off-Fwd SW

Amber/Red/Green Light

(15)

X=Closed (MC)

(16)

3

(12)

R

(11)

6

F

(A) (B)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

(14)

F

(13)

8

(1)

R

(2)

5

F

(12) (11)

7

R

(A) (B)

(14)

R

(13)

9

(17)

A

(18)

(9)

G

(10)

13

L6


Typical Circuits

RVAT Size 2-6


Size 2, 3-65, 80% Taps

Size 4, 5, 6-50, 65, 80% Taps

L1 L2 L3

*

L3

*

L2

*

L1

(5)

(6)

(3)

CB

OR

(4)

K3

K2

(1)

LSW

(2)

K1

H1

(2)

3FU

(1)

K1

IS

(5) (6)

R

(5)

(6)

(3) (4)

FB

(3) (4)

(1) (2)

FA

(1) (2) optional

Power Factor Capacitor

AT

(FC)

(3C)

(FB) (3B)

(FA) (3A)

(1C)

(2C)

(0C)

0C

(1B)

(2B)

(0B)

0B

(4)

2S

(3)

(1A)

(2A)

(0A)

(1)

2S

(2)

0A

(6)

2S

(5)

K2

(3)

3FU

(4)

H2

(C)

TR

(NO)

Inst.

43

(5)

TO

TR

(3)

44

(13)

1S

(14)

45

(A)

2S

(B)

(A)

1S

(B)

(13)

R

46

(14)

(5)

TC

TR

(1)

47

(13)

2S

(14)

48

(A)

R

(B)

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

(1)

2FU

(2)

(H1)

(H2)

X1 (X1)

T

(X2)

GND

X2

Start/Stop PB's


(4)

(13)

1

STOP

(14)

1A

2

(3)

START

(10)

(11)

IS

(12)

L1

TR

L2

3

TDAE

40

(10 Sec.)

(7)

OL

(8)

39

(1)

OTT

(2)

(1)

R

(2)

R

(11)

(12)

(5)

G

(6)

(15)

R

(16)

4

(2)

IFU

(1)

1A

(15)

R

(16)

X1 (X1)

T

(X2)

GND

X2

Hand – Off – Auto SW

Red/Green Lights

(13)

SW

Hand Auto

OFF

(14)

(15)

4

(2)

IFU

(1) x=Closed(MC)

(16)

5

T

L1

TR

L2

3

TDAE

40

(10 Sec.)

IS

(11)

(12)

(7)

OL

(8)

39

(1)

R

(2)

(1)

OTT

(2)

R

(11)

(12)

(5)

G

(6)

1 X1 (X1) (X2)

GND

X2

Hand – Off – Auto SW

Red Light

(13)

SW

Hand Auto

OFF

(14)

1A

(15) x=Closed(MC)

(16)

5

3

L1

TR

L2

TDAE

40

(10 Sec.)

IS

(11) (12)

(7)

OL

(8)

39

(1)

OTT

(2)

(1)

R

(2)

R

(11) (12)

2FU

(3)

OL

Size 5 and 6 CT Operated

T3

T2

T1

MOTOR

(H-O-A Only)

Size 2-4

1A

1

X2

T3

T2

T1

3

2

5

4

53

52

51

50

TB

* Stab-in up to 5

(15)

R

(16)

50 51

(21)

R

(22)

52 53

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

X1 (X1)

T

(X2)

GND

X2

On/Off Switch

(13)

SSW

Off On

(14) x=Closed(MC)

1A

L1

TR

L2

3

TDAE

(10 Sec.)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

39

OTT

(11) (12)

(12)

(12)

IS

(11)

R

(11)

2

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

(13)

SSW

Off On

(14)

1A x=Closed(MC)

(15)

R

(16)

4

X1 (X1)

T

(X2)

GND

X2

On/Off SW

Red/Green Lights

L1

TR

L2

3

TDAE

(10 Sec.)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

39

OTT

(11) (12)

(11)

(11)

IS

(12)

2

R

(12)

(1)

R

(2)

(5)

G

(6)

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

(13)

SSW

Off On

(14)

1A x=Closed(MC)

X1 (X1)

T

(X2)

GND

X2

On/Off SW

Red Light

L1

TR

L2

3

TDAE

(10 Sec.)

40

(7)

OL

(8)

39

(11)

OTT

(12)

(11)

(11)

IS

(12)

R

(12)

2

(1)

R

(2)

L7

L


Typical Circuits

2S2W-C.T., V.T., C.H. Size 1-4


L

L8

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

(13)

X1 (X1)

SW

F S O A

1A

(14)

(X2)

GND

X2

Fast - Slow- Auto-SW

AMB/Red/Grn Ind.

3

FS

(12) (11) (A)

SS

6

(B)

40

(7)

SOL

(8)

39

(7)

FOL

(8)

(14)

SS

(13)

8

(1)

R

(2)

(15)

(25)

(16)

(26)

5

(11)

IS

(12)

FS

(A) (B)

7

(14)

FS

(13)

9

(17)

R

(18)

(27)

(15)

SS

(16) (15)

(16)

FS

(16) x=Closed(MC)

(13)

(28)

(9)

G

(10)

1A

1

X2

T13

5

3

9

8

T12

T11

T3

T2

T1

TB

1

Note: See GEM-1000A

L1 L2 L3

(5)

SS

SOL

(6) (5) (6)

K6

(3) (4) (3) (4)

K5

(1) (2)

K4

(1) (2)

STAB

(3)

L3

(2)

L2

(1)

L1

(5)

(6)

(3)

CB

OR

(4)

(1)

LSW

(2)

K3

K2

K1

(5)

FS

(6)

(5)

K9

(1) (2)

2FU

H1

(3)

(H1)

(4)

H2

(H2)

(3)

(1)

(4) (3)

K8

(2)

K7

(1)

FOL

(6)

(4)

(2)

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

X1

(X1)

T2

T3

T1

T13

T12

T11

MOTOR

(X2)

X2

GND

1

SS

(13) (14)

8

No Pilot Devices

3

(12)

1

FS

(11)(A)

6

SS

(B)

40

(7)

SOL

(8)

39

(7)

FOL

(8)

1

FS

(13) (14)

9

5

SS

(12) (11)

7

(A)

FS

(B)

(13)

(2)

IFU

(1)

STOP

(14)

1A

X1

(X1) (X2)

GND

X2

Fast/Slow/Stop PB

(5)

SLOW

(6)

3

(12)

FS

(11)(A)

6

SS

(B)

40

(7)

SOL

(8)

39

(7)

FOL

(8)

SS

(13) (14)

8

(21)

FAST

(22)

5

SS

(12) (11) (A)

FS

(B)

7

(13)

FS

(14)

9

(17)

50

(15)

62

FS

FS

SS

SS

(18)

51

(15) (16)

60 61

(17) (18)

52 53

(16)

63

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

1

X1

(X1) (X2)

GND

X2

(15)

(25)

(16)

(26)

14

Amb/Red/Grn Ind.

Lights

3

(12)

FS

(11)(A)

SS

6

(B)

40

SOL

(7) (8)

FOL

(7) (8)

39

(1)

A

(2) (13)

SS

(14)

8

FS

(13) (14)

9

5

SS

(12) (11)

7

(A)

FS

(B)

(17)

R

(18)

(9)

G

(10)

1

SS FS

(15) (16)(15) (16)

16

(2)

IFU

(1)

13

X1 (X1)

1A

(13)

SW

F S O A

(14)

(X2)

GND

X2

Fast-Slow-Off-Auto

SW

3

FS

(12) (11) (A)

SS

6

(B)

40

(7)

SOL

(8)

39

(7)

FOL

(8)

(14)

SS

(13)

8

5

(14)

FS

(13)

9

7

(A)

FS

(B)

(27) (28) x=Closed (MC)

(2)

IFU

(1)

(13)

(15)

SS

STOP

(16)

(14)

1A

(15)

(16)

FS

(16)

X1 (X1)

(13)

(X2)

GND

X2

Fast/Slow/Stop PBs

Amb/Red/Grn Lights

(5)

SLOW

(6)

3

FS

(12) (11)

6

(A)

SS

(B)

40

(7)

SOL

(8) (7)

FOL

(8)

SS

(13) (14)

8

(1)

A

(2)

(21)

FAST

(22)

5

SS

(12)

(11)

7

(A)

FS

(B)

FS

(13) (14)

3

(17)

R

(18)

(9)

G

(10)


Typical Circuits

2S1W-C.T., V.T., C.H. Size 1-4


Note: See GEM-1000A

Constant HP

SS

SOL

(5) (6) (5) (6)

K6

(3) (4) (3) (4)

K5

(1) (2)

K4

(1) (2)

(7) (8)

T4

L1 L2 L3

(9) (10)

STAB

(3)

L3

(2)

L2

(1)

L1

(5) (6)

(3)

CB

OR

(4)

(1)

LSW

(2)

K3

K2

K1

(1) (3)

2FU

H1

(2)

(H1)

(4)

H2

(H2)

(5)

FS

(6) (5)

FOL

(6)

K9

(3)

(4)

(1)

(4)

(3)

K8

(2)

K7

(1) (2)

(2)

IFU

(1)

1

1

(13)

(2)

STOP

IFU

(14)

1A

(1)

X1

X1

(X1)

(X1)

(X2)

X2

GND

1

(13)

SS

(14)

8

1

5

SS

(12) (11)

7

(A)

FS

(B)

1

FS

(13) (14)

9

No Pilot Devices

3

(12)

1

FS

(11)(A)

6

SS

(B)

40

(7)

SOL

(8)

39

(7)

FOL

(8)

(X2)

GND

X2

Fast/Slow/Stop PB's

AMB/Red/Grn Lights

(5)

SLOW

(6) (12)

FS

(11)(A)

3 6

SS

(B)

40

(7)

SOL

(8)

(7)

FOL

(8)

(13)

SS

(14)

8

(1)

A

(2)

(21)

FAST

(22)

5

SS

(12) (11) (A)

FS

7

(B)

(13)

FS

(14)

9

(17)

R

(18)

(9)

G

(10)

1

(15)

SS

(16) (15)

FS

(16)

16

(2)

IFU

(1)

13

X1 (X1)

1A

(13)

SW

F S O A

(14)

(X2)

GND

X2

(15) (16)

Fast - Slow- Off -

Auto-SW

3

FS

(12) (11)

6

(A)

SS

(B)

40

(7)

SOL

(8)

39

(7)

FOL

(8)

(14)

SS

(13)

8

5

(12)

SS

(11)

7

FS

(A) (B)

(14)

FS

(13)

9

(25)

(27) x=Closed(MC)

1

Polarity sensitive (all options).

(26)

14

(28)

L9

T1

T5

T2

T4

T3

T6

MOTOR

L1 L2 L3

STAB

(3)

L3

(2)

L2

Constant or

Variable Torque

(1)

L1

(5) (6)

(3)

CB

OR

(4)

(1)

LSW

(2)

(5)

FS

FOL

(6) (5) (6)

K6

(3) (4) (3) (4)

K5

K3

(1) (2)

K4

(1) (2)

(7) (8)

T3

T2

(9) (10)

T1

(5)

SS

(6) (5)

SOL

(6)

K9

(4)

K2

K1

(1) (3)

2FU

H1

(2)

(H1)

(4)

H2

(H2)

(3)

(1)

(4) (3)

K8

(2)

K7

(1) (2)

T6

T3

T4

T5

T2

T1

MOTOR

FS

(17) (18)

50 51

FS

(15) (16)

60 61

SS

(17) (18)

52 53

(15)

SS

(16)

62 63

1A

1

X2

T6

5

3

9

8

T5

T4

T3

T2

T1

TB

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

1 X1

(X1) (X2)

X2

GND

Amb/Red/Grn Ind.

Lights

3

1

(12)

FS

(11)(A)

SS

6

(B)

40

SOL

(7)

(8)

FOL

(7)

(8)

39

1

SS

(13) (14)

8

(1)

A

(2)

5

1

SS

(12) (11)

7

(A)

FS

(B)

1

FS

(13) (14)

9

SS FS

(15) (16) (15) (16)

16

(2)

IFU

(1)

13

X1 (X1)

(13)

SW

F S O A

1A

(14)

(X2)

GND

(17)

R

(9)

(18)

G

(10)

X2

3

FS

(12) (11)

6

(A)

SS

Fast-Slow-Off-Auto SW

AMB/Red/Grn Ind.

(B)

40

(7)

SOL

(8)

39

(7)

FOL

(8)

(14)

SS

(13)

8

(1)

A

(2)

(15)

(25)

(16)

(26)

14

5

(14)

FS

(13)

9

7

FS

(A) (B)

R

(17) (18)

(27) (28) x=Closed (MC)

SS FS

(15) (16) (15) (16)

16 13

(2)

IFU

(1)

1 X1 (X1) (X2)

GND

X2

(9)

G

(10)

Fast/Slow/Stop PB

(13)

STOP

(14)

1A

(5)

SLOW

(6)

3

FS

(12) (11)

6

(A)

SS

(B)

40

(7)

SOL

(8)

39

(7)

FOL

(8)

(13)

SS

(14)

8

(21)

FAST

(22)

5

SS

(12)

(11)

7

FS

(A) (B)

FS

(13)

(14)

3

L9

L

L

L10


Typical Circuits

2S2W with MM200



Typical Circuits

2S-PW Size 1-5


L1 L2 L3

STAB

(3)

L3

(2)

L2

(1)

L1

(5)

(6)

K3

(3)

(1)

CB

OR

LSW

(4)

(2)

K2

K1

M2

(5)

(6)

K9

OL2

(5)

(6)

(3) (4)

K8

(3) (4)

(1) (2)

K7

(1) (2)

(5)

M1

(6)

K6

(5)

OL1

(6)

(3) (4)

K5

(3) (4)

(1) (2)

K4

(1) (2)

Size 5 CT Operated Overload

T7

T3

T8

T2

T9

T1

MOTOR

For 9 Leads - WYE

Connect Term. 4.5.6

together at motor

Terminal Box

For 9 Leads - Delta

Connect Term. 4 & 8, 5 & 9,

6 & 7 together in three separate pairs at motor terminal box

H1

(2)

3FU

(1)

K1

(13)

TR

(14)

43

(67)

TR

TC

(68)

44

K2

(3)

3FU

(4)

(A)

M1

(B)

(A)

M2

(B)

H2

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

(1)

2FU

(2)

H1A

(H1)

X1 (X1)

T

(X2)

(H2)

H2A

(4)

2FU

(3)

X2

Gnd

T8

T7

T3

T2

T1

1A

1

X2

T9

3

2

7

4

61

60

51

50

TB

SW

(13)

Off On

PB

(14)

1A

X-Closed (MC)

JPR

(13)

M2

(14)

4

3

(A1)

TR

(A2)

40

(7)

OL1

(8)

38

(7)

OL2

(8)

(11)

M1

(12)

(11)

M2

(12)

2

(1)

R

(2)

PB

7

(5)

G

(6)

PB

50

(21)

M2

(22)

51

60

(15)

M2

(16)

61

L11

L

L

L12


Typical Circuits

Wye-Delta Open Transition

WYE - Delta

Open Transition per GEM – 2034E

Fig. 16

L1 L2 L3

STAB

(3)

L3

(5) (6)

(2)

L2

(1)

L1

(3)

CB

OR

LSW

(4)

(1)

(2)

K3

K2

K1

H1

(13)

CR

(14)

(2)

3FU

(1)

K1

44

K2

2M

(1) (2)

K9

(2)

S

(1)

K10

(3) (4)

K8

(4) (3)

(5) (6)

K7

(6) (5)

(5)

1M

(6)

K6

(5)

1OL

(6)

(3)

(4)

K5

(3)

(1)

(2)

K4

(1)

(4)

(2)

Size 5CT Operated

(3)

3FU

(4)

H2

(A)

1M

(B)

T6

T4

T5

T3

T2

T1

MOTOR

1

(2)

IFU

(1)

(55)

TD

TR

(67)

TC

TR

(56)

(68)

46

(A1)

TR

(A2)

(A)

TDAE

S

(10 sec.)

(B)

45

S

(11)

(12)

47

(A)

2M

(B)

(1)

2FU

(2)

H1A

(H1) (H2)

(4)

2FU

H2A

(3)

T

X1

(X1) (X2)

Gnd

X2

61

60

(H-O-A only) 5

4

1A

1

3

2

X2

TB

T6

T5

T4

T3

T2

T1

(13)

Stop

PB

(14)

1A JPR

(9)

2

Start

(10)

PB

3

(A1)

CR

(A2)

40

(7)

1OL

(8)

(7)

2OL

(8)

39

(12)

1M

(11)

60

(13)

1M

(14)

61

NOTE: Control circuit options similar to the FVNR Size 5


Typical Circuits

Wye-Delta Open Transition

2M

(1)

(2)

WYE - Delta

Closed Transition per GEM – 2034E

Fig. 16

(3) (4)

(5) (6)

(R1)

RC

K11

(R4)

K7

(2)

2S

(1)

K12

(R2)

RC

(R5)

K8

(4)

(3)

(R3)

RC

K13

(R6)

K9

(6) (5)

L1 L2

L3

STAB

(3)

L3

(5)

(6)

K3

(2)

L2

(1)

L1

(3)

CB

OR

LSW

(4)

(1)

(2)

K2

K1

(5)

1M

(6)

K6

(3)

(4)

K5

(1) (2)

K4

(2)

IS

(1)

K10

(4)

(3)

(6)

(5)

(5)

1OL

(6)

(3) (4)

(1) (2)

Size 5CT Operated

T5

T3

T2

T4

T1

T6

1

H1

(2)

3FU

(1)

K1

K2

(3)

3FU

(4)

(13)

CR

(14)

41

(13)

1S

(14)

2S

(13)

(14)

42

44

2M

(11)

(12)

43

(A)

1S

(A)

1M

(B)

(B)

(15)

1M

(16)

(2)

IFU

(1)

(67)

TR

(68)

TC

46

(1)

2FU

(2)

H1A

(H1)

X1

(X1)

T

1S

(11) (12)

45

(A1)

(A)

TR

(A2)

TDAE

(10 sec.)

2M

(B)

(15)

2M

(16)

(A)

2S

(B)

47

(H2)

(4)

2FU

H2A

(3)

(X2)

Gnd

H2

X2

61

60

(H-O-A only) 5

4

1A

1

3

2

X2

TB

T6

T5

T4

T3

T2

T1

MOTOR

(13)

Stop

PB

(14)

1A JPR

(9)

2

Start

(10)

PB

3

(A1)

CR

(A2)

40

(7)

1OL

(8) (7)

2OL

(8)

39

(12)

1M

(11)

60

(13)

1M

(14)

61

NOTE: Control circuit options similar to the FVNR Size 5

L13

L

L

L14


Typical Circuits



Single-Phase

480/120-240V

Single-Phase

240/120V

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3

STAB

L3

(5)

L2

(6)

(3)

(1)

CB

OR

LSW

(2)

L1

(H1)

(X4) (X3)

T

(H2) (H3) (H4)

(X2)

GND

(X1)

STAB

L3

(5)

(3)

L2

L1

(1)

(6)

CB

OR

LSW

(2)

(H1)

(X4) (X3)

T

(H2) (H3) (H4)

(X2) (X1)

GND

L1 L2

L3

Three-Phase

480/208-120V

STAB

L3

L2

(5)

(6)

(3)

CB

OR

LSW

(4)

(1)

(2)

L1

K1

K3

K2

T1

(H2)

(H3)

(H1)

(H4)

(H1)

(H2)

(H3)

T2

(H4)

(H4)

(H3) (H2)

T3

(H1)

K4

(X1)

(X3)

T1

(X4)

(X2)

N

(X1)

(X2)

(X4)

(X3)

T2

GND

T3

(X4)

(X2)

(X3) (X1)

K5

K6


Typical Circuits

Single-Phase Panelboard


L1

L2

L3

MCC Bus (if power is furnished from bus)

STAB

Feeder & Transformer Unit

480V/120-240V

GND

BUS

Panelboard Unit

A

1

A

3

A

5

A

7

A

9

A

11

(L1)

(N)

(L2)

A

A

A

A

A

A

8

10

12

2

4

6

L15

L


Typical Circuits

Three-Phase Panelboard


L1

L2

L3

MCC Bus (if power is furnished from bus)

STAB

Feeder & Transformer Unit

T2

T1

T3

T1

T2

N

Gnd Bus

T3

480V/120-240V

L

L16

N

Gnd (if required)

A

A

CB

A

A

Panelboard Unit


Typical Circuits

FVNR with PLC


L1 L2 L3

1

STAB

(3)

L3

(2)

L2

(1)

L1

(2)

1FU

(1)

(5) (6)

(5)

M

(6)

K3

(3)

(1)

CB

OR

LSW

(4)

(2)

K2

(3)

(4)

X1

K1

(1)

(2)

(H1)

(3)

2FU

(4)

(H2)

T

(1) (2)

(X1) (X2)

Gnd

X2

(5)

OL

(6)

K6

(3)

K5

(4)

(1)

K4

(2)

T3

T2

T1

MOTOR

[ Output ]

3

(A)

M

(B)

40

OL

(7) (8)

2

M

(12) (11)

FVR with PLC


L1 L2

L3

STAB

(3)

L3

(2)

L2

(1)

L1

(5) (6)

K3

(3)

(1)

CB

OR

LSW

(4)

(2)

K2

K1

(1)

(2)

(H1)

(3)

2FU

(4)

R

(5) (6)

(5)

F

(6)

(3) (4)

K6

(5)

OL

(6)

(3)

(4)

(1)

(2)

(3)

K5

(4)

(1)

(2)

(H2)

K4

(1) (2)

(2)

1FU

(1)

T

1

X1

(X1) (X2)

X2

Gnd

[ Input ]

T3

T2

T1

MOTOR

➀

Polarity sensitive.

[ Output ]

[ Output ]

8

(14)

➀

F

(13)

5

[ Input ]

➀

F

(12)

(11) (A)

R

(B)

7

9

➀

(14)

R

(13)

➀

3

(12)

R

(11)

(A)

6

F

(B)

40

[ Input ]

OL

(7) (8)

X2

T3

T2

T1

2

1

4

3

TB

1

X2

T3

T2

T1

5

3

9

8

TB

L17

L

L

L18


Typical Circuits

RVNR-AT with PLC


L1 L2

L3

Starting Autotransformer

1

2

3

Taps

1

Line Volts

50%

0

F

2

3

65%

90%

Size 4

STAB

(3)

(2)

(1)

L3

L2

L1

(5) (6)

K3

CB

(3)

OR

LSW

(1)

(4)

(2)

K2

K1

Autotransformer

Connection

Size 4 - Tap 2

(5)

(3)

(1)

R

(5)

1S

(6)

FC (FC) (3C)

(6)

AT

(1C) (9C) 0C

(2C)

(3)

(4)

(4)

FB (FB) (3B)

(1B) (9B)

(2B)

(4)

2S

(3)

0B

(1)

(2)

(2)

FA (FA) (3A)

(1A)(2A)

(2A)

(1) 2S

(2)

0A

K6

(6)

(5)

2S

K5

K4

(5)

(3)

(1)

OL

(6)

(4)

(2)

TR

(13) (14)

43

Inst.

H1

(2)

3FU

(1)

K1 K2

(3)

3FU

(4)

H2

(65)

TR

(66) (13)

1S

(14)

TO 44 45

(A)

2S

(B)

(A)

1S

(B)

R

(13) (14)

46

(57)

TC

TR

(58)

47

(13)

2S

(14)

48

(A)

R

(B)

1

(2)

1FU

(1)

X1

(H1)

(X1)

(H2)

T

(X2)

Gnd

X2

T3

T2

T1

MOTOR

1

X2

3

2

T3

T2

T1

TB

[ Output ]

2

(11)

1S

(12)

(11)

R

(12)

3

(A1)

TR

(A2)

OL

(7) (8)

TDAE

40

(10 sec)

(1)

OTT

(2)

39

[ Input ]


Typical Circuits

2S2W with PLC


2S2W

Ref GEN 1000A Fig 5

L1 L2

L3

1

(2)

STAB

(3)

L3

(2)

L2

(1)

L1

(5)

(6)

K3

(3)

(1)

CB

OR

LSW

(4)

(2)

K2

K1

1FU

(1)

2FU

(H1)

X1

(X1)

T

(H2)

(X2)

K9

SOL

(5) (6)

(3) (4)

K8

(3) (4)

(1) (2)

K7

(1) (2)

(5)

FS

(6)

K6

(5)

FOL

(6)

(3)

(4)

K5

(3) (4)

(1) (2)

K4

(1) (2)

X2

Gnd

T1

T13

T2

T12

T3

T11

MOTOR

1

X2

5

3

T13

9

8

T12

T11

T3

T2

T1

TB

[ Output ]

[ Output ]

➀

(14)

SS

(13)

8

3

➀

(11)

FS

(12)

(A)

6

SS

(B)

4Ø

(7)

SOL

(8)

39

(7)

FOL

(8)

[ Input ]

5

➀

(11)

SS

(12) (A)

7

FS

(B)

(14)

➀

FS

(13)

9

[ Input ]

➀

Polarity sensitive.

L19

L

L

L20


Typical Circuits

ASTAT XT



Typical Circuits

ASTAT XT Bypass


L21

L

L

L22


Typical Circuits

ASTAT XT Isolation Bypass



Typical Circuits

ASTAT XT Bypass Emergency Bypass


L23

L

L

L24


Typical Circuits

ASTAT XT Isolation Bypass Emergency Bypass



Typical Circuits

ASTAT BP


L25

L

L

L26


Typical Circuits

ASTAT BP Isolation



Typical Circuits


AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Drives

L1 L2 L3

STAB

[3]

L3

[2]

L2

[5]

[3]

CB

[6]

K3

[4]

K2

[1]

L1

[1] [2]

K1

[E104A]

[A1]

[A2]

[B1]

REA

[B2]

R S

[C1]

[C3]

T

AF6

4–20mA

OR

0–10VDC

REMOTE

[91]

[L1]

[92]

[L2]

[93]

[L3]

RED

BLK

C1

11

GND

SHLD

[54]

[55]

[53]

[50]

AF-600FP / AF-650GP

[88]

[89]

DC

Bus

[98]

[97]

[96]

[99]

RUN

[14] [13]

CM FWD

[95]

GND

RELAY 2

(RUN)

[06]

[05]

[04]

[18]

[START]

[18]

[REVERSE]

[+24V OUT]

[12]

[+24V OUT]

[13]

[20]

[03] 71

[02] 72

[01] 70

4

1

[27]

[COAST/LOW]

[29]

[JOG]

[32]

[33]

Analog

Output

4-20mA

[39]

[42]

RS-485

Interface

[68]

[69]

[61]

Brake

Resistor

[82]

[81]

W

V

U

LFTR

[C1] [C2]

[B1] [B2]

[A1] [A2]

T3

T2

T1

SETTINGS

F01 – [2] ANALOG INPUT 54

F02 – [0] LINKED TO HAND/AUTO

E24 RELAY 1 – [9] ALARM

E24 RELAY 2 – [5] RUNNING

E01 – [8] START

E03 – [0] NO OPERATION

MOTOR

1

K1

[1]

K2

[3]

[2]

1FU

[1]

H1

[2]

[4]

H2

[H1] [H2]

T

X1 [X1] [X2] X2

GND

JPR 18

5

3

RUN

[A1] [A2]

JPRX2

72

71

70

21

20

18

5

X2

X2

3

1

11

C1

TB DTB

AF6

[RUN]

[04] [05]

4

RUNX

[13] [14]

20

RUNX

[21] [22]

Note: See Section K for more circuits.

21

FAN2

[1] [2]

DRCNN

[MLE] [FML]

FAN1

[1] [2]

RUNX

[A1] [A2]

DRCNN

[MLE] [FML]

L27

L

L


Typical Circuits

High-Resistance Ground


System Normal

Gnd Fault Alarm

Display Cable

Neutral Voltage

Neutral Ground

Neutral Current

Neutral Ground

GND

Future

14

12

13

AS

15

Pulse

Relay

External

Horn

Com Reset

Silence

External Control

13

Ctrl Power

Line Com

GND

13

PX

G

14

T1 35

37 T2

T3 36

TB12

31

40

F1

F6

10

11

30 32

F7

33

34

F2

32

11

F4

24

TB15

NGR

12

SW1

TB14

19

L1

L2

L3

TB1

TB2

TB3

32

F3

TR

TO 240-600V

SOURCE

TEST RESISTOR

SYMBOL

AS

CPT

F(X)

GND

NGR

PB1

PX

SW1

TR

T(X)

UVR

DESCRIPTION

ARC SUPPRESSOR

CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER

LINE FUSE

GROUND BUS

NEUTRAL GRD RESISTOR

TEST PUSHBUTTON

PULSING CONTACTOR

DISCONNECT SWITCH

TEST RELAY

TRANSFORMER

UNDER VOLTAGE RELAY

GND

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

TEST RESISTOR

CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER

17

UVR

G

14

Operator Interface

UVR

UNDER VOLTAGE RELAY

18

SYSTEM TEST

PB1

16

TR

1.

NOTES

ALL INTERNAL CONTROL WIRING TO BE 600V,

#14 AWG TERMINATED W/PREINSULATED SHANK

RING & COMPRESSION TERMINAL. RESISTOR WIRING

TO BE #8 TEFLON WIRE. EQUIPMENT & DEVICE

GROUND WIRE SHALL BE INDEPENDENTLY

TERMINATED ON THE GROUND BUS.

15

16

SYSTEM TEST

PB1

18

CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS

240-600V(L-L)

(50 OR 60 Hz)

GROUND FAULT

ALARM CONTACTS

(SYSTEM NORMAL)

TO GROUND BUS

TO TEST RESISTOR

TO RESISTOR (PULSE LEVEL)

TO RESISTOR(FAULT LEVEL)

NO

COM

NC

TB

3

4

5

6

2

1

7

8

9

10

15

16

17

11

12

13

14

SW1-L1

SW1-L2

SW1-L3

52

50

24

51

GND

GND

19

PX-L1

TERMINAL

STRIP

12

PX-T1

TB17

12

10

F1

31

G

PULSING CONTACTOR

NGR

1-7A

TOP VIEW

TOP BANK

17 1/2"

LC660

15 3/4"

LC300

LC660

N1

LC300

TEST

LC300

GND

3"

3"

2"

(4) 7/8" X

5/8" DIA. SLOTS

N6

BOTTOM BANK

17 1/2"

15 3/4"

N2

LC440

LC88

LC63

LC75

N5

N3

LC210

LC132

LC75

N7

LC75

N4

LC75 LC75

GND

3"

3"

2"

(4) 7/8" X

5/8" DIA. SLOTS

FRONT VIEW RIGHT SIDE VIEW

1-10A

PX

F1

2.5A

3.5A

24

TB15

F6

2.5A

3.5A

L1

L1

L2

L2

SW1

L3

L3

10 11 32

DISCONNECT SWITCH

11

F6

40

32 32 32 11

F7

.8A

F2

3.5A

F3

.8A

F4

30 33 20 34

FUSES

FUSES

F7

2.5A

3.5A

19

20

2 4

6 8

3

7

TR

0

1

16

G

14

31

T1

(240-600/120V)

H1

X1

H2

H3

X2

H4

37

35

13

G

CPT

14

40

T2

(240-600/120V)

H1

X1

H2

H3

X2

H4

35

36

2.

DASHED CONNECTIONS TO BE MADE BY CUSTOMER.

T3

(240-600/120V)

30

H1

X1 36

H2

H3

X2 37

14 H4

33

34

17

6 5 4 3

7 8 1 2

GND 13

UVR

14

6"

12"

12"

2 BANKS, EACH 17 1/2

(1) 10 COILS/BANK. (1) 5 COILS/BANK. 2727-5P

ENDFRAMES. TURN FLANGES IN. TERMINALS UP.

FURNISH JUMPERS.

L28


Typical Circuits

MM200


L29

L

L

L30


Typical Circuits

MM300



Specifications

Specification for Motor Control Centers

600 Volts and Below

1.0 General

This specification covers low voltage motor control centers with combination starter units.

permit the installation of field wiring and shall isolate this wiring from the adjacent unit. No terminal blocks shall be located in the vertical wireway. Cable tie supports shall be furnished in the vertical wireway to hold cable and wiring in place. The vertical wiring trough shall be covered by a removable hinged door. [A low-level signal raceway shall be provided.]

1.1 Standards

The motor control centers shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with NEMA ICS 2-3 and UL Standard 845. Vertical sections and individual units shall be UL Labeled where possible.

3.0 Incoming Power/ Main Protective Device

Incoming power to the motor control center shall be [cable]

[bus duct]. [Incoming power cables shall enter the [top] [bottom] of the motor control center.] [Incoming cables shall be of the size and number shown on the plans.] [Incoming bus duct shall enter the top of the motor control center and shall have a current rating as shown on the plans.]

1.2 Service

Each motor control center shall be suitable for use on a

_______ volt, three phase, _____ wire, ______ Hertz power system having a short circuit availability of _____________ amperes RMS symmetrical.

The motor control center main protective device shall be a

[molded case circuit breaker] [insulated case circuit breaker]

[fused switch]. The main device shall be of the ampere rating shown on the plans and shall have an interrupting rating equal to or greater than the available short circuit current.

1.3 Wiring

Wiring shall be NEMA Class [ I ] [ II ], Type [ A ] [ BD ] [ BT ]

[ C ]. Where Type C wiring is required, the master terminal blocks shall be located at the [top] [bottom] of the vertical section. Combination starter units shall be wired out to split type terminal blocks for easy removal of the starter unit without disturbing either factory or field installed wiring. All control terminal boards shall be accessible from the front.

4.0 Bus System

2.0 Construction

Indoor enclosures shall be NEMA Type [1- Gasketed] [2] [12 ].

Indoor enclosures shall be suitable for front mounting. Outdoor enclosures when specified, shall be NEMA [3R Non-Walk-In] or [3R Walk-in]. The motor control center shall be seismic rated for UBC/CBC Zone 4.

4.1 Main Horizontal Bus

Power shall be distributed by means of a continuous horizontal bus with a current rating of [600] [800] [1200] [1600] [2000]

[2500] amperes. The main bus shall be [tin-plated .0003 inch thick] [standard silver-plated .0002 inch thick] [heavy silverplated .0005 inch thick] copper. The main bus shall be braced for [65,000][100,000] amperes RMS symmetrical. The main bus shall be isolated by barriers from wire troughs, starters, and other areas. There shall be double bolt connections on main bus joints and splice connections. Main bus splicing between shipping splits shall be accomplished from the front with no structural disassembly. The main bus shall be fully rated and arranged for future extension.

Each motor control center shall consist of the required number of vertical sections of heavy gauge sheet steel bolted together to form a rigid self-supporting assembly. A removable lifting angle shall be mounted to the motor control center at the top. Removable bottom channel sills shall be mounted front and rear of the vertical sections and shall extend the width of the lineup.

4.2 Vertical Bus

The vertical bus in each section shall be rated [300] [600]

[850]*amperes and shall be [tin-plated] [silver-plated].

*(1200A Main bus or greater)

Motor control center vertical sections shall be nominally 90inch high and 20-inch deep. Alternate section heights shall be 78" or 66". Alternate section widths shall be 24-inches or

30-inches wide when required.

2.1 Horizontal Wireway

Each vertical section shall contain a minimum 12-inch high top horizontal wireway and a 6” bottom wireway. When loads exit the bottom a 12” bottom wireway shall be provided. The horizontal wireway shall be covered by a removable hinged door.

The vertical bus shall be braced for [65KAIC] [100KAIC]. The vertical bus shall have a flame-retardant polyester-glass insulation / isolation system. This system shall insulate the vertical bus front and rear. In addition, the barrier shall isolate each phase bus. Openings in the vertical bus insulation/isolation system shall permit the entry of unit stabs. Unused openings shall have plugs or covers to prevent the entry of foreign objects. [The openings in the vertical bus used for starter connections shall be covered by an automatic shutter mechanism. The shutters shall automatically cover the openings when the starter is removed.]

2.2 Vertical Wiring Trough

A separate vertical wiring trough shall be furnished in each vertical section adjacent to plug-in unit. The wire trough shall

The vertical bus bracing AIC rating shall be the same as the main horizontal bus.

M1

M


Specifications

M

4.3 Ground Bus

A copper ground bus shall extend the full width of the motor control center. The ground bus shall be rated [300] [600] amperes. The ground bus shall be drilled and lugs furnished as specified. [There shall be a vertical copper ground bus in each section. This ground bus shall be accessible to a bus stab mounted in the unit compartment area and arranged so that the unit ground stab engages before the power stabs engage the vertical bus]. [A motor load ground lug shall be mounted in the unit and used for terminating the ground of multi-conductor cables.] disengaged from the vertical bus and no power can enter the unit.

Combination starter units specified with Type B or C wiring shall be supplied with split-type terminal blocks. These terminal blocks shall be mounted in front of the unit and shall allow the removal of the unit without disconnecting any of the control wiring. Combination starter units up to size 5 shall be plug-in construction and shall be capable of being removed without disconnecting any control leads from their terminal blocks.

4.4 Neutral Bus

A neutral bus shall be furnished when shown on the plans.

The neutral bus shall be [300] [600] [800] [1000] [1200] [1250].

The neutral bus shall [be in the incoming section only]

[extend the full-width] of the motor control center. When a neutral bus is specified, bottom plates shall be furnished.

Lugs of the proper ampacity shall be furnished.

5.0 Units

Combination motor controller and feeder units shall employ

[molded case circuit breakers] [fusible switches with clips for

J or R type fuses] for branch circuit protection. Circuit breaker disconnects for combination motor starters shall be [thermalmagnetic] [magnetic only].

Overload relays shall be: {select one}

[Bimetallic, ambient compensated]

[Bimetallic, non-ambient compensated]

[Solid-state, ambient insensitive, self powered, adjustable

FLA, adjustable phase unbalance, phase loss protection, and selectable overload class (10, 20, 30) with 2% accuracy and repeatability, built-in thermal memory to prevent hot motor starts, isolated 1NO and 1 NC auxiliary contacts]

[Advanced microprocessor based motor protection, Dip switch selectable Phase loss protection/Phase Unbalance, adjustable FLA, Selectable overload class (10, 20, 30)]

[Ground fault protection]

Provisions to Communicate over the following Protocol:

[DeviceNet] [Modbus RTU]

All combination starter and feeder units of plug-in construction shall utilize a positive guidance system to insure positive connection of the unit stabs to the section vertical bus.

Insertion and removal of each unit shall not require the use of special tools. Unit shelves shall be of a lift out design.

Connection from the power stabs to the unit disconnect shall be a direct connection. Each circuit breaker starter unit size 1 through size 5 shall be of plug-in construction. Each circuit breaker feeder 600A or less shall be plug-in.

Each unit compartment shall be equipped with a flange-formed pan type door. The door shall be mounted on the vertical section with removable hinges.

The following minimum information shall be available over the Network.

• Metering (Average Phase Current in Amps, Control Voltage,

Motor Run Time)

• Starter Status and Configuration Notification (Run,

Overload, Ground Fault, Phase Unbalance, Commanded

Trip, Class setting)

• Information (Voltage, Internal failure, 100% Motor Load

Warning)

• Remote Control (On, Off, Trip, Reset)

[Provide a Display Module for accessing at the unit all Network data] [Door mounted] [Hand held using phone jack on the door].

Each unit shall be equipped with an operating handle. The handle shall be connected to the disconnect operator using a direct drive and requiring no adjustment of linkage. The handle shall be mechanically interlocked with the door, preventing door opening with disconnect closed. The interlock shall also prevent disconnect being closed with the door open and prevent the unit from being removed or installed with disconnect ON.

The interlock shall be capable of being defeated, allowing the door to be opened with disconnect closed or disconnect closed with the door open. The unit handle shall have provision for padlock ing in the off position. On circuit breaker units the handle shall have a “tripped” position in addition to OFF/ON.

Each unit shall be capable of being padlocked in a partially withdrawn position. In this position, the unit power stabs are

Control power for starter units shall be from: {select one}

[Individual control power transformers furnished in each starter unit. One secondary lead shall be furnished with a fuse and the other lead shall be grounded. Control power primary fuses are required].

[Line voltage. Control circuits on all starter units with line voltage control power shall be provided with current limiting fuses mounted in both legs of the control circuit].

[Separate source (common control)] Two wired terminal points shall be provided. One leg shall be wired through a normally open auxiliary contact in each disconnect and a control power fuse rated 1 amp shall be provided.]

M2


Specifications

Starter units shall be provided with the following auxiliary devices:

[auxiliary starter interlocks, ______ N/O, ______N/C].

[control / timing relays (as shown on the drawings)].

[door mounted pilot devices: Start-stop pushbutton, H-O-A selector switch, Indicating lights (quantity and color)].

Miscellaneous Units

The following units shall be included in the motor control center(s) as indicated on the drawings:

[Lighting and Power transformers]

[Lighting panelboards]

[Power metering and associated instrument transformers, where required]

[Power factor correction capacitors]

[Reduced Voltage Solid State]

[Variable Frequency Drives]

[PLC’s]

M3

M

Imagination at work

GE

41 Woodford Avenue

Plainville, CT 06062 www.geindustrial.com

* Indicates a trademark of the General Electric Company and/or its subsidiaries.

Information provided is subject to change without notice. Please verify all details with GE. All values are design or typical values when measured under laboratory conditions, and GE makes no warranty or guarantee, express or implied, that such performance will be obtained under end-use conditions.

DET-291F 0615